Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

Karatina University Course List, Fees, Requirements, How to Apply

Karatina University Course List, Fees, Requirements, How to Apply

Academic Programmes

Our Academic Programmes

School of Education And Social Sciences

Our Academic Programmes

Did not find Your Preferred Course?

Click Here to Search for Programmes

How to Apply

Karatina University has intakes in January, May, and September for Full Time, Weekend and Evening classes.

Application Procedure:

Masters, undergraduate and Diploma programmes Download Application form Here

PhD Programme Application form Download Here

Application fee is Ksh. 3,000 for PhD programmes, Ksh. 2,000 for Masters Programmes, Ksh. 1,000 for Undergraduate Programmes and Ksh. 500 for Diploma Programmes.

Payments should be made in Bankers Cheque in favour of Karatina University or direct deposit to the University Account: Equity Bank, Karatina Branch, Ac. No. 0040298291603

Duly filled application forms (with relevant certificates and application payment slip attached) can be dropped at Karatina University, Main Campus, School of Business, Karatina Towns or  sent to

The Registrar
(Academic, Research and Student Affairs)
P.O. Box 1957 – 10101,
KARATINA, KENYA.

 Or Email: admissions@karu.ac.ke 

Or call Admission office through 0716135171

Application forms can also be obtained from Karatina University, Main Campus, School of Business, Karatina Towns.

Grade 5 Latest Rationalized Notes

Download free Grade 5 Latest Rationalized Notes for all subjects and topics, here:

GRADE 5 FREE NOTES DOWNLOADS

SOCIAL GRADE 5 NOTES

GRADE 5 SOCIAL STUDIES NOTES

CRE GRADE 5 NOTES

GRADE 5 ENGLISH NOTES-1

GRADE 5 FRENCH GUIDE NOTES

GRADE 5 MATHEMATICS NOTES-1

GRADE 5 RATIONALIZED SCIE & TECH NOTES

G5 CREATIVE ARTS AND SPORTS

Grade 5-cbc-social-studies-activities–notes

G5 CREATIVE ARTS AND SPORTS

MORE GRADE 5 NOTES DOWNLOADS

Teachers arena CBC notes,
Teachers arena notes Grade 6,
Teachers arena notes grade 9,
Teachers arena notes Grade 8,
Grade 4 NOTES(PDF),
Teachers arena Notes,
Agriculture and nutrition grade 5 notes,
Grade 7 notes teachers arena,

CURRENT ELECTRICITY (II) UPDATED NOTES

Chapter Five

CURRENT ELECTRICITY (II)

ELECTRIC CURRENT AND POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE

  • A basic electric circuit comprises electrical components, i.e., bulbs, cells, etc., connected together by copper wires to enable electric charges to flow from oneterminal of the electrical source, through the components, to the other terminal.

Electric Current

  • An electric current is the rate of flow of charge through a conductor.
  • Electric current is measured using anammeter.

 

Using an Ammeter

  • Before connecting the ammeter in the circuit, ensure that the pointer is at zero mark on the scale.

If this is not the case, use the zero adjusting screw to move it to the correct position,

  • The ammeter is an instrument oflow resistance.

It is thus connected in series with other components in the circuit so that conventional current enters the ammeter through its positive terminal and exits through the negative terminal.

If the terminals are interchanged, the pointer moves away from thescale in anticlockwise direction. This can damage the instrument.

  • An appropriate scale should be selected to safeguard the coil of the meter from blowing up.

If 5A scale is selected, the meter can safely read up to a maximum of 5 A.

With such a scale, ten divisions represent 1A.

For scale of2.5 A, ten divisions represent 0.5A.

  • The readings on the ammeter are 2.45Awhen using 0 – 5 A scale, or 1.225A for0 – 5 scale.
  • It should be noted that more accurate digital ammeters are available in the market.

Potential Difference

  • Electric potential difference (p. d) is defined as the work done per unit charge in moving charge from one point to another.
  • The device that produces energy to do this work is called a source of electromotive force (e.m.f).

The source may be :

  • a battery, which converts chemical energy to electrical energy,
  • a generator, which converts mechanical energy to electrical energy.
  • When the battery does the work of ‘pumping’ charges through a conductor or an electrical device, an electric potential difference (p.d.) develops between its ends.
  • This potential difference is measured in volts using the voltmeter.

From the equation, one volt is equal to one joule per coulomb.
Example 1

In moving a charge of 10 coulombs from point B, 120 joules of work is done. What is the
potential difference between A and B?

Solution

Using a Voltmeter

  • The pointer is adjusted to zero as with the ammeter.
  • A voltmeter is always connected across (in parallel to) the device across which the voltage is to be measured.
  • This is because it is an instrument with high resistance to flow of current, hence takes little current in the circuit.
  • Note that the positive terminal of the voltmeter is connected to the positive terminal of the electrical power source.
  • The appropriate scale should be selected, and, when taking the reading, parallax error
    should be avoided.

Points at Same Electric Potential

  • The two voltmeters VI and V2in figure below indicate the same reading.
  • This is because a good conductor of electricity joins points A and D.
  • The same applies to points Band C.
  • Points A and D are said to be at the same electric potential, so are points Band C.
  • Each of the voltmeters VIand V 2 therefore measure the potential difference (or voltage) between points Aand B.
  • Note that the electric potential at A is higher than that at B, hence, conventional current flows from point A to B through an external circuit (bulb).

 

To investigate the current and voltage in a parallel circuit arrangement

Apparatus

Two 1.5 V cells, 3 identical bulbs, 3 ammeters, 4 voltmeters, switch, connecting wires.

Procedure

  • Connect the circuit as shown in ABOVE
  • Switch on the circuit and take the readings on the ammeters A1‘ A2, A3and A4.
  • Switch off the circuit and disconnect the ammeters.
  • Connect the voltmeters as shown in figure BELOW
  • Take the readings on V1′ V2, V3 and V4

Observation

  • Reading on A1+ Reading on A2 + Reading onV3= Reading on A4
  • Reading on VI = Reading on V2= Reading on V3 = Reading on V4

Note:

When components are connected in parallel:

  • the sum of the currents in parallel circuits is equal to the total current. Thus, the total current flowing into a junction equals the total current flowing out.
  • the same voltage drops across each of them (since their terminals are at the same electric
    potential),

 

Example 2

Find the current passing through L1in figure below given that 0.8 A passes through the battery, 0.28 A through L2 and 0.15 A though L3

To investigate current and voltage in series arrangement

Apparatus

Three ammeters, four voltmeters, three 2.8 V torch bulbs, holder, switch, connecting wires,
two cells.

 

 

Procedure

  • Connect the circuit as shown in figure above
  • Switch on the circuit and record the ammeter readings.
  • Switch off the current and disconnect the ammeters.
  • Connect the voltmeters as shown in figure below

Switch on the circuit and record the voltmeter readings.

Observations

(i) The reading of current by the ammeters A1and1A2 and A1, is the same.

(ii) The total voltage drops across the bulbs (V 1+ V 2 + V 3) equals the total voltage V 4 acrossthe terminals of the battery.

Note:

The above statements are true even when the bulbs are not identical.

 

 

Conclusion

In a series arrangement,

  • the same current flows through each component.
  • The sum of the voltage drops across the components is equal to supply voltage.

 

Example 3

In the circuit shown below, what is the potential difference across the bulb and the switchwhen the:
(a) switch is open?

(b) switch is closed?

 

 

 

 

 

(a)     Potential difference across the bulb is zero since no current is flowing through it, while
the p.d across the switch is 1.5 V.

(b) The p.d across the bulb is 1.5 V, since a closed switch is a conductor and has zero voltage.

 

 

OHM’S LAW

The relationship between the voltage across a conductor and the current flowing through it is
summarized in what is referred to as Ohm’s law.

To investigate the relationship between current and voltage across a nichrome wire

Apparatus

Two-metre nichrome wire, 2 dry cells, ammeter, voltmeter, connecting wires, switch, rheostat.

Procedure

  • Set up the circuit as shown in figure above
  • Set the current flowing in the circuit to the least possible value.
  • With the help of the rheostat, vary in steps the current flowing in the circuit and note the corresponding voltage drop across the coil.
  • Record the results in table
  • Plot a graph of voltage against current.
Current(A)                
Voltage(v)                

Observation

As current increases, voltage across the coil also increases.

A graph of voltage against current is a straight line, as shown in figure

 

Conclusion

  • The graph obtained is a straight line that passes through the origin.
  • Voltage is therefore directly proportional to current.
  • The gradient i.e is constant known as the resistance of the wire
  • The resistance
  • The S1 unit of resistance is the Ohm (Q).
  • This is known as Ohm’s law, which states that the current flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference across it provided the temperature and other physical conditions are kept constant.
  • Ohms’ law can be verified using the same procedure as in experiment above, with the coil being replaced by a standard resistor.
  • The graph of current against voltage is a straight line through the origin.

 

Voltage (Volts)

  • The gradient of the graph, , gives the reciprocal of resistance (conductance whose unit is Ω-1or Siemens (s)
  • Thus, resistance =
  • Since V
  • V = IR, where V is the potential difference, I the current and R the resistance.
  • Thus, Ohm’s law can also be expressed as
  • From Ohm’s law, an ohmis defined as the resistance of a conductor when a current of 1 A flowing through it produces a voltage drop of 1 V across its ends. The multiples of ohms in common use are:
  • 1 kilohm (kΩ) = 1 000 Ω
  • 1 Megohm (MΩ) = 1 000 000 Ω

 

Example 4

A current of 4 mA flows through a conductor of resistance 2 00Ω. Calculate the voltage across the conductor.

Solution

Example 5

Calculate the current in amperes flowing through a device of resistance 50Ω when a 10 V
source is connected to it.

Solution

Example 6

In order to start a certain car, a current of 30 A must flow through the starter motor. Calculate
the resistance of the motor given that the battery supplies a voltage of 12 V. Ignore the internal resistance of the battery.

 

Ohmic and Non-ohmic Conductors

  • Conductors that obey Ohm’s law (i.e., voltage across is directly proportional to current) are called ohmic conductors.
  • Nichrome wire in experiment above is an ohmic conductor.
  • When theexperiment is repeated with a torch filament, an electrolyte, a thermistor, a semiconductor diode, a thermionic diode or discharged tubes in place of the nichrome coil, the following I-V graphs are obtain

 

 

  • A material whose graph is not a straight-line graph is said to be non-ohmic.
  • The resistance of such a material changes with current flow.

 

Electrical Resistance

  • Electrical resistance is the opposition offered by a conductor to the flow of electric current.
  • It occurs when a charge flowing through a conductor has its movement impeded by collisions with the atom and impurities in the conductor.

 

Factors that affect the Resistance of a Metallic Conductor

Temperature

  • The resistance of good conductors of electricity, like metals, increases with increase temperature.
  • Heating increases the vibrations of atoms thereby increasing the collisions per cross-section area of the conductor.
  • The opposition to the flow of electrons thus increases as temperature is increased.
  • This does not, however, mean that the resistance of, say, copper can fall to zero at extremely low temperatures.
  • Length of the Conductor
  • The resistance R of a uniform conductor of a given material is directly proportional to its length l i.e
  • Hence ,resistance = constant x length…………………………………… (l)
  • So, for a given conductor,
  • As the length of the conductor increases, so does the resistance.
  • Cross-section Area
  • The resistance of a wire is inversely proportional to its cross-section area A.
  • A conductor with a larger cross-section area has many free electrons for conduction, hence better conductivity.

From the above

Resistance x cross-section area = constant …………………………………(2)

For a given conductor therefore, RA = constant.

Combining equation 1 and equation 2

where  is the resisitivity of the material.

  • The resistivity of a material is numerically equal to the resistance of a sample of the material of unit length and unit cross section area at a certain temperature.
  • The unit of p is the ohm-metre (Om).
  • The resistivity of a material is dependent on temperature. For metal conductors, it increases with increase in temperature while for semiconductors; it decreases with increase in temperature.

Note:

It is helpful to express all lengths in meters so as to obtain resistivity in ohm-metre units. Every material has its resisitivity

 

Material Resisitivity (Qm) Uses
Silver 1.6 x 10.8 Contacts on some switches
Copper 1.7 x 10.8 Connecting wires
Aluminium 2.8 x 10.8 Power cables
Tungsten 5.5 x 10.8 Lamp filaments
Constantan 49 x 10.8 Resistance boxes, variable resistors
Nichrome 100 x 10-8 Heating elements
Carbon 3000 x 10-8 Radio resistors
Glass 10-8_ 1014  
Polystyrene 1015  

 

Resistors

  • Resistors are conductors specially designed to offer particular resistance to the flow of electric current.
  • They are made from many different materials which include resistance wires, metal
    alloys and carbon.
  • Most wire-wound resistors are made of nichrome wire covered with an insulating material.
  • Some metals may not make good resistors because of the effect of temperature on their resistance.
  • Temperature does not however show significant effect on the resistance of some other materials like constantan and manganin.
  • These metals may be mixed with carbon to make standard resistors.

 

Types of resistors

Fixed resistor

  • They include wire-wound and carbon resistors.
  • They are designed to give fixed resistance.
  • The symbol for a fixed resistor.

 

 

 

  • A fixed resistor can be wire (e.g. nichrome) wound or carbon type.

Variable Resistors

These are resistors with a varied range of resistance. They include:

  1. Rheostat

A rheostat is a two-terminal variable resistor represented in electrical circuits by the symbol

Moving the sliding contact along the length of the resistant material varies the resistance
between points A and B.

When the contact is nearer end A, the resistance of the rheostat is lower.

 

  1. Potentiometer

The potentiometer is a variable resistor with three terminals.

Its symbol is shown above.

In potentiometers, a contact is moved to select desired proportions of the total voltage across them.

 

Non-Linear Resistors

The current flowing through these resistors does not change linearly with the changes in the
applied voltage.

Such resistors include the thermistor and light dependent resistor (LDR).

  1. Light-dependent Resistor (LDR)

The resistance of an LDR decreases when it receives light of increasing intensity. Its symbol

 

  1. Thermistor

The thermistor is a temperature-dependent resistor.

Its resistance decreases with increase in temperature.

The electrical symbol of a thermistor is

Thermistors are used in heat-operated circuits.

 

To determine the resistance of a resistor using the voltmeter-ammeter method

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Procedure

Set up the circuit as shown in the figure 5.24.

With the switch open, record the voltmeter reading V and the corresponding ammeter reading I.
Switch on the current and, by adjusting the variable resistor, record at least five other
values of V and the corresponding I.

Record your results in the table 5.3.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Table 5.3 Compare values of i

Plot a graph of V (vertical axis) against I. Note the shape of the graph.
Determine the slope (gradient) of the graph.

Observation

When the switch is open, no current flows through the resistor and therefore both the ammeter
and the voltmeter reading is zero.

When the current through the resistor increases, the voltage across it also increases. An
approximate value of the resistance of the resistor is obtained by dividing the value of the
voltage across the resistor by the corresponding current flowing through it and substituting in the

equationR = i.

The graph of V against I is a straight line whose gradient gives resistance, see figure
5.12. The resistance obtained cannot be accurate since the voltmeter takes some little current,
thus not all of it flows through the resistor.

The Wheatstone Bridge Method

The Wheatstone bridge consists of four resistors and a galvanometer, as shown in figure 5.25.
The operation of the bridge involves making adjustments to one or two of the resistors until
there is no deflection in the galvanometer.

 

Fig. 5.25: The Wheatstone bridge

The four resistors K, L, M and N are joined as shown. If K is the unknown resistance, the
values of L, M and N, or the ratio ofM to N must be known. A galvanometer G and a dry cell

are connected as shown.                         .

The variable resistor L (commonly a resistance box) is adjusted until there is no deflection
in G. The bridge is then said to be balanced. No current flows through G at balance and
therefore, the p.d. across BD is zero. At the same time, the potential difference across AB is
then equal to that across AD. Also, the same current I) flows through K and L and current 12

flows through M and N. Then;                                       .

11 = 13 and 12 = 14

Therefore, I) K = 12 M (from V = IR)
Similarly, ~L = I4N.

So, IlL=’I2N

11K _ 12M
IlLI2N

Therefore, ~ = ~ when the bridge is balanced.

The Wheatstone bridge is more accurate in measuring resistance than the voltmeter-
ammeter method because the value obtained by using the wheatstone bridge method does not
depend on the accuracy of the current-measuring instrument (galvanometer) used.

The Metre Bridge

Figure 5.26 shows a practical form of the Wheatstone bridge known as the metre bridge.

 

Fig. 5.26: Meter bridge

The wire AC of uniform cross-section area and length 1 m with a resistance of several ohms
and made of an alloy such as constantan. The length AD represents resistor M while length CD
represents resistor N. The ratio of M to N is altered by changing the position on the wire of the
movable contact D called ‘jockey’. The other arm of the bridge contains the unknown resistor
K and a known resistor L. The copper strips of low resistance connect the various parts. The
position of D is adjusted until there is no deflection in G. Then;

K = M = resistance of AD

L N resistance of DC

Since the wire is uniform cross-section, its resistance will be proportional to its length and

Hence’ K= AD _ XI
• L DC – X2

Thus K= LXI

, X2

The resistor L should be chosen to give balance points near the centre of the wire. This gives
a more accurate result. After obtaining the balance. K and L should be interchanged and a
second pair of values for XI and X2 obtained. This average of the value eliminates errors due to
non-uniformity of the wire and end corrections. In finding the balance point, the cell key or
switch should be closed before the jockey makes contact with the wire. This is necessary
because of the effect known as ‘self-induction’ in which the currents in the circuit take a short time to grow to their steady values. A high resistance should always be joined in series with
the galvanometer to protect it from damage whilst the balance is being sought.

Example 10

In an experiment to determine the resistance of a nichrome wire using the metre bridge, the
balance point was found to be at 38 em mark. If the value of the resistance in the right hand
gap needed to balance the bridge was 25 Q, calculate the value of the unknown resistor.

Resistor Networks

Resistors Connected in Series

Figure 5.28 shows three resistors connected in series.

 

 

 

 

Fig. 5.28: Resistorsin series

Since this is a series arrangement, V T = VI + Vz+ VyThe same current I flows through each of
the resistors. Using Ohm’s law and the fact that same current flows through the resistors;

I~ = I(RI+ R2+ R3)

Diving through by I;

Thereforfor resistors connected in series, the equivalent resistance is equal to the sum of individual resistances.

Example 11

Three resistors of 2.5 Q, 12 Q, and 3.5 Qare connected in series. What single resistor can
replace them in a circuit?

Example 12

Figure 5.29 shows three resistors in series connected to a power source. A current of 2 A flows
through the circuit.

 

 

Calculate:

(a) the voltage drop across each resistor.
(b) the voltage across the source.

(c) the total resistance in the circuit.

 

Resistors Connected in Parallel

Fig. 5.30 shows three resistorsRj, R, and R3 connected in parallel.

 

 

 

 

 

Example 13

The circuit diagram in figure 5.31 shows four resistors in parallel connected across a3 V supply.

 

 

Calculate:

(a) the effective resistance.

(b) the current through the 80 resistor.

Solution

 

(b) Current through the 8 0 resistor

 

 

Example 14

Two resistors

of 300 and 70 0 are connected in parallel. Calculate their equiva.ent resistance.

Example 15

Several 150 Q resistors are to be connected so that a current of 2 A flows from a 50 Y source.
How many resistors are required and how should they be connected?

Solution

Example 16

Calculate the current through each resistor in the figure 5.32.

 

 

Series Parallel Arrangement

To find the effective resistance of a series – parallel arrangement, the network is systematically
reduced into a single resistor.

Example 17

Determine

the equivalent

resistance for the resistors in figure 5.33.

Since the 30 ,Qand 70 ,Q resistors are in parallel, the two can be replaced by a single one whose
value is;

The 21 ,Qresistor is now in series with the 19,Q resistor, see figure 5.34 (b). The two resistors
can be replaced by a single resistor RAC= 19 + 21 = 40 ,Q, see figure 5.34 (c).

Example 21

Calculate the effective resistance in the figure 5.35.

 

Solution

The reduction begins by combining the 5 Q and 7 Q resistors, which are in series, to get 12 Q.
The circuit is then re-drawn as in figure 5.36 (a). The 12 Q resistor in parallel with the 8 Q

resistor may be replaced ~c == fft! == 4.8 Q. The circuit is re-drawn as in figure 5.36 (b).

 

Finally.the 4.8 Q is in series with the 4 Q resistor. giving an equivalent resistance of;
RAC== 4 +4.8

== 8.8Q

Example 19

Two resistors of 6 Q and 3 Q in parallel are connected in series to a 4 Q resistor and a cell of
e.m.f. 1.5 V. Calculate:

(a)     the equivalent resistance of the circuit.

(b) the current through each of the resistors and the p.d. across each.

Solution

(b) Total current flows through the 4 Q resistor.

Now 16Q + 13Q = 0.25 A…………….. :           (1)

But, voltage across 6 Q = voltage across-3Q

6 X 16Q = 3 X 13Q

13Q = 216Q …………………….•… ~       ·i •••••• (2)

Substituting (2) in (1);
16Q + 216Q = 0.25 A

3 x 16Q= 0.25

16Q = 0.0833 A
Substituting in (2);

13Q = 2 x 0.0833

= 0.167 A

V6Q = 0.0833 x 6
=,0.5V

This is also the voltage across the 3 Q resistor, since they are in parallel.

Alternatively; .

,To calculate current ,through either 6,Q or 3 Q .resistor, U1e p.d, across them.must be

found first. Thus, p.d. across 6Q& 3′ Q’ + p.d. across 4· Q ~ voltage’ ofthesupply

 

 

 

Voltage across 412 resistor == ‘0.25 x 4
= 1 V

Hence, the voltage across (6Q and 3Q) is;

V = 1.5-1
V=0.5V

 

CUrrent through 6 Q = 05
6
  = 8.33 x 1O-2A
Current through 3 Q = 0.5
  3
  = 1.67 X 10-1 A

 

 

 

 

Exampk20

Four resistors of 5 0, 13 0, 3 0 and 6 0 are connected to 6 V supply, as shown in figure 5.38.

 

Fig. 5.38
Calculate:

(a) the current through the 13 0 resistor.
(b) total current in the circuit.

(c) voltage V AB and V BO.

Solution

(a)   From figure 5.38 (a), current from the supply divides into two parts at junction A. Part of
it flows through the 5 0 resistor and the rest through 13 0 resistor. The current
through the 13 0 divides into two at junction B, some flowing through the 3 0 and the
rest through the 6 ,Q. The 3 ,Qand 6 ,Q resistors are in parallel and equivalent to a 2 ,Q
resistor, which would then be in series with the, 13 ,Q resistor. The circuitin figure 5.38
(a) is thus reduced to the one in figure 5.38 (b).

The 13 0 and 2 O’inseries”f<:nw a resistor that is in parallel with the 5 ,Q resistor.

The p.d. across the 13 ,Qand 2 ,Q resistor, is equal to the supply of 6 V.

6

Current through 13.Q = 13 + 2

= 6

15

= O.4A

 

 

 

 

(b)   Total current = current through 13 .Q resistor + current through 5 .Q resistor
Current through 13 .Q = 0.4 A

Current through 5,Q

p.d. across 5,Q

=         5Q

= 6

:5

= 1.2A

Therefore, current in the circuit = 0.4 + 1.2
= 1.6A

(c) VAB= 0.4×13

= 5.2V

VBD= VAC– VAB

= 1.2 x 5 – 5.2
=
6.0-5.2

= O.8V

Alternatively;
VBD= 0.4 x 2
= O.8V

Example 20

Figure 5.39 shows a current of 0.8 A passing through an arrangement of four resistors.

 

Find the current through the 10 Q resistor.
Solution

The network of resistors can be replaced by two resistors of 40 Q and 60 Q in parallel.

C

n _ p.d. between P and R

urrentoug             ;lot. –         (30 + 10)

P.d. between P and R = 0.8 X RE, where RE is equivalent resistance for the whole network.
R = 40×60

E        60+40

= 24Q

P.d. across P and R = 0.8 x 24
= 19.2

Therefore, current through 10

= 0.48A

 

 

ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE AND INTERNAL RESISTANCE

The function of a cell in a circuit is to supply electrical energy. By definition.the electromotive
force (e.m.f.) of a cell is the potential difference between its terminals when no charge is

flowing out of the cell (cell in open circuit).                                                    .

Figure 5.40 shows a circuit that may be used to demonstrate the difference between
e.m.f. of a cell and terminal voltage. The reading of the voltmeter when the switch is open is
the e.m.f. of the cell.

Once a cell supplies current to an external circuit, the potential difference across it
drops by a value referred to as ‘lost voltage’. This loss in voltage is due to the internal resistance
of the cell. The potential difference across the cell when the circuit is closed.is referred to
as the terminal voltage of the cell.

 

 

Fig. 5.40: Em.f. ofa cell

A cell or any source of e.m. f. is made up of materials that are not perfect conductors of electricity.
They therefore offer some resistance tothe flow of current that they generate. This resistance
is usually low and is called the internal resistance of the cell or battery.

Relationship between E.M.F. and Internal Resistance

If a resistor R is connected in series with a cell as shown in figure 5.41, the internal resistance
of the cell r is considered to be connected in series with the external resistor R.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fig. 5.41: Internal resistance of a cell

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Using the equation E = V + Ir and hence V = E – Ir, the gradient of the graph gives the internal
resistance r of the cell.

If the graph is extrapolated so as to cut the voltage axis, the point at which it does so
gives the e.m.f. of the cell.

Method 2

Apparatus

Ammeter, voltmeter, variable resistor, cells, connecting wires.

 

Fig. 5.44: Determination of internal resistance of a cell

Procedure

  • Switch on the circuit and increase the current in step from a minimum value.
  • Record the corresponding voltage V.
  • Complete the table 5.5.

Table 5.5

 

  • Plot a graph of i against R.
    Results and Observation

The graph is a straight line with a positive gradient.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fig. 5.45: Graph of fagainst R

The gradient of the graph gives ~. Internal resistance can be obtained in two ways:
(i) Extrapolating the graph to cut R axis gives r, see figure 5.45.

(ii) If the intercept on t axis is A, then, A = ~

 

 

 

 

Example 21

A battery consisting of four cells in series, each of e.m.f. 2.0 V and internal resistance 0.6 Q, is
used to pass a current through a 1.6 Q resistor. Calculate the current through the battery.

 

 

 

The e.m.f. of the battery is the sum of the e.m.f. of all the cells while the internal resistance of
the battery is the sum of all the internal resistances of the cells.

:. Current through battery =

Example 22

A cell drives a current of 2.0 A through a 0.6 Q resistor. When the same cell is connected to a
0.9 Q resistor, the current that flows is 1.5 A. Find the internal resistance and the e.m.f of the cell.

Solution

 

 

Taking E as e.m.f. ofthe cell and R the internal resistance;
E = 1R + Ir

From figure 5.46 (a);

 

 

 

 

E == (2.0 x 0.6) + 2.0r

=: 1.2 + 2r ……………………………………….. (1)

From figure 5.46 (b);

E = (1.5 x 0.9) + 1.5r

E =: 1.35 + 1.5r ……………………………….. (2)

Since the e.m.f. is the same in both circuits;
1.2 + 2r =: 1.35 + 1.5r

2r – 1.5r =: 1.35 – 1.2

0.5r = 0.15

r = 0.3 Q

Substituting for r in equation (1);
E =: 1.2 + 2r

E =: 1.2 + 2 x 0.3
E = 1.2 + O~6

= 1.8V

Exampie23

A battery consists of two identical cells, each of e.m.f. 1.5 V and internal resistance 0.6 Q,
connected in the parallel. Calculate the current the battery drives through a 0.7 Q resistor.

Solution

When identical cells are connected in parallel, see figure 5.47, the equivalent e.m.f. is equal to that of only one cell. The equivalent internal resistance is equal to that of two such resistors connected in parallel.

COMPUTER STUDIES PAPER ONE KCSE REVISION MOCKS

COMPUTER STUDIES

PAPER ONE

  1. Identify programming language used in the following generations:-                                      (i) First generations

(ii) Second generation

  1. Give importance of having the following in computer laboratory:-

(i) Standard furniture in the laboratory

(ii) Antiglare screen/monitor

(iii) UPS

  1. (a) Explain the following terms as used in booting:-

(i) BIOS

(ii) POST

(b) Differentiate between:-

(i) Backspace and delete keys on the keyboard

(ii) Insert and type over mode

  1. Explain the functions of the following central processing unit components

(i) ALU

(ii) Control unit

(iii) Primary memory

  1. (a) Differentiate between static RAM and Dynamic RAM

(b) Distinguish between compilers and interpreters

  1. (a) List two softcopy output devices

(b) Distinguish between impact and non-impact printers citing one example in each

  1. State two merits of using the following input devices:

(i) Speech recognition

(ii) Touch screen

  1. Differentiate between freeware and open source as end-user –license softwares.
  2. (a) List four types of system software

(b) Explain the following functions of the operating system           :-

(i) Job scheduling

(ii) Interrupt handling

  1. Explain the following disk management tools:-

(i) Disk formatting

(ii) Disk defragmentation

  1. Differentiate between the following terms as applied in operating system:-

(i) Multi-user

(ii) Multi-tasking

  1. Explain the following terms as applied in word processor

(i) Text wrap

(ii) Word wrap

  1. (a) Distinguish between first line and hanging indentation

(b) Differentiate between the following combinations of terms:-

(i) Filtering and sorting

(ii) Relative and absolute cell referencing

  1. (a) Differentiate between the following combinations of terms:-

(i) Filtering and sorting

(ii) Relative and absolute cell referencing

  1. Identify the elements of a function
  2. A class teacher of form 3E in Nzambani secondary school requested a programmer to design a

simple program that would help do the following:-

 

(a) Enter the names of students and marks obtained in 8 subjects; maths, English, Kiswahili,

Biology, Chemistry, Business Studies, History and Computer Studies.

(b) After entering each subject mark the program should calculate for each student

(c) Depending on the average mark obtained, the program should assign the grades as follows:-

Between 80 and 100 = A

Between 70 and 79 = B

Between 60 and 69 = C

Between 50 and 59 = D

Below 50 = E

(d) The program should display each students name, total marks and the average grade. Using a

flow chart, show the design of the program

 

 

  1. (a) Define the following terms in reference to the internet:-

(i) Protocol

(ii) Website

(iii) Search engine

(iv) Spam mail

(b)List three examples of search engines

(c) Identify the functions of the following devices in data communication:-

(i) Modem

(ii) Network interface card

(iii) Brouter

(d) Describe bounded and unbounded forms of communication giving two examples

in each case

(e) Outline four advantages of using fibre optic cables

  1. (a) Define the following terms as used in data representation

(i) Amplitude

(ii) Frequency

(iii) Nibble

(iv) Byte

(b) Perform the following 11111.11112 + 100001.10102 – 1111.001112                                                

(c) Using two’s complement subtract 73 from 115 and convert the answer to decimal notation

(d) Identify the duties of the following ICT specialists

(i)Software engineer

(ii) System analyst

(e) List two types of opportunities available in the field of computer hardware

  1. (a) Describe the following computer files

(i) Logical and physical files

(ii) Master and backup files

(b) Explain the following computational errors

(i) Truncation

(ii) Overflow

(iii) Rounding errors

(c) Define data integrity and state three ways of minimizing threats to data integrity

(d) Define virtual reality and state three ways of minimizing threats to data integrity

(e) Discus how computers are used in reservation systems

  1. (a) Explain the main activity carried out in each of the following system development stages

(i) Problem recognition

(ii) Coding

(iii) Implementation

(b) Explain the following changeover methods:-

(i) Direct

(ii) Parallel

(iii) Phased

(c) Explain two advantages of modular programming

(d) Explain how the use ICT may affect the society

(e) Explain the four main areas of artificial intelligence

 

 

*MAT*

  1. Distinguish between white-collar crime and blue –collar crimes
  2. Lutomia and Naibei were arguing about computer criminal. They realized four types of criminals

namely; thieves, burglars, terrorists, hackers and cracker. Briefly explain difference between

hackers and crackers

  1. State where the cell pointer on a worksheet moves when the following key combinations
  2. a) Crl + Home
  3. b) Shift + Tab

(c) End followed by down arrow key

(d) Shift + Enter

  1. Explain the meaning of the following domains on a web address

(a) .co.ke

(b) .ac.uk

(c)  .or.ug

  1. Study the flow chart below and write down the output from the table below is entered. Show your

working.

Nambwaya 59 60
Murono 60 62
Kisiang’ani 79 46
Makhanu 41 84

 

  1. (a) Distinguish between a primary key and index key as used in databases

(b) Explain the relevance of foreign key in a database entity

  1. Briefly explain how the operating system uses interrupt Request (IRQ) numbers to allocate

computer resources

  1. Name an input or output device used in the following tasks

(a) Capturing still images

(b) Printing detailed architectural designs

(c) Playing flight and driving games

(d) Capture data at ATM

  1. Outline three distinctions between a super computer and microcomputer
  2. Briefly explain four features of third computer generation
  3. Define the following terms as used with the internet;

(a) Surf

(b) Compose

(c) Cookie

  1. State four reasons why you would advertise a typesetter to use MS Publisher in designing

calendar other than MS Word

  1. Briefly explain how electronic spreadsheet is used in “What if analysis”
  2. The formula = $A4*C$3 was entered in cell D4. What will be the formula if it is copied to

cell F10

  1. Design a pseudo code for a program that will compute and display the are of a triangle whose

base is not less than 10cm

  1. Study the flow chart below and attempt questions that follow

(a) Your working what will be output if the following was entered?

Lutomia          65        50        46        77        76

Naibei             60        80        55        81        10

Nambwaya      80        15        40        82        60

Makhanu         50        35        70        40        43
Kisiang’ani     30        70        55        60        44

Murono           60        45        43        77        30

(b) Write a pseudo code equivalent for the above flowchart modifying it to compute result

of 100 students.

(c) Name any two control structures used in the flowchart above

  1. (a) Explain three negative impact of ICT on Kenyan culture

(b) Perform the following arithmetic operations

  1. 7658 + 16458
  2. ABCH + D1416
  • 71128 – 7678
  1. A14616 – BCD16

(c) Name at least two areas where the following processing modes are used

  1. Real time processing
  2. Distributed processing
  • Batch processing
  1. Time sharing processing

(d)Write the alternative name of the following types of software

(a) Bespoke

(b) Vendor-off-the-shelf software

  1.  (a) Explain RAD and structured approach as methods of system development

(b) Hassan was designing in out screens for the new school database management system.

Outline three factors she MUST consider during the designing

(c)State four difference between Low-level and High-level languages to a programmer

(d) Name any four public universities that offer computer courses at degree level

  1. (a) Simplex, Half duplex and full duplex are modes o data communication. With examples

of where used, explain each of these communication modes

(b) Distinguish between “wrap text” and “shrink to fit” as used in Microsoft Excel data

formatting

(c) Safaricom has implemented broadband as their modem communication technique. Explain

the meaning of broadband communication

(d) Continuous use of computers has adverse health effects. State five ways of averting these

effects

  1. (a) Artificial intelligence is out to develop devices that emulate a human being in all aspects

as applied in expert systems. Explain three components of expert systems

(b) Distinguish between job replacement and job displacement

(c) State four ways in which threats to data integrity may be minimized

(d) Name two programming languages in each of the following:

  1. OOPe
  2. Procedural language
  • 5GLs

 

*KKE*

  1. Distinguish between ROM and RAM.             (2 mks)
  2. (a) Convert the octal Number 11118 to its ten equivalent.             (2 mks)

(b) Convert 11.0112 to a decimal Number.                                                                            (2 mks)

  1. (a) Define the following terms with reference to computer crime.

(i)  Cracking.                                                                                                              (1 mk)

(ii) Hacking                                                                                                                (1 mk)

(b) State any two laws governing the information.                                                               (2 mks)

  1. Distinguish between job scheduling and job sequencing.             (2 mks)
  2. List any four precautions that must be observed in a computer lab.                         (2 mks)
  3. Mention four database models that you have learnt.                         (2 mks)
  4. Differentiate between a computer operator and computer technician.             (2 mks)
  5. Define the term ‘mail merge’.             (2 mks)
  6. (a) What is the advantage of electronic spreadsheet over manual work.             (2 mks)

(b) What is cell replacing?                                                                                                     (1 mk)

  1. State two types of desktop publishing (DTP).             (2 mks)
  2. List three elements of networking.             (3 mks)
  3. Briefly explain any three application areas of ICT (Information and communication Technology).
  4. List any two types of

(a) Optical disk.                                                                                                                      (1 mk)

(b) Magnetic disk                                                                                                                   (1 mk)

  1. Distinguish between Disk formatting and disk partitioning.             (2 mks)
  2. (a) State and define any two types of computer processing file.             (1 mk)

 

 

 

Answer question 16 (Compulsory) and any other three questions in the spaces provided.

  1. (a) Consider the module flow charts extracts below.

(i)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the looping structure demonstrated in

(b) State four examples of third generation languages.

(c) Define the following terms as used in programming.

(i) Assembler

(iii) Translator

(ii) Compiler

(iv) Interpreter

(d) Jokins retailers has two categories of customers processing category. “A” obtain 10%discount

on all orders upto Kshs. 10,000. Otherwise the discount is 20% on entire order. Category “B”

obtains 30% on all orders if the debt payment records is good otherwise the discount is 15%.

Write a pseudo code for the order processing.                                                                  (9 mks)

  1. (a) Below are two tables structures of files in a database.

                        Employee                                                                   Employee                   Details

                        Field                            Data type                               Field                            Date type

Employee Name         Text                                         Employee No.             Number

Employee Number     Auto Number                          Date employed            Date / Time

DOB                            Date/ Time                              Department                 Text

Address                       Text                                         Salary                          Currency

(i) Which of the tables is likely to be the parent table?                                                        (1 mk)

(ii) It is advisable to ‘enforce referential integrity’ when creating a relationship. When creating a

relationship, what do you understand by the term referential integrity?                                   (2 mks)

 

 

(iii) The field ‘employee no’ in the employee details table is likely to be the primary key.

What is a primary key?                                                                                                  (2 mks)

(iv) Which fields in both tables is not appropriate for creating a relationship?                 (1 mk)

(v) What would make the relationship between the tables fail to work?                            (2 mks)

(b) In database, the field properties specify finer details related to the fields and the table entries

expected. State four field properties.                                                                               (4 mks)

(c) State three functions of a database.                                                                                (3 mks)

  1. (a)Consider the topologies demonstrated in the diagram below.

A

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Identify the network topologies.                                                                                       (3 mks)

A …………………………………………………………

B ………………………………………………………….

 C …………………………………………………………..

(ii) In topology A, identify the network device that should be at the end points 1 and 2.

(iii) Which of the above topologies is likely to be used in a wide area network?             (1 mk)

(iv) Highlight three disadvantages of topology B.                                                                       (3 mks)

(v) Identify the device labeled x in topology A.                                                                (1 mk)

(b) State two  main classes of network surface.                                                                   (2 mks)

(c) Briefly describe the following as used in networking.

(i) Repeaters.                                                                                                                          (4 mks)

(ii) Network hub

(iii) Fibre optic cables

(iv) Network Interface Card (NIC)

  1. (a) Define feasibility study as used in system.             (2 mks)

(b) State four devices under direct control of the operating system.                                               (2 mks)

(c) Briefly describe the following terms of computational error.                                        (5 mks)

(i) Truncated

(ii) Transposition

(iii) Transcription

(d) Explain three most commonly used coding schemes.                                                    (3 mks)

(e) Distinguish between online and real time processing.                                                    (2 mks)

(f) State one advantage and two disadvantages of command line interface.                                   (3 mks)

  1. (a) (i) Explain three communication services offered through internet.             (3 mks)

(ii) Describe the following terms.                                                                                    (2 mks)

Links

URL

 

(b) The following is a spreadsheet relating to a farmer.

            A                                 B                                 C

1                      Crop                            Amount

2                      Maize                          150

3                      Bean                            300

4                      Cashew nuts                850

5                      Cabbages                    1036

(i) A function = IF (B2<200, “Not viable”, IF (B2 > 300 “Moderate”, IF (B2> 1000, “viable”))))

Give the appropriate result returned in cell C2, C3, C4 and 5.                                        (2 mks)

(c) Text can easily be selected using a mouse in word processing. How do you select;

(i) Multiple paragraphs?                                                                                                    (2 mks)

(d) (i) Distinguish between a widow and an orphan in word processing.                             (2 mks)

(ii) Cut and copy commands.

(e) Give one purpose of drop caps on a text paragraph.                                                        (2 mks)

(f) Give two application of expert systems.                                                                          (2 mks)

 

 

*RCH*

  1. (a) Define the terms ‘Data Integrity’.             (1 mk)

(b) Give two features of data integrity.                                                                                 (1 mk)

  1. Describe how each of the following printers work.             (3 mks)

(a) Thermal ………………………………………………………………………………………….

(b) Electrostatic printer ……………………………………………………………………………….

(c) Laser printer ……………………………………………………………………………………..

 

  1. Nina Secondary School wanted to buy some text books for Computer Studies. The following list

show an example of a spreadsheet which was used to calculate the minimum, maximum and Total

of the total price.

 

  A B C D
1. BOOK UNIT PRICE COPIES TOTAL PRICE
2. Computer Studies BK 1 250 70  
3. Computers Studies BK 2 275 50  
4. Computer Studies BK 3 280 60  
5. Computer Studies BK 4 320 70  
6.        
7. Minimum      
8. Maximum      
9. Total      
  • Write down in each case the formula that can be used in:-

(i) Cell D7

(ii) Cell D8

(iii) Cell D9

(b) Format all the numeric figures to US Dollar symbol and 2 decimal places.                  (1 mk)

  1. State any two uses of personal computers in office.             (2 mks)
  2. State the difference between tracking and kerning as used in Page Maker.             (2 mks)
  3. (a) Differentiate between soft system and hard system.             (2 mks)

(b) List any four characteristics of a system.                                                                                    (2 mks)

  1. Explain the meaning of the following terms as used with operating system.

(a) Multitasking.                                                                                                                    (1 mk)

(b) Single user.                                                                                                                       (1 mk)

  1. Explain the uses of the following keys on the keyboard.

(a) Backspace Key.                                                                                                                 (½ mk)

(b) Space Bar Key.                                                                                                                 (½ mk)

(c) F1 Key.                                                                                                                              (½ mk)

(d) Insert Key.                                                                                                                        (½ mk)

  1. (a) Explain any two types of transcription error.             (2 mks)

(b) Define the term ‘Algorithm errors’ as used in object oriented programming.              (1 mk)

  1. (a) (i) What is meant by the term “Upload” as used in the internet?.             (1 mk)

(ii) Explain the term “hypertext.”                                                                                     (1 mk)

(b) Give two examples of search engines you know.                                                                        (1 mk)

  1. (a) Name any three special purpose memories found either inside and outside the microprocessor.

(b) Distinguish between an accumulator and an address register.                                        (2 mks)

  1. (a) Define the term “mail merging” as used in Word Processing Application Program. (1 mk)

(b) List any two documents that are involved in mail merging.                                           (2 mks)

  1. Explain the three components of an expert system.             (3 mks)
  2. Define the term Robot as used in Expert system.             (1 mk)
  3. Kenya Tea Packers Company pays two different rates for all the tea grades of Tea delivered to

her deports. The rates are as follows:- Grade A = Kshs. 20.00 per Kilograms and Grade B = Kshs.

10.00 per kilogram.

(a) Write an algorithm and pseudo code for the above program.                                         (5 mks)

(b) Draw a flow chart for the above program.                                                                       (5 mks)

(c) A school has two sets A and B. Write a structure algorithm to read a set and the points

awarded for winning each race in an athlete final terminated by “C”. Calculate and print the

total points gained  by each set appropriately labeled.                                                    (5 mks)

  1. (a) Define the term field properties as used in Database program.             (2 mks)

(b) (i) What do you understand by the term normalization as used in Ms Access database?          (1 mk)

(ii) What is an input mask in a database?                                                                         (1 mk)

(c)  (i) What is a query?                                                                                                         (2 mks)

(ii) Differentiate between an action query and select query?                                          (2 mks)

(d) (i) Differentiate between a Primary key and an Index key.                                             (2 mks)

(ii) What is the difference between a field name and a Caption?                                                (2 mks)

(iii) Differentiate between Columnar and Tabular form.                                                 (2 mks)

  1. (a) (i) Give one advantage of a hub on a computer network.                         (1 mk)

(ii) Define the VSAT technology.                                                                                                (1 mk)

(iii) List any four examples of network operating systems.                                             (4 mks)

(iv) State any three advantages of coaxial cables in a computer network.                      (3 mks)

(v) State any three devices used in data communications.                                              (3 mks)

(vi) Differentiate between a router and a brouter.                                                              (2 mks)

(b) Define the term “ Protocol” as used in networking.                                                       (1 mk)

  1. (a) State the uses of the following MS-DOS commands.

(i) CD.                                                                                                                                     (1 mk)

(ii) DIR/P/W                                                                                                                           (1 mk)

(iii) Input devices are classified according to how they are used to enter data. Can you list five

classifications based on this.                                                                                           (5 mks)

(b) Name and explain four types of human computer interfaces.                                        (4 mks)

  • (i) Give any two control measures you would take avoid unauthorized access to data and

information.                                                                                                                 (2 mks)

(ii) Give two examples of anti-virus software you know.                                                 (2 mks)

  1. (a) Perform the following conversions appropriately.

(i) Convert 91B16 to Octal.                                                                                                     (3 mks)

(ii) 37610 to hexadecimal.                                                                                                      (3 mks)

  • Perform the following Binary arithmetic.

(i) 1110.0111    +    1101001.011                                                                                           (3 mks)

(ii) 1001011.011 – 111.111                                                                                                    (3 mks)

(c) Convert 298.12510 to hexadecimal equivalent.

 

*KKE*

 

  1. State two reasons why personal computes are so important to small businesses and

entrepreneurs

  1. State two characteristics for each of the following;
  2. First generation computers
  3. Second generation computers
  • Third generation computers
  1. Give a reason for each of the following hardware considerations when selecting a computer

system

  1. Processor speed
  2. Warranty
  • Upgradeability and compatibility
  1. Portability
  2. (a) What is disk partitioning?

(b) Give two reasons for partitioning a disk

  1. Explain the following features as used in word processing.
  2. Word wraps
  3. Thesaurus
  4. The first column in the table below contains the formula stored in cell C10 of a spreadsheet.

Enter the formulae as they would appear when copies to cell F15 of the same spreadsheet

FORMULA IN C10 FORMULA IN F15
=A5*B5  
=4*B$6  
  1. State three functions of a database management system
  2. (a) Differentiate between signing-in and signing –up in relation to  the internet
  3.       b) Distinguish between downloading and uploading
  4. (a) Define the word expert system?

(b) List the three components that make up an expert system

  1. Using the two components, perform the following arithmetic operation in 8 bits
  2. What is a procedural language?
  3. List any four resources under the operation system control
  4. State two advantages of the Winchester disk as compared to other forms of secondary

storage media

  1. a) List the two main type of DTP software
  2. b) Differentiate between the following terms as used in DTP

Tracking

Kerning

  1. Explain the function of the following parts of the URL

http:/www.kakamega.com

  1. (a) Draw a flow chart for a program that can be used to get the sum of mark for 45 computer

studies student then get the subject mean

  1. b) Define the following;
  2. i) Source program
  3. ii) Pseudo-code

iii) Translators

  1. iv) Flowchart
  2. v) Algorithm
  3. (a) Giving an example for each, differentiate between transcription and computational errors

(b) Briefly describe the following elements of a computer file;

(i) Character

(ii) Field

(iii) Records

(c) Explain the functions of;

  1. Master files
  2. Back up files
  • reference files

(d) Differentiate between

(i)   Real-time processing mode and batch processing

(ii)    Distributed data processing mode and multiprocessing mode

  1. a) State the function of;
  2. i) Web master
  3.            ii) Database administrator

iii) Computer operator

  1. iv) Computer technician
  2. b) Explain how computers have led to the following effects of employment:
  3. i) job replacement
  4. ii) Job displacement
  5. c) State one negative impact of computers in our society
  6. (a) Describe any three physical LAN topologies

(b) Define the following terms

  1. Protocol
  2. Server
  • Gateway
  1.  iv)         Repeater
  2.  v)         Bandwidth

(c) Give two advantages of networking                                                                                   (d) Explain the line of sight principle in wireless communication

(e) What’s the work of the following in networking?

(i) Crimping tool

(ii) Network interface card

iii) Network neighbouring icon

  1. (a) Differentiate between private data and confidential data

(b) Describe three types of computer virus

(c) Explain the following terms as used in data security

i )    Eavesdropping

  1. ii) Surveillance

iii)  Industrial espionage

  1. d) Differentiate between hacking and cracking
  2. e) State two laws that govern the protection of information

 

*UGU*

  1. Differentiate between Access Time and Seek Time             (2mks)
  2. List four activities that can be carried out using Windows OS during disk management (4mks)
  3. Give four reasons why a firm may decide to computerize its operations             (4mks)
  4. List three functions of the Arithmetic and logic unit                         (3mks)
  5. What is the major difference between a web page and a web site             (2mks)
  6. (i) Write down all the digits in base 4 number system             (1mk)

(ii) Calculate the sum of the second and the fourth digits (i) above                                    (1mk)

  1. What is the major difference between a webpage and a web site?                         (2mks)
  2. Differentiate between physical and logical topologies             (2mks)
  3. Give the difference between tower and desktop system unit                         (2mks)
  4. Differentiate between computational errors and transcription errors                         (2mks)
  5. Using the place value method, convert 24710 into its binary equivalence             (4mks)
  6. Perform the following binary arithmetic and give your answers in decimal notation (14mks)

1010.101 + 11.011

  1. (a) Differentiate between :

(i) Primary key and foreign key                                                                                              (1mk)

(ii) What is cell referencing                                                                                                    (2mks)

  1. Define the word blocking as defined in Ms-Word             (1mk)
  2. (i) What is a server?             (1mk)

(ii) Differentiate between peer to peer and client server                                                      (2mks)

  1. Study the flow chart below and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) What would the following generate as output if the value of N at input was:

(i) 6?

(ii) 1?

(b) Write a pseudo code that does the same thing as the flow chart above                                                                                            (15mks)

(c) Text can be select using a mouse processing. How do you select

(i) Multiple paragraph

(ii) Vertical text

(d) Distinguish between:

(i) A widow and an orphan in word processing

(ii) Cut and copy commands

(e) Give one purpose of drop caps on a text paragraph

(f) (i) What is an expert system?

(ii) Give two applications of expert systems

  1. A school keeps a spreadsheet of examination results in four subjects. Part of the spread sheet is

as shown below:-

  A B C D E F G H
  Name Class Maths Science IT English Av. Mark Pass/Fail
1 Allen 11A 33 24 19 44 30  
2 Dyos 11B 41 54 70 31 49  
3 Keg 11A 82 69 57 52 65  
4 Khan 11C 44 21 50 85 50  
5 Kolacz 11A 73 51 73 51 62  
6 Lenski 11B 17 41 40 34 33  
7 Peruza 11C 87 72 64 61 71  

 

  • Which column has been used to sort the data?
  • What formula has been entered in cell G2 to calculate the Allen’s average mark?

could be done

(iii) The IT results need to be sorted so that the highest mark is at the top. Describe how this sort

(iv) The formula IF (G5>45, “PASS”, “FAIL”) is entered in cell H5. What output appears?

(v) State the validation check that should be carried out on data entered in cells C2 to F8 to ensure

values over 100 are not input                                                                                                                                                            (15mks)

  1. (a) (i) Explain three communication services offered through internet

(ii) Describe the following internet terms:-

Links …………………………………………………………………………………………………..

URL……………………………………………………………………………………………………

(b) The following is a spreadsheet relating to a farmer

  A B C
1 Crop Amount  
2 Maize 150  
3 Bean 300  
4 Cashew nuts 850  
5 Cabbages 1036  

 

(i) A function  = IF(B2<200,”Not

Viable”), IF(B2>300, “Moderate”), IF(B2>1000,” Variable”))).

Give the appropriate result returned in cells C2, C3, C4, and C5

  1. (c) Text can easily be selected using a mouse in word processing. How do you select

(i) Multiple paragraph

(ii) Vertical block of text

(d) (i) Distinguish between widow and an orphan processing

(ii) Cut and copy commands

(e) Give one purpose of drop caps on a text paragraph

(f) (i) What is an expert system?

(ii) Give two applications of expert systems

  1. (a) Explain the advantage of using two’s complement over one’s complement

(b) Using two’s complement, subtract 4 from 7 and give your answer in decimal notation

(c) An organization is planning to develop a new information system to manage its operations.

(i) Explain the following characteristics of a system

Holistic thinking

System entropy

(ii) List four tools that could be used in designing the information system during the design stage

(d) Explain any three threats to data and information

(e) Explain the purpose of the following types of program documentation

(i) User manual

(ii) Reference guide

  1. (a) Define feasibility study as used in system

(b) State four devices under direct control of the operating system

(c)  Briefly describe the following types of computerized errors:

(i) Truncated

(ii) Transposition

(iii) Transcription

(d) Explain three most commonly used coding schemes

(e) Distinguish between online and real time processing

(f) State one advantage and two disadvantages of command line interface

 

 

*MUM*

  1. State two functions of the SHIFT key as used in a word processor.
  2. (a) How do registers differ from buffers.

(b) List four examples of registers.

  1. Daniel has noticed the following problems in his computer;            

(i) It is taking a longer time to start up.

(ii) It is often hanging

(iii) Applications are taking long to load.

State three possible causes of these problems and how they can be solved.

  1. List three functions of an anti-virus software.
  2. Differentiate between a virus and a logic bomb.
  3. The cells K3 to K10 of a worksheet contain remarks on students performance such as very good,

good, fair and fail depending on the average mark. Write a formula that can be used to count all

students that have the remark “very good”.

  1. The following information shows the income and expenditure for “Beba yote” matatu for five

days. The  income from Monday to Friday was Ksh.4,000, 9,000,15,000 and 20,000 respectively

while expenditure  for some period was Ksh.2000,3000, 7000, 5000 and 6000 respectively.

(a) Draw a spreadsheet that would contain the information. Indicate the rows as 1 , 2, 3 and 4 and

the column as A,B,C

(b) State the expression that would be used to obtain:

(i) Monday profit.

(ii) Total income

(iii) Highest expenditure.

  1. Describe the following terms:

(a) Software suite

(b) Shareware

(c) Groupware

(d) Integrated software

  1. (a) Subtract 01112 from 10012

(b) Using two’s compliment subtract 7 from 40 and give the answer in decimal notation.

  1. Distinguish between uploading and downloading.
  2. Distinguish between peer-to-peer Networks and client-server networks.
  3. List any two techniques used to implement information systems in various organizations.
  4. Distinguish between a word and word-length as used in data representation.
  5. Describe three types of maintenance that can be applied on information systems.
  6. (a) Study the flowchart extracts below

(b) State the looping structure demonstrated in

(c) List any four methods of detecting and correcting programming bugs.

(d) Draw a flowchart for a program that can be used to add any positive integers that can be keyed

into the computer through the keyboard. The program should count the positive numbers entered

and should be terminated when a zero is keyed in.

                       

  1. Below are two table structures of files in a database:

                                           TABLE 1                                                                         TABLE 2

Field                                        Data type                   Field                            Data type

Employee number                  Text                             Employee number             Number

Employee Name                     Auto number               Data employed             Date/time

D.O.B                                      Date/time                    Department                 Test

Address                                   Test                             Salary                          Currency

(i) Which of the two tables is likely to be the parent table?                                                 *MUM*

(ii) It is advisable to enforce referential integrity when creating a relationship. When creating a

relationship, what do you understand by the term referential integrity?             *MUM*

(iii) The field “employee No” in Table 2 is likely to be the primary key.

What is a primary key?

  1. iv) Which fields in both tables is most appropriate for creating a relationship? *MUM*

(v) What will make the relationship between the tables fail to work?                     *MUM*

(b) In databases, the field properties specify finer details related to the fields and the entries

expected. State four field properties.                                                                    *MUM*

(c) State three functions of a database.                                                                    *MUM*

  1. (a) Explain three communication services offered through the internet.             *MUM*

(b) Describe the following internet terms.                                                                *MUM*

(i) Browsing

(ii) Web portal

(iii) Home page

(iv) Hyperlink

(v) Uniform resource locator

(c) The following spreadsheet is relating to a farmer.

  A B C
1 Crop Amount  
2 Maize 150  
3 Beans 300  
4 Cashew nuts 850  
5 cabbages 1036  

(i) A function = IF (B2< 200, “Not viable”, IF(B2>300,”moderate”, IF(B2> 1000, “VIABLE”))).

Give the appropriate result returned in cells C2, C3, C4 and C5.

(d) List any three functions of the control unit.

  1. (a) List any three differences between an interpreter and a compiler.

(b) State four characteristics of Random access memory.

(c) Describe the following data security measures

(i) Log files

(ii) Fire walls

(iii) Antispyware

(iv) Audit trial

  1. (a) What is a transmission media?

(b) List two types of transmission media

(c) Distinguish between a Hub and a switch.

(d) With help of a well labeled diagram, describe the fibre optic cable

(e) What are the functions of the following devices on a network?

(i) Repeaters

(ii) Network interface card

(iii) Router

(f) Distinguish between physical topology and logical topology as used in Networking

 

*KSM*

  1. Describe four electrical safety precaution rules that should be observed in a computer room.
  2. Distinguish between a compiler and an interpreter.             (2mks)
  3. (a) Describe the term keys to storage system                         (1mk)

(b) Games programs can be purchased from computer stores on CD-ROM. State two

advantages of CD-ROMS over floppy disks                                                                   (2mks)

  1. State two outputs device that are found at the point of sales terminal             (2mks)
  2. Outline any four editing features of a word processor.             (2mks)
  3. Describe briefly how a laser printer works             (2mks)
  4. (a) Identify the main stage of program development                         (4mks)

(b) Define the terms program documentation                                                                       (1mk)

(c) List program control structures giving examples                                                                        (3mks)

  1. Distinguish between high levels and low levels language giving one advantage and one disadvantages  of each of them                                                                                      (2mks)
  2. (a) Explain the difference between the following commands as used in MS-DOS (2mks)

(i) Dir/p

(ii) Dir/w

(b) Write one command that can be used to format a diskette and copy system files to it     (1mk)

  1. Differentiate between real time processing and batch processing giving examples where

each  could be used.                                                                                                              (2mks)

  1. Differentiate between computer added design and computer aided manufacture             (2mks)
  2. What is a computer network?             (1mk)
  3. Describe three difference types of computer network             (3mks)
  4. State three symbolic data representation             (3mks)
  5. State two properties that an opening system display about a file             (1mk)
  6. (a) Distinguish between Algorithm and Pseudo code.             (3mks)

(b) A company has 5000 CDs, video and books in stock each items has a unique 5 digit

code with   the first identifying the type of item i.e.

1=CD

2=DVD

3= video

4=Book

For example, for the code 15642 the 1 identifies that it is a CD, and for the code 30055 the 3 identifies these it is a video

Write an algorithm, using pseudocode or otherwise, that

-inputs the code for all 5000 items

-validates the input code                                                                                            (12mks)

  1. (a) List three differences in the computer training provided by colleges as opposed to those

offered  by the universities                                                                                            (3mks)

(b) Describe three duties of each of the following computer specialists :-                         (6mks)

(i) Database administrator

(ii) System analyst

(c) Information technology has bought about a lot of concern in people’s lives-social effects,

list three  arguments for and against information technology                                                 (3mks)

(d.) Repetitive strain injury happens when one overuses the computer keyboard or mouse.

Causing inflammation or injury on muscles or tendons .Describe three measures users

can apply to prevent or reduce RSI                                                                                  (3mks)

  1. A school computer laboratory is scheduled o undergo major renovations. The lab is schedule to

receive new computer whose specifications are given below:-

Pentium IV 2.8GHz processor

40GB HDD

31/2 FDD

256 MB RAM

568CD ROM

17” SVGA TFT monitor

The computers are gong to be networked and will be able to browse the internet.

(a) Explain what is meant by the terms:-                                                                              (2mks)

(i) FDD

(ii) HDD

(iii) SVGA

(iv)TFT

(b) The computer is to be networked, name one extra device that should be fitted on every

computer  to enable this to happen                                                                                   (1mk)

 

 

 

(c) The computer is to receive internet facilities through the server on a dial; up system. Name

and describe the function of a special device that needs to be connected to the server to

complete the  connection                                                                                                (1mk)

(d) (i) The school has to apply he star topology to link up the computer. List two advantages

of this  type of topology                                                                                             (1mk)

(ii) Name the central device used to connect the computers in this topology.                 (1mk)

(e) List two other types of topologies that the school could have opted for                                    (1mk)

(f) List four advantages of using a network                                                                          (2mks)

(g) (i) Data transmission via the internet is done  using a mode known as packet switching.

Describe this data transmission mode                                                                   (1mk)

(ii) Name two other modes of data transmission                                                        (1mk)

(h) (i) The school’s LAN is done using UTR cable. List two disadvantages of using this

type of cable.                                                                                                                (1mk)

(ii) List two advantages of using fibre cable in networking                                            (1mk)

(j) Data flows in the school’s LAN in a duplex manner. Discuss two other type of data

transmission in network giving examples                                                                       (2mks)

  1. (a) Differentiate between a database and a DBMS             (1mk)

(b) List four advantages of using database systems                                                              (2mks)

(c) In a data base system, data integrity ensures the correctness and completeness of the data

in the database. Differentiate the following types of integrity constraints:-

(i) Validity integrity                                                                                                           (1mk)

(ii) Entity integrity                                                                                                                         (1mk)

(iii) Referential integrity                                                                                                   (1mk)

(d) Briefly describe the three database models :-                                                                 (3mks)

(i) Hierarchical model

(ii) Network model

(iii) Relation model

(e) Using diagrams describe the following three types of relationships                              (3mks)

(i) One –on- one

(ii) One –to- many

(iii) many-to-many

(f) File organisation refers to the arrangement of records on secondary storage. Briefly

describe the  following file organization methods:-                                                         (3mks)

(i) Sequential

(ii) Random /direct

(iii) Serial

  1. (a) State and describe any two areas of Artificial intelligence             (2mks)

(b) What is virtual reality?                                                                                                   (1mk)

(c) List three component of a virtual reality gear                                                                (3mks)

(d) By giving an example define:-

(i) A smart terminal                                                                                                           (2mks)

(ii) An embedded computer                                                                                               (2mks)

(e) State three factors to consider when selecting a UPS                                                     (3mks)

(f) Give two uses of computer in stock exchanges                                                              (2mks)

 

*TZM*

  1. The computer processing cycle involves a four step process List them                                      (2mks)
  2. The CPU consists of control unit and arithmetic logic unit State the functions of the two units(2mks)
  3. Name and explain the two types of primary memory.                                            (3mks)
  4. State the functions of the following keys in a computer key board
  • Pause                                                                                                         (1mk)

(ii) Function keys                                                                                                                               (1mk)

(i) Explain the importance of microphones combined with speech recognition device such

as voice output.                                                                                                                            (2mks)

(ii) State the main disadvantage of the above method of data input.                                             (2mks)

  1. The most popular type of electronic data storage currently is magnetic disk storage such as

hard disk or Winchester disk. Give reason as to why they are popular                                      (2mks)

  1. Outline two advantages of hard disk over floppy disk.                            (2mks)
  2. One stage of system development is system testing. Outline the advantages of this stage

before  implementation.                                                                                                                                    (1mk)

  1. (a) Convert 111.011to a decimal notation.             (2mks)
  • State one advantage of using binary number system in computers.               (1mk)
  1. State one function of each of the following terms             (3mks)
  2. Buffer………………………………………………………………………………….…………
  3. ii) An accumulator…………………………………………………………………………………

iii)      Cache memory……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. Explain any two factors that should be put into consideration during output design.       (2mks)
  2. (i) Define the term graphic and give two examples                                                     (2mks)

(ii) List any two sources of graphic that can be used in Microsoft word.                                   (1mk)

  1. State the functions of the following logical functions as used in excel
  2. If…………………………………………………………………………………..… (1mk)
  3. Sum If ………………………………………………………………………………. (1mk)
  4. Count If………………………………………………………………………… (1mk)
  • Why would one prefer to use a form for data input rather than entering data directly into a table.                                                                                                         (2mks)
  • When using wizard to create a form, list four forms layout that you can use.    (2mks)
  1. Distinguish between the following terms as used in DTP (4mks)
  • Tracking and kerning
  • Stroke and fill
  1. (a) Define the following terms
  • Structured programming                (1mk)

Constants                                                                                                                                  (1mk)

Variable                                                                                                                                   (1mk)

(b) Distinguish between dummy data and real data as used in system testing                          (2mks)

(c)      Mr Lugeno borrowed a loan of 200,000 from Ndege chai cooperative society at a rate

of 10%payable in 2 years flat rate. Draw a flow chart that can be used to develop a

computer program that will keep track of monthly repayments                                              (5mks)

  1. (a) Define the following computer crimes
  • Piracy                                (1mk)
  1. ii) Industrial espionage                                          (1mk)

(b) Explain two ways of protecting data and information against unauthorized access         (4mks)

(c) Explain two functions of network operating system.                                                          (4mks)

(d) Differentiate between a repeater and a router as used in computer networking.                 (2mks)

(e) List down three duties of a computer trainer                                                                         (3mks)

  1. (a) Explain any two types of human computer Interface.              (4mks)

(b) State four basic requirements of a standard computer laboratory                                  (4mks)

  • Out line three types of job opportunities that are available in the computing field   (3mks)

(d)            (i) Differentiate between video conferencing and telecommuting as used  in  communicating

system                                                                                                                           (2mks)

(ii) Highlight two advantages of telecommuting                                                                  (2mks)

  1. (a) Distinguish between the following

(i) Sequential and serial file organization methods.                                                                  (2mks)

(ii) Random and indexed sequential file organization methods                                                    (2mks)

(b) Explain the following types of data processing modes

  1. i) Batch processing                          (2mks)
  2. ii) Real time processing                                            (2mks)

(c)Define the following terms

  1. Undo                                                                                                                        (1mk)
  2. ii) Redo                           (1mk)

(d) State three breakthrough of Information Communication Technology (ICT) in

health care                                                                                                                              (3mks)

(e)List any two under graduate programs offered in public universities in Kenya                         (2mks)

  1. (a) Draw a flowchart showing;
  2. i) The WHILE loop                                            (2mks)
  3. ii) The REPEAT…………UNTIL loop                                                                    (2mks)

 

  • Differentiate between the following terms
  1. i) Information system and system                                                                                 (2mks)
  2. ii) Hard system and soft system                                                                                     (2mks)

(c)  List the seven stages of System Development Cycle (SDLC)                                         (7mks)

 

PAPER TWO

*NYR*

QUESTION 1

M/s Ann Momanyi, an ICT consultant with Makueni Distributors is in the process of developing a Management Information System (MIS) for the Company. Currently, she is designing sales database using three tables namely: – customers, products and transactions. The details for each table are given below:-

Customers                               Products                                  Transactions

Customer ID                           ProductID                               TransID

CustomerName                       ProductDescription                ClientName

PostalAddress                         Packaging                               TransacDate

Town                                       UnitPrice                                Product

Phone                                      Stock                                       Quantity

Questions

(a) Create a database named MIS and in it create three relations

(b) Identify the most appropriate field as the primary key in each table

(c) Establish relationships among the three tables and enforce the referential integrity

(d) Create a form for each table. Save the forms as Customer Form, Product Form and

            Transaction Form

(e) Use the respective forms to enter the following records in each table

CUSTOMERS TABLE

CustomerID Customer Name Postal Address Town Phone
H001 Andrew Mwove 209 Mutituni 200870
H002 Erick Onsongo 68 Nyamira 248567
H003 Brenda Nyabuti 100 Bomet 789678
H004 Lydiah Winzaa 250 Mwingi 778009
H005 Jeff Ogero 330 Keroka 666790
H006 Maureen Makuthu 550 Kakeani 780906

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRODUCTS TABLE

ProductID Product Description Packaging Unit Price Stock
AA001 Cooking Oil 20 kg Gal 16000 80
AA003 Rice 50Kg Bags 4500 60
AB004 Detergents 5 Litres 11000 40
AC006 Fertilizer 50Kg bags 4700 30
AA007 Mineral Water 1.5 Litres 8200 400

TRANSACTION TABLE

CustomerID ClientName TansacDate Products Quantity
1001 Andrew Mwove 06/04/2007 Cooking oil 6
1002 26/04/2007 Mineral water 8
1003 Erick Onsongo 23/04/2007 Detergents 10
1004  

Maureen Makuthu

14/04/2007 Cooking oil 12
1005 02/05/2007 Rice 4
1006 08/05/2007 Fertilizer 3
1007 Erick Onsongo 16/05/2007 Detergents 25

(f) Create a query that displays the customer Name, Product Description, Quantity, Unit price and a

calculated field total payable by each customer. Save the query as MISQuery

(g) Generate a report from MISQuery. Save the report as MISReport

(h) Print the Customers, Products, Transaction table’s design, MISQuery and MISReport

 

QUESTION 2

Using DTP software design the publication based on the following instructions to appear as it is

1) Set the page to have portrait orientation and margins to be as follows;

(a) Format the heading: BISELEX BUSINESS” to bear the following features:-

(b) Font type: Copperplate Gothic

(c) Font size: 26

(d) Background color: grey

(f) Alignment: centered

2) Format the heading “New Arrivals for new generations’ to bear the following features:-

(a) Font type : Monotype corsiva

(b) Font size: 22

(c) Alignment: Centered

(d) Border style: 6pt

(e) Rotate it appropriately

3) Format the heading “All Under One Roof” to bear the following features:-

(a) Underline style: words only

(b) Font type: Arial Narrow

(c) Font size: 20

(d) Alignment: centered

(e) Rotate it appropriately

4) Format the text below the heading “Motto : Customer Satisfaction” to be in three columns

and format  it as follows:-

1st column

  1. i) Drop cap the first character to four lines
  2. ii) Line spacing 1.25pt

2nd column

  1. i) Underline the title “Items” with a broken line
  2. ii) Text weight: bold italics

iii) Bullet the listed items appropriately

3rd column

5) Insert the rounded rectangle and format its heading to :

(i) Underline : Double

(ii) Font type: Arial Black

6) Format the text under the heading “LOCATION” as follows:-

(i) Font type: Castellar

(ii) Font size: 9pts

7) Insert the suitable picture as it appears in the publication

8) Insert the header to bear Your Name and the Footer to bear Your Index Number

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

*MAT*

Question 1

(a) Wafula is a secretary for all clubs in the school. He has been told to create Club_DBMS id database

management system (DBMS) to help the club maintain record on the clubs’ members.

Relation name Fields Primary key
 

 

Student

Admission Number  

 

Admission number

First Name
Last Name
Form
Stream
 

Club_Details

Club Number  

Club Number

Club Name
Date established
 

Membership

Registration Number  

Registration Number

Club Number
Admission Number
Date of registration
Membership fee

 

(a) Perform the following operations just like Wafula would:

(i) Create a database Club_DBMS with the tables shown above.                                                 (12mks)

(ii) Index on last name on the able student                                                                                    (2mks)

(iii) Crate a lookup list for the following fields in class student                                                  (3mks)

 

 

Field Lookup list
 
Field Lookup list
 

Form

One  

Class

East
Two North
Three West
Four South

 

(iv) Create One-Many relationship between the relations and enforce referential integrity            (3mks)

(b) Create use friendly screen inputs with the Add New Record, Find Record, Delete Record and

Close Screen Input commands for each of the table, save them using respective table’s name   (12mks)

(c)  Using the input screens, enter the records below:                                                                      (6mks)

Admn. No. First Name Last Name Form Stream
3200 Busaule Mwitani Two East
3811 Mawi Martha One South
2844 Nambwaya Nancy Four East
2910 Wafula Victor Four Central
3295 Hassan Eunice Three East
2956 Busolo Josephat Three North
2977 Makhanu Josephat Four South
3216 Mateshe Jackline Three West

 

 

Club Number Club Name Date established
97/Mat Mathematics 05/02/1997
02/Sci Science 08/04/2002
01/Env Environment 01/09/2001
97/Lan Debate 08/04/1997

 

 

Reg. Number Admn. No. Club No. Reg. Date Membership Fee
MT/0013 2844 97/Mat 12/03/2007 100
SC/0189 2977 02/Sci 11/03/2007 120
MT/0975 2910 97/Mat 05/05/2007 100
DB/0111 2977 97/Lan 11/03/2007 90
EN/1001 3811 01/Env 01/03/2010 80
SC/0998 3216 02/Sci 09/10/2008 120
SC/1006 2844 02/Sci 12/03/2007 120
DB/0565 3295 97/Lan 10/05/2008 90

 

(c) Create a query for each record containing the product of membership fees $ multiplied by 79.8.

Label this column “Amount in shillings”. The query should display: Last Name (in ascending order),

First Name, Registration Number, Date of Registration, Amount in shillings. For all members whosel

last name start with M or J and first name start with M save the query as Query M                 (8mks)

(d) Create a query that Display Admission Number, Last name, first Name, Club Names and

Registration date for form four students. Save query as Members                                             (3mks)

(e) Create a tabular report from Query-M that displays Last Name, First Name, Membership Number,

Date of Registration, Membership Fees paid in shillings and display the total to the membership fees

at the end of the report. Save the repo\rt as “Membership Report”                                              (5mks)

 

Admn. No. First Name Last Name Form Stream
3200 Busaule Mwitani Two East
3811 Mawi Martha One South
2844 Nambwaya Nancy Four East
2910 Wafula Victor Four Central
3295 Hassan Eunice Three East
2956 Busolo Josephat Three North
2977 Makhanu Josephat Four South
3216 Mateshe Jackline Three West

(f) Create a tabular report from Members query, sort the records by first name and save it as

Club Members.                                                                                                                  (4mks)

(g) On each report, add your name, index number and page number in the format “Page X of  Y

pages”  as footer                                                                                                              (4mks)

(h) Add “Mary Seat of Wisdom Bulimbo Girls’ Sec. School” and Report Name as Header on

each report                                                                                                                         (2mks)

(i) Print membership Report, Club Members, Query-M and Student table                         (4mks)

 

Question two

(a) Enter the following as it is onto worksheet and save it as the budget                             (7mks)

A B C D E F G
No. Item description Quantity bought Unit price Amount Comments Cost Rank
1 2Kg Mumias Sugar 4 210      
2 Sony 2HD floppy 3 37      
3 Rapid spring file 10 56      
4 200pg A4 books 9 89      
5 1 litre Quencher 2 256      
6 AIHAO Gelink pen 15 55      
7 Omega dustless chalk 18 105      
8 LG 2GB Flash Disk 4 1055      
  Total          

(b) Rename worksheet 1 as Budget and Worksheet 2 as My Graph                                                (3mks)

(c) Insert two rows above labels in the budget 1 worksheet. Enter in the first row, a Word Art “

A sample Budget: Back to Business.”                                                                             (4mks)

(d) Enter cell B2 and C2, VAT and 18% respectively                                                          (1mk)

(e) Calculate ;

(i) Using name referencing calculate the amount for each item (amount = quantity *price) (4mks)

(ii) Total quantity, price and amount using formulae                                                                       (3mks)

(iii) Display “Thank for shopping” for amount above 500, “Almost in a draw” for amount

between 250 and 499, otherwise “Buy More”                                                                (4mks)

(f) Using column E, rank the items with the most costly ranked as the last                                    (4mks)

(g) Format all values on the worksheet to two decimal places aligned right of cell and in

pounds (£)                                                                                                                          (3mks)

(h) Copy the information on Budget1 worksheet to workshet3. Rename corksheet3 as copied(2mk

(i) Save the workbook as Budget2                                                                                         (1mk)

(j) Change respective quantities of items on budget 1 worksheet                                        (1mk)

Sony 2HD floppy        18

200pg A4 books          12

(k) Using item name and taxes on Budget1 worksheet, create a line chart of item description and

amount on worksheet My Graph                                                                                     (8mks)

(l) Save the workbook as Final Budget and print the chart                                                   (2mks)

 

*MUM*

WORD PROCESSOR

  1. (a) Type the following passage exactly as it appears into a word-processor, spell check and

format it  accordingly. Use typeface Times New Romans, font size 12.

Format your document to fit exactly on one page. Save it as A: NET 1                       (26marks)

 

NETWORKS MODELS

Networks can be organized into three basic models client/server, peer to peer and centralize computing. Client/Server and peer-to-peer are used with PC networks. While centralized computing models are used with mid-range and mainframe computers usually running a UNIX-based operating system. The peer-to-peer model is the simplest to implement and assemble. Client/server is the most popular configuration, because of its versatility and power drawing mainly from the vast variety and higher performance of specialized server hardware.

 

Central computing networks

The host is the core of the centralized computing model. Host computers typically run the UNIX operating system and can process multiple jobs simultaneously and in a very efficient manner. Jobs are initiated by the Terminal, which has no processing capability on its own and simply provides input/output for the host. The user logs into the host computer to process the user’s job; when the job is finished, the host computer sends the results of the job back to the terminal.

 

The main advantage of centralized computing is that they are the highest performance networks today. Its major disadvantages are:

  • They are costly
  • They are dependent on custom written software
  • They are more complicated than PC severs

 

Client/Server Networks

The client/server network is the workhorse of the network world and consists of at least one server with shared recourses and one or more clients which users do their work on. The server, often called the back end, stores and secures users’ files. It provides the single point of administration for network users, files, and applications. In a client/server network, the function of the server is to provide services, where as the function of the client is to provide the actual processing. Most client/server networks are built round a domain structure, where all servers within a given domain share a common administration scheme.

Peer-to-peer Networks

A peer-to-peer network is simply a group of computers that function as both servers and clients (share and access resources). In this type of network, a user works on a workstation and actually shares that workstation’s resources with other workstations.

 

Disadvantages

  • It may be slow
  • Lack of a central security administration
  • Decentralized administration might be a nightmare.

 

(b) (i) Bold face and italicize all the occurrences of the words client/server

(ii) Justify and set the left and right indents of the second paragraph at 1 inch.

(ii) Save the document as A: NET 2                                                                                        (6mks)

(c) (i) Copy NET 1 passage to a new document

(ii) Present the document into two columns with a line between the columns. Introduce a

column break on the sub heading “Client/Server Networks” so that your second column

begins exactly with that header.

(iii) Save the new document as A:NET 3                                                                                 (6mks)

(d) (i) Introduce double space in the last paragraph of NET 2

(ii) Search and replace the word “host” with “main” in the whole passage.

(iii) Save the document as A:NET 4                                                                                (6mks)

(e) (i) Animate the title of the passage of document NI-T4 to have a blinking background.

(ii) Convert the paper orientation to landscape and format your document to fit on one page.

(iii) Save the passage as A: NET5                                                                                                 (5mks)

(f) Print2. A stationery store keeps a record of all items sold in the store. The details are given

in  table 3 table 3 below.

Item code Description Quantity Supplier
005

001

009

007

010

006

002

003

008

004

HBI pencils (doz)

Stapler

Photocopy paper (reams)

Staples (packets)

120 pages (ex. Books)

Spring files

Diskettes

HB2 pencils (doz)

Foolscaps (reams)

Chalk

200

100

200

300

200

200

300

500

300

350

Shah

Shah

Chania

Vipingo

Vipingo

Shah

Chania

Shah

Vipingo

chania

(a) Create a database structure containing the fields:

Item code

Description

Quantity

Supplier

(b) Enter the records as shown in table 3 into your database and save it as Stat 1.             (l2mks)

(c) Modify Stat 1 to include the field for date received and save as Stat 2.                                     (3mks)

(d) Items with cods 001, 007, 009 and 010 were received on 10/05/200 1. Items with codes

002, 005, and 008 were received on 12/05/2001 and the rest were received on 15/05/2001.

Enter this information on the date received field.                                                           (5mks)

(e) Sort Stat 2 on item code field in descending order and save it as Stat3.                                    (6mks)

(f) Create a query to extract all items delivered by Shah on 15/05/200 1 and save as query 1.

(g) Using Stat 1, generate a tabular report titled “Stationery store items” and containing the

following fields in the order shown.

Supplier                      Description                 Quantity

Save the report as report 1

Print Stat1, Stat3, query 1 and report1                                                                                  (8mks)

 

 

 

*TNW*

Q1. (a) Type the passage below as it appears using a word processing package and save it as A:\Bono1.

(Settings: Font Arial, font size 12 for all text, margins; top 0.5”, bottom 0.6”, left 1”, right 0.5”,

1st Heading Size 20, 2nd & 3rd Size 14 ).                                                                                 36mks

 

WE MUST STRIVE FOR GREAT THINGS IN LIFE

 

one should leave legacy that speaks for years. Paul Hewson was in Nairobi recently. That won’t mean much to you, until I explain that I was referring to Bono, the world – famous lead singer of rock band U2 and campaigner against global poverty. Bono didn’t really make much noise while in Kenya. He attended the ëNation Mediaû  group’s Pan Africa Media Conference, took H2o, talked to a couple of journalists and left.

 

 

 

He didn’t do the other things that visiting celebrities of his stature do when in Africa: adopt a cheetah or a baby hippo, start a school for orphans, shoot the breeze pointlessly with Emilio and Tinga, utter banalties about the girl child. Bono reserves his energy for other things.

Popular Media

Bono is not famous just for being a singer. For the past couple of decades he has been one of the most visible humanitarian activists, using his fame to enlist powerful allies from:

  • Government
  • Religious institutions
  • Philanthropic groups
  • Popular media and
  • The business world.

He has personally spearheaded the campaign for debt relief for the world’s poorest countries, and has been a vocal champion for Africa. Not everyone agrees with these efforts. Author Paul Theroux savaged Bono, Bob Geldof and other celebrity humanitarians, saying that creating “the impression that Africa is fatally troubled and can be saved only by outside help – not to mention celebrities and charity concerts – is a destructive and misleading conceit.”

 

 

I happen to agree with that view and have propagated it in writing for many years. I don’t think Africa’s

salvation will come from outsiders,

 

 

 

 

 

and it certainly won’t come from endless handouts and a crippling dependency culture.

 

 

On Trivia

           

 

 

What about you? How big is your life? Are you allowing your time on earth to be frittered away on trivia, or are you going to make a net positive impact on the planet? Are you doing something, anything bigger than yourself? Are you raising

a child to be a better person than you are? Are running a business or conducting a profession that sets a standard in good practice? Or are you content to be a small person imprisoned in a small life?

  1. b) i. Copy the paragraph that begins with “He has personally……..” to page 2. (1mk)
  2.      Set the paragraph to hanging indent.                                                                             (1mk)

iii. Change the line spacing of the entire paragraph to double and convert it to landscape.(4mks)

c). Insert your name and index number as the header left aligned.                                      (1mk)

d). Carry out word count on the document and write on the paper provided the number of:

  • Words
  • Characters (with spaces)
  • Characters (no spaces)                                                                                              (3mks)

e). Paginate the document using page x of y at the top center.                                             (2mks)

f). Save the entire document as A:\Bono2                                                                             (1mk)

g). Print document A:\Bono2.                                                                                                            (1mk)

 

Q2. The information in the following two tables relates to a vehicle buying and selling business.

 

Table 1: Seller details

 

Seller No Seller Name Address Town
8215 Samcon 23454 Nakuru
8242 CMC 654 Eldoret
8430 DCM motors 3554 Nairobi
8620 Farmers Garage 7645 Kitale
8845 KCI 8643 Kisumu

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Table 2: Vehicle details

 

Reg No Make Type Price Seller No
KAJ 543Q Nissan Matatu 1,200,000 8242
KAQ 952R Mercedes Saloon 4,000,000 8242
KAX 534S Peugeot Pickup 960,400 8620
KAZ 454C Mazda Saloon 550,000 8215
KBA 386A Toyota Pickup 750,000 8620
KBB 917A Toyota Saloon 800,000 8430
KBE 875T Isuzu Lorry 1,800,650 8430
KBG 805G Scania Bus 10,500,000 8845
KBJ 324D Isuzu Bus 9,200,000 8845
KZL 931 Toyota Matatu 1,400,000 8620

 

a). Create a database file named A:\Business.                                                                             (2mks)

b). Create the two tables above and save them using their respective names. Determine the

appropriate primary keys.                                                                                                 (10mks)

c). Create a form based on each table. Insert form titles as seller details form and vehicle

details form respectively.                                                                                                (5mks)

d). Use the forms to enter the records in the two tables as shown above.                                  15mks)

e). Create a query containing the following fields(Reg no, Make, price and Seller name). It.

Should display only those vehicles whose prices are above 1000,000. Save as Sales1.      (6mks)

f). Remove the criteria set in sales1 query. Include a calculated field in the sales query to

derive new prices if the current prices went up by 5%. Save as sales2.                         (5mks)

g). Create a tabular report based on sales2 query. The report should show the total amount

collected from selling the vehicles if they were sold at their new prices. Save as report.         (4mks)

  1. h) Print the seller details table, vehicle details table and the report.             (3mks)

 

 

*KKC*

QUESTION 1

(a)       Type the following letter as it  appears in a word processor. Use the mail merge feature to produce copies of the same letter to the persons whose details are given below:-                        (12 mks)

 

MWANGAZA HIGH SCHOOL

P.O. BOX 4800

ELDORET

8TH JULY, 2010

 

<NAME≥  <ADMNO≥

<ADDRESS>

<TOWN>

Dear <Name>

 

RE: 2009 KCSE RESULTS

I AM Happy to inform you that NOKDEC Examinations are out. Kindly arrange to visit our school on <<Date to visit > at 9.00 a.m. In order to know the details. Remember to carry your original K.C.P.E certificate and Examination register card bearing the index number.

 

Yours truly,

 

 

Headteacher

 

Data source (List of candidates)

Name Adm. No. Address Town Date of visit
Mark Otieno 8071 P.O Box 24 Sondu 10/08/2010
Kevin Kirui 8089 P.O. Box 172 Kericho 11/08/2010
Benard Soi 8065 P.O. Box 84 Bomet 24/08/2010

Required:-

  1. i) Save main document as Main Doc (1 mk)
  2. ii) Save data source as Data source (1 m)

iii) Change addresses and reference font size to 14 points.                                      (1 ½ mk)

  1. iv) Underline the reference. (½ mk)
  2. v) Merge the letter onto main document so as to produce copies for all the candidates

and save  it as Results 2009                                                                                  (6 mks)

  1. vi) Print the letter, main Doc, Data source, Results 2009 (3 mks)

 

  1. b) Type the following text in a word processing software. (22 mks)

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS & OPERATING SYSTEMS.

            A computer is a machine or an electronic device that can solve problems by accepting

data, performing certain operations on that data (processing) and presenting the results

of those operations (information)

Basic characteristics that distinguish a computer from other information processing

devices:-

(i) A computer is electronic – That is, all its processing operations are carried out

with electrical signal.

(ii) A computer can store information for future reference. This is done on temporary

basis with memory circuits and permanently with storage devices such as magnetic

disks and tape.

(iii) Computer is programmable – unlike other devices built to perform a single function,

a computer can be instructed or programmed to perform a variety of tasks.

 

HOW A COMPUTER WORKS.

Connecting the data (raw facts) into information (organized, usable form) is called data processing. Data get into system by means of an input device e.g. keyboard then the computer performs the necessary calculations or manipulations on the data and finally the organized information is displayed by an output device e.g. a monitor.

 

FUNCTIONS PERFORMED BY A COMPUTER.

Although computers have many applications, they can perform only three basic tasks

(i) Arithmetic functions on numeric data (Adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing).

(ii) Test relationship between data items (by comparing values).

(iii) Store and retrieve data.

 

These skills are really no more than people can do, but the computer can accomplish the task more;

– Faster

– Accurately

– Reliably

 

Required:-

(a) Align the title to the centre and underline it.                                                       (1 mk)

  • Add boarder to the title.             (2 mks)
  • Replace all the Roman Numbers with bullets.             (2 mks)

(d) (i) Insert the footer “Computer Assessment Test 2010.”                                                (1 mk)

(ii) Insert the header “Your Name and the Index No.”                                         (1 mk)

(e) Set the spacing to exactly 1.5                                                                               (4 mks)

  1. f) Insert Word Art “COMPUTER” and set it to appear behind the text. (5 mks)

(g) Search for words “computer” and replace all with “PC.”                                               (2 mks)

(h) Move paragraph with heading “How a computer operates” to the end of the document.

(i) Set the front style of the document to Aerial black.                                            (3 mks)

(j) Save your work as “computer literacy.”                                                               (1 mk)

(k) Print your document.                                                                                            (2 mks)

 

 

  1. (a) Create a new workbook and name it as form 4 computer exams.             (1 mk)
NAME CLASS Adm No. CAT1 CAT2 CAT3 TOTAL AVERAGE CLASS POSITION REMARKS
Maina Joan E 7984 80 70 59        
Ken Korir W 7896 75 55 72        
Benard K. E 8092 86 59 75        
John Soi E 7460 80 79 70        
Kipsang Bett W 7892 76 75 80        
Mitei E. E 7800 38 48 25        
Mark J. W 8490 37 51 29        
Koech Ben W 8184 30 86 75        
James W. E 8082 25 27 20        
Abuya Ken E 8083 30 25 25        
Leonard B. W 8047 39 24 25        

 

(b) Enter the following data in sheet 1.                                                                    (20 mks)

(c) Rename the sheet as Term One Results.                                                             (1 mk)

(d) Find:

(i) Totals                                                                                                         (2 mks)

(ii) Average                                                                                                    (2 mks)

(e) Use IF function to award remarks as follow:

– A student whose average is above or equals to 65 gets “Excellent.”

– An average of 55 or above but less than 65 gets “Average.”

– An average of less than 55 award “Below Average.”

(f) (i) Award positions to students basing on the average score.                              (3 mks)

(ii) On the last rows enter formulas to count students from both classes.                      (2 mks)

(g) Sort the student list by class position in ascending order.                                  (2 mks)

(h) (i) Insert a bar graph  to display the information below:-

– The three CATS

– Names

– Title as “TERM ONE COMPUTER RESULTS”

  1. ii) Place the legend at the bottom of the graph. (1 mk)

iii) Save the chart on a new sheet and name it graphical analysis.              (1 mk)

(i) Print:

  1. i) The filtered lower group. (1 mk)
  2. ii) The chart. (1 mk)

iii) Term one results sheet.                                                                            (1 mk)

 

*UGU*

  1. (a) Using a word processing package, type the passage below as it appears and save it as

A:/STRESSDOC1                                                                                      (27mks)

A parent who appreciates by             saying, “Well done’   or I’m proud of you’ can leave an indelible mark.

 

There is much more to facing stress in life than the right diet and physical exercises. Indeed, it could be that the attitude on which your life is founded is the most vital part of the picture.

 

Take charge of your life

Keeping stress at bay involves treating yourself as someone with a right to life. That will involve a degree of assertiveness and confrontation. Those very words can conjure up images of a shoot-out at the OK Corral. It does not have to be that way. There is a world of difference between being assertive and being aggressive. Sadly, many who need to break out from being always submissive to the expectation and demands of others can only imagine that the alternative is to be aggressive.

 

You are submissive when:

  • you are not willing or not able to express your feelings, needs, values and personal concerns
  • you let others invade personal space and trample on your rights.

 

You are aggressive when:

– you tend to stomp over other people

– you inflict and impose your views and values on others, expressing your feelings at their

expense.

 

You are assertive when:

  • you say what you want, without overwhelming or abusing other people
  • you are clear about your own position and let other people know
  • you can accept that others may have views different from your own and may wish to negotiate their position accordingly.

 

Assertiveness involves much more than defending your rights. It equally concerns your being prepared to expect that your own needs be recognized and met. In particular, two key statements typify the maturity of character that lies behind assertive. These are the conviction that:

  • I have the right to decide for myself whether or not I am responsible for finding a solution to someone else’s problem and they have the same right when faced with mine.
  • I have the right to deal with people without having to make them like me and they have the same right concerning

 

Few people find that assertiveness comes easily. But the hard work involved in monitoring your personal style together with some training through a local evening class or appropriate reading pays dividends. This is because mastering assertiveness leads to:

  • better and more honest communication
  • giving others greater dignity and respect
  • learning to relax and reduce anxiety
  • getting more of your needs accepted
  • closer interpersonal relationships
  • taking responsibility of what happens in your life
  • feeling better about yourself
  • protection from being taken advantage of by others

 

(b)    (i) Spell check the passage                                                                                             (2mks)

(ii) Indent the first line of the paragraph starting with “Keeping stress at bay…..”                (2mks)

By 1.2cm (or 0.47”)

(iii) Select the paragraph starting with “Assertiveness involves much more…..” and set the

left and the right margins to 2cm (or 0.79”) and fully justify. Save the changes as A:/STRESSDOC2.                                                                                                         (6mks)

(iv) Insert page numbering at the bottom center of each page                                    (2mks)

 

(c)       (i) Retrieve A:/STRESSDOC1 and covert all the text from the paragraph starting with

“There is   much more…”” into two columns of the same width and height.         (5mks)

(ii) Change the line spacing for the entire paragraph starting with “There is more to facing

stress….”        to 1.5.                                                                                                                (2mks)

(iii) Save the changes as A:/STRESSDOC3                                                                  (1mk)

(d)    Print the documents;  A:\STRESSDOC2 A:\STRESSDOC3             (3mks)

 

 

  1. Use the information in the table below to design a database. Name the table as “EmpT and store the database file as Company                                                                               (20mks)
Name Date of birth Sex ID No. Dept Salary paid (Kshs.)
Peter 20-07-71 Male 1377841 Accounts 3000
James 30-5-78 Male 1235542 Sales 4000
Gregory 30-06-79 Male 1244745 Account s 5600
Job 14-04-77 Male 2213540 Marketing 4500
Sarah 14-07-79 Female 1124681 Sales 3000
Paul 12-04-80 Male 1455367 Accounts 3500
Onyango 25-04-08 Male 0147535 Sales 7000
Jessica 01-01-79 Male 5664124 Sales 3500

 

(a) Create a form named EmpF and add two more records using the form                   (5mks)

(b) Create three reports to print the information below:

(i) Employees listed by Department types (EmpR1)                                                (6mks)

(ii) Alphabetical listings of all employees (EmpR2)

(iii) All employees in the sales department get a 2% commission on sales. Create a report to

show   the commission paid to all the sales people, if the basic salary for the sales people is

Kshs.3000        (EmpR3)                                  (8mks)

(c)  Create a query (EmpQ) to show who will be retiring at the end of the year, if the retirement

age is 55.

 

 

*KSM*

  1. You are an accountant in affirm that provides mobile phone services. You wish to work out

the pay  details for a new employee and present a report.

NAME YEARS

WORKED

BASIC

PAY

DEPARTMENT SALES

(KSH)

HOUR OF

OVERTIME

MILEAGE

(KM)

Eric 9 14000 sales 16000 10 120000
Stephen 23 18000 admin 25000 11 130000
Fred 5 7000 sales 22000 12 112000
John 17 18000 marketing 12000 15 134200
Julius 18 16000 sales 11000 22 123000
Daniel 3 25000 admin 30000 12 10200
Martin 11 19000 sales 35000 33 132000
Stanley 15 15000 marketing 14000 14 112000
Evans 11 23000 admin 25000 0 12000
Gideon 8 17000 accounts 14000 7 154000

(a) Using the information above, design an appropriate spreadsheet and enter the given data, give

it a suitable title and save it as A: Tel 1                                                                      (14mks)

(b) (i)calculate the total sales and total mileage and labels them accordingly               (4mks)

(ii) Write on the paper provided the formula used for total mileage                         (1mk)

(iii) Save the spreadsheet now as A: Tel 2                                                                  (1mk)

(c) (i) The employees sales commission is calculated as 11% of the employees sales. Input this

commission rat in cell C20 and label it appropriately.                                            (3mks)

(ii) Insert a new column labeled ‘sales commission’ between ‘sales’ and ‘hours of overtime’

(iii) Create a formula to give the amount f sales commission by making reference to sales

commission cell.                                                                                                     (4mks)

(iv) On the paper provided write the formula created.                                                  (1mk)

(v) Copy the formula to get the sales commission for all the other employees and save the

worksheet as A: Tel 3                                                                                                (3mks)

(d) (i)staff who work in admin and work overtime are given a bonus of shs.3600 but no overtime

pay, while staff who work in other departments are paid overtime pay at a rate of shs.200

per hour. Create a new labeled ‘overtime and use a function to fill the value into the column

appropriately.                                                                                                                        (6mks)

(ii) On the paper provided write the function you have used                                       (2mks)

(iii) Save the spreadsheet now as A: Tel 4(1mk)

(e) (i) Create a column for the sales/mileage  ratio and label it ‘sales/mileage’. Use a function

to calculate the ratio and copy it down the column to fill the value for all employees.

(ii) Use the IF function to put the remarks ‘GOOD’ in a new labeled REMARK for only these

employees whose sales/mileage ratio is greater than 2                                        (4mks)

(iii) Save the spreadsheet now as A: Tel 5                                                                     (1mk)

(iv) Print files Tel 1, .Tel 2, Tel 3, and Tel4and Tel 5                                                    (2mks)

 

 

  1. Compulynx is a company with numerous branches in east Africa. in order to monitor the

performance of the branches and that of the cities in which the branches are located, a database

to organize the  information is required:-

(a) Create a database file and name it company                                                                (2mks)

(b) (i) create a table containing the following fields                                                        (4mks)

Field name Field type
STORE-NO Number/numeric
BRANCH Text/character
CITY Text/character
STAFF-SIZE Number/numeric

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Make the field STORE-NO the primary key and save the tables as STORES.            (2mks)

(c) (i) Create a form from the STORE able and save it as STORE-FORM                      (5mks)

(ii) Use the form to enter the records below                                                                (5mks)

 

     STORE-NO           BRANCH           CITY                     STAFF SIZE

I                       Tudor                   Mombasa                     15

2                      Bongo                  Dar-es-salam             14

3                      Sunset                  Nairobi                      21

4                       lake view              Kampala                    15

5                       king’orani             Mombasa                     9

6                       Beach town          kisumu                     16

7                       ABC                      Nairobi                     89

8                       crane Ltd              kampala                      7

9                      wheat land            nakuru                     12

10                     ocean view           Dar-es-salam             6

 

(d) (i) Modify the Store table to include and additional field with the heading SALES(SHS)            (3mks)

(ii) Enter the information below for each of the stores                                                           (2mks)

STORES-NO                         SALES

  • 789,300
  • 685,400
  • 376,958
  • 355,420
  • 457,800
  • 682,458
  • 541,000
  • 235,420
  • 352,415
  • 433,443

 

(iii) In the STORES table, swap the fields CITY with BRANCH                               (2mks)

(e) (i) Create a query from the STORE tales to display the field BRANCH,CITY,STAFF-SIZE

and SALES(SHS) for stores whose sales are less than 400,00                                          (3mks)

(ii) Sort the records in the query above in alphabetical order of BRANCH field and save it as

POOR PERFORMERS                                                                                                        (2mks)

(f)  (i) create a tabular report with landscape orientation from STORE tables to display the field

in the following order

STORE-NO    BRANCH    SALES (SHS)                                                               4mks)

(ii) Sort records in the report in alphabetic order of the BRANCH field (1mk)

(iii) Compute the total sales and place it below the SALES (shs) column and change its font

size to 13                                                                                                               (5mks)

(iv)Place two straight lines cutting across the page, one above and one below the sales total

(g)  (i) Insert a header COMPULYNX PERFOEMANCE in the  report having font size 19 and

centre it across the page                                                                                           (3mks)

(ii) Remove the report pagination and insert your name and index number in its place and

save the  report as PERFORMANCE                                                                       (2mks)

(h) Print STORES table, POOR PERFORMER query and performance report

 

*KKE*

1 a) Create anew workbook and name it as form 2 computer exams (1mk)

 

 Name class Adm.No: CAT1 CAT2 CAT3 total average Class position Remark
Maina john E 7984 80 70 59        
Ken Korir W 7896 75 55 72        
Bernard K E 8092 86 59 75        
John Soi E 7460 80 79 70        
Kipsang Bett W 7892 76 75 80        
Mitei E E 7800 38 48 25        
Mark J W 8490 37 51 29        
Koech Ben W 8184 30 86 75        
James W E 8082 25 27 20        
Abuya ken E 8083 30 25 25        
Leonard W 8047 39 24 25        
  1. b) Enter the following data in sheet 1 (15mks)
  2. c) Rename the sheet as term one result (1mk)
  3. d) Find:

i)totals

  1. ii) Average (2mks)
  2. e) Use the subtotals function to find the average of each class (5mks)
  3. f) Use the IF function to award marks as follows

 

  • A student whose average is above or equal 65 is given “excellent”
  • An average of 55 or above but less than 65 award “average work”
  • An average less than 55 award “work below average”
  1. Award position to students basing on the average scored (3mks)
  2. ii) On the last rows, enter formulas to count students from both classes (2mks)
  3. g) Sort the student list by class position in ascending order (2mks)
  4. h) i)copy the entire worksheet onto sheet 2 and rename it “lower group”(2mks)

ii)filter “lower group” sheet to display students from “E” class and whose average score is

below 50

  1. i) Draw a bar graph to display the following information (3mks)

-the three cats

-names

-Title as “TERM ONE COMPUTER RESULTS”

  1. Place the legend at the bottom of the graph (1mk)
  2. ii) Save the chart on a new sheet and name it graphical analysis (1mk)
  3. j) Print
  4. The filtered lower group (1mk)
  5. The chart (1mk)

iii) Term one results sheet (1mk)

 

2 a) Create a database called ELIMU (2mks)

  1. b) Create three tables EXAMINATION, DOS and BOARDING with the field as shown below
  2. c) Create a relationship between the three tables and enforce integrity (6mks)
  3. d) Enter the data items in the given three tables (15mks)
  EXAMINATIONS      
Admission  number mathematics English Kiswahili Biology
1 45 67 90 23
10 45 89 90 20
2 45 70 80 45
3 89 90 90 20
4 78 9 90 50
5 67 89 60 90
6 67 90 7 80
7 34 78 70 90
8 23 50 38 90
9 23 15 67 20

 

    DOS    
Admission number S name Other names KCPE Mark Year of KCPE
1 Peter Barasa 327 2007
10 Johnson Suk 250 2001
2 Alex Ojwang’ 340 1998
3 Chepkuto Esther 250 2008
4 Wekesa Raymond 450 2007
5 Alex Wamwana 410 2003
6 Jane Kilonzo 400 2000
7 Mathew Kariuki 450 1999
8 Nasimiyu Catheen 290 2003
9 Kimathi John 300 2001
  BOARDING    
Admission number uniform tool Tool name
1 No 12 JEMBE
10 Yes 20 JEMBE
2 No 11 PANGA
3 Yes 1 SLASHER
4 Yes 111 JEMBER
5 No 15 RAKE
6 Yes 22 BASIN
7 Yes 11 BROOMS
8 Yes 90 RAKE
9 yes 23 BUCKET

 

  1. e) Design query that would display the following fields as shown below and write down the formulae for getting the total score and criteria for extracting the records below (10marks)
  Admin            
Admission number uniform S Name KCPE Mark maths English Kiswahili TOTAL SCORE
1 Yes chepkuto 250 89 90 90 269
10 Yes wekesa 450 78 9 90 177
2 Yes Jane 400 67 90 7 164

 

  1. f) Design a report that would sort the following in ascending order of the following fields, total score, and KCPE score, name the admission number and the report should display all the fields. Save the report as administration (5mks)
  2. g) Print, administration and admin (2mks)

 

 

*RCH*

Question 1.

Ms – Access Database

(a) Create a database file called VIDEOS and use it to enter the details that follow.         (3 mks)

(b) Create a table called Customer using the following structure.                                       (4 mks)

Field Name                 Data type       Size           Description                          Caption

            Customer ID               Number           3                3 – digit unique number      Customer ID

Last Name                  Text                 25              Enter the Last Name           Last Name

First Name                  Text                 15              Enter First Name                 First Name              Address                       Text                 50              Address                                Address

Birth Date                   data/time                           Enter yyyy/mm/dd              Date of birth

Home Tel                    Text                 14                   Home Tel.                   Home Tel.

Work Tel                    Text                 14              Work Tel.                         Work Tel.

Email                          Text                 40              Email Address                     Email Address

Gender Place              Text                   1             M or F                                   Gender

Work Place                 Text                 40        Place of employment    Place of employment

(i) Make the Customer ID Field the primary key.                                                                 (1 mk)

(ii) Format the Last Name and First Name fields to convert characters to upper case by using >.

(iii) Enter Yes in the required property of the Last Name, First Name and Gender fields. (1 mk)

(iv) Format the Birth Date field yyyy.mm.dd to input the birth dates ,year, month abd day.(1 mk)

(v) Use the input mask for the Home Telephone and work Telephone fields. The input mask should be    (999) 999 – 999.

(vi) Format the Gender field to convert the character to upper case using >.                                  (1 mk)

(vii) Enter the M or F for the Validation rule field of the gender Field.                              (1 mk)

(viii) Enter the Only valid entries are M or F in the validation Text of the Gender Field.(1 mk)

(ix) Enter Yes in the required property of the gender field.                                                 (1 mk)

 

(x) Save the tables as Customer.                                                                                            (1 mk)

Customer ID  

Last Name

 

First Name

 

Address

 

Birth Date

Home Tel. Work Tel. Email  

Gender

Work place
 

201

 

JOHNSON

 

MICHELE

 

RUBY PARK, ST PHILIP

 

1969/02/15

(245) 431- 2916  

(246)_ 2196

 

Michele@bclub.com

 

F

Bankers

Night

Club

 

202

 

CHANDLER

 

TRYONE

 

BANK HALL, ST. MICHAEL

 

1969/03/05

(246) 431- 8971  

(246) 422- 1119

   

M

GE

Electronics

 

203

 

BANFIELD

 

SHIRLEY

 

71 LONG BAY DEVELOPMENT

 

1970/10/26

(246) 5441    

sheba@email.com

 

F

 
 

204

 

ISIDORE

 

EYSTHER

 

4MT STANDFAST, ST. JAMES

 

1968/11/10

(246) 433 – 9172 (246)

422 – 1999

   

F

Queen

Elizabeth

Hospital

 

205

 

CONNEL

 

WINSTON

 

CANE GARDEN, ST. THOMAS

 

1971/12/10

(246)  433 – 9172 (246) 417- 4177  

connel@hotmail.com

 

M

Transport

Board

 

206

 

KELLMAN

 

ARLENE

 

ST. PATRIICKS, CHRIST CHURCH

 

1974/06/10

(246) 421 – 2031 (246) 426 – 2979  

sypher@hotmail.com

 

 

F

KMGP
 

207

 

PAYNE

 

REBA

 

FOSTER, HALL, ST. GEORGE

 

1967/01/03

(246) 423- 6823 (246) 423 – 9741  

rebapay@sunbeach.com

 

F

Core

Crystal

Hotel

 

208

 

GRANT

 

FREDERIC H

 

GRAPEHALL,

ST. LUCY

 

1962/09/09

(246) 417 – 2280    

 

 

M

 
 

209

 

SMITH

 

IRENE

 

ASHTON HALL, ST. PETER

 

1945/07/07

(246) 433- 3302    

storm@hotmail.com

 

F

 
 

210

 

THOMAS

 

WICKMAN N

 

BOSCOBELLE, ST. ANDREW

 

1943/04/06

(246) 429 – 2916 (246) 422 – 1231    

M

JG

Retirement home

 

 

211

 

CATWELL

 

PAULINE

 

BRAGGS HILL, ST. JOSEPH

 

1970/02/02

(246) 433 – 87 91    

catpur@yaho.com

 

F

Caribbean

Union

 

212

 

GREAVES

 

LINDA

 

TOHMPSON ROAD, ST. THOMAS

 

1970/09/10

(246) 417 – 4177 (246)

417-

4177

 

 

 

F

Shoppers

Retail

Store

  1. c) Enter the following data into the customer table. (10 mks)

 

(d) Save the table as Customer.

 

(e) Some new data become available and a few changes have to be made to existing table.

These tasks are   listed below.

(i) Enter the new address for Shirley Banfields as 7 Bayfield Development.          (1 mk)

(ii) Delete record 12.

 

(f) Index in ascending order the customer table on the last name and first name fields in the design

view. The index is called Name.                                                                                       (5 mks)

 

(g) Perform a select query and print the last name, first name, address, home and work telephone

numbers for each customer. He would like the information printed with the last names in

alphabetical   order. Save the query as Customer List.                                                   (5 mks)

 

(h)       (i) Create a query to display all customers who live in St. Michael or St. Thomas. Save

the  query    as Saint.                                                                                              (2 mks)

(ii) Display all customers whose last names begin with “B’ save it as B.               (2 mks)

 

(i) Create a Customer data entry form from the customer table. The title of the form should be

“Customer Data Entry Form”                                                                                           (4 mks)

 

(j) Print customer table, Customer List, Saint and B.                                                                       (2 mks)

 

Question 2.

Spreadsheet Microsoft Excel

 

You are employed as a sales clerk at JOY TO THE WORLD Mobile Shopping Center. Make a Spreadsheet, which keeps track of 2001 Xmas Orders. Enter the data below, using a format of $ and 2 decimal places for the Cost.

  A B C D E
1 CLIENT # ORDER 1 ORDER 2 ORDER 3 COST
2 A-039 393 567 452 59.00
3 M-539 239 189 102 41.00
4 A-725 257 200   35.00
5 R-341 775 348 183 53.00
6 M-910 158 358 455 89.90
7 P-394 981 208   47.25
8 M-032 319 186 128 38.75
9 M-333 456 235 185 62.00

 

(a) Type the following data in a spreadsheet program and save it as SHOPPING.              (5 mks)

(b) Calculate the NET ORDER (i.e. the total number of orders for each client).                (3 mks)

(c) Calculate the SUBTOTAL for each client.                                                                      (3 mks)

(d) Sale tax is 6%. Handling cost is $8.00. Write them in appropriate cells in the spreadsheet.(2  Calculate the TAX AND HANDLING charge foe each client.                                            (5 mks)

(Subtotal* sales tax) + handling cost.

(f) Calculate the TOTAL CHARGE for each.                                                                       (5 mks)

(g) Format ALL results from the above calculations as $ and zero decimal places.                       (3 mks)

(h) Show the lowest, highest and average figures for each order.                                        (5 mks)

 

(i) Center, underline the name of the company at the top of the spreadsheet.                     (2 mks)

(j) Save the spreadsheet as ORDERS 1.                                                                                (1 mk)

(k) Change the sales tax to 7% handling charges to $9.50 and the cost for client # M-910 to $45.78.

(l) Delete the record of client # P-394.                                                                                  (2 mks)

(m) Sort the records so that the client numbers appear in descending order.                                  (3 mks)

(n) Save as ORDERS 2.                                                                                                          (1 mk)

(o) To the right of $9.95, enter the alternative handling charge as $11.95.                          (1 mk)

(p) Using ORDERS 2 to analyze the sales of order 1 only, delete the columns for ORDERS2, ORDERS   S3 and the NET ORDER. Recalculate the SUB-TOTAL for each client.  (5 mks)

(q) Using ORDERS 2. If  a customer buys 319 items or less, the handling charge will be $ 9.95. If the     order is 320 or more then the handling will be $ 11.95.

Recalculate the TAX and the HANDLING charge for each customer where TAX AND HANDLING       = (Subtotal* sales tax) + handling cost.

Enter the new formula in the TAX AND HANDLING column.                                      (3 mks)

 

(r) Make a bar graph in a new sheet called COMPARISON which shows the total charge for each  client.     The graph should also reflect how much of this is tax and handling and show how much is subtotal.

(2 mks)

(s) Save it and print all the files.                                                                                           (2 mks)

 

 

*TZM*

QUESTION ONE       (50 MARKS)

A), using an appropriate word processing, type the following passage and save it in

diskette as DATA SECURITY                                                                                              (l0marks)

 

Data security and control

External threats

  1.      Fire, floods, earthquakes and other natural disasters. These are the potential

threats hut are not the most common external problems,

  1. Theft of equipment-theft of pc’s laser printers and even memorychjps after a

Break into a building are very common,

      iii.       Espionage (intelligence)-information in the wrong hands can do a lot of

damage. Example access to a payroll or accounting information is restricted so

Such information should be shielded away from external and internal spies.

Internal threats

Internal threat would include

  1. Hacking
  2. Fraud
  • Hardware failure
  1. Corruption of databases

Viruses load and run without the user requesting them to run; and cause considerable damage e.g.

  1. Modifying other program
  2. Hiding inside other programs with an aim of spreading to other mashine

iii.       Destroying data and programs.

It is a computer code which usually designed to carry out two tasks:

  1. To replicate itself from one computer system to another.
  2. To locate itself within a computer system in such a way as to make it possible

for it to amend or destroy programs and data files, by interfering with the normal processes of the operating, system.

 

 Questions

  1. i) Copy the original document (data security) to the next page (2marks)
  2. ii) Format the headings as follows: (6marks)
 

 

Font size

 

Font type

 

underline

 

bold

 

Data security and control

 

14

 

Times new Roman

 

Yes

 

Yes

 

External threats

 

14

 

Monotype corsiva

 

None

 

Yes

 

Internal threats 14 Default Yes No

iii) Change the numbering to bullets; as follows:                                                                  (2 marks)

         Headings

 

bullet

 

i.                  External threats

ii.               internal

>

 

·

 

 

  1. iv) Strike through the word internal threats                                                                               (2marks)

C). i) Insert the ANY clipart at the bottom center of the document.                                   (3marks)

ii).Create word art as indicated by the symbol.                                                                        (2marks)

iii) Using auto shape, design a logo as indicated by the symbol.                                (2marks)

 

 

SECURITY

 

 

  1. D) Save the document as SECURITY                                                                            (2marks)

E)i. Copy the original document (data security) to the next page                                         (2marks)

  1. Drop cap the first letter of the document (D) to cover two lines                         (1mark)

iii. Spell check the whole document.                                                                                              (2marks)

  1. Double space and italics the first paragraph                          (3marks)
  2. Insert a header “computer threat” to appear in every page             (2marks)
  3. Number the pages using the format 1, 2, 3…..
  4. F) Save the document as COMPUTER THREAT             (2marks)
  5. G) Print the document
  6. Data security                                                                                                            (1mark)
  7. Security                                                                                                                    (1mark)

iii.       Computer threat                                                                                                                (1mark)

 

QUESTION TWO   (50 marks)

The following is a worksheet extracted from business Join venders.. They have come together to do a business of selling computer accessories.

Names Cost Sales Gross profit Expenditure Reserves Net profit Remarks
Benson 700 350   450      
Betwel 400 700   50      
Kimwat 200 900   200      
Amos 300 1000   300      
Tembur 100 500   100      
Korir 400 600   40      
Towett 600 850   55      
Maritim 500 350   70      
Kerich 200 350   45      
Bency 500 1000   40      
Danson 600 900   170      
Kones 900 1000   20      
Koech 100 800   130      

Additional Information.

  1. a) Gross profit = Sales-Cost
  2. b) Net profit = gross profit – (expenditure+ reserves)
  3. c) Reserves = 10% gross profit
  4. d) Remarks are: “very good vendor”, “good vendor”, “domain vendor”,” burden

vendor”. “Quite vendor”.

 

REQUIREMENT

(i)        Create the workbook and enter the details, save as vendor.ex                         (15marks)

(ii)       a) Keep the title of the workbook to be JOIN VENDORS and format it to be bold, font size

14 and a align at 20°                                                                                      (4marks)

  1. b) Format the figures in sale column to 2 decimal places                       (2marks)
  2. c) Insert two rows between Tembur and Korir and enter the records below: (5marks)

–    Name Bii, cost 100, sales 500 and expenditure 10.

–    Name Mutai, cost 800, sales 2000 and expenditure 80.

(iii)      Use sum function to calculate gross profit for each member                                               (3marks)

(iv)      Use product function to calculate reserves for each member                                    (3marks)

(v)       Use “IF function” and net profit to analyses the vendors, taking the following remarks:                       (6marks)

  1. a) If net profit >=500, then “very good vendor”
  2. b) If net profit > 400,  then ” good vendor”
  3. c) If net profit <=300, then” domain vendor”

(vi)      a) Use names of the vendor and cost to insert a line graph, keep the title of the graph to be PRODUCTIVE ANALYSIS, format it and place it in a separate sheet.          (5marks)

  1. b) Save the changes as productive analysis (2marks)
  2. c) Print the “Join vendor” and “productive analysis” including gridlines 4marks)

QUESTION 3 (50 MARKS)

  1. You have been asked by the school administration to design school advert to inform school members about form four farewell party. Your advert should look like the design below.

 

 

Answers

paper one

*NYR*

  1. Identify programming language used in the following generations:-             *NYR*

             (i) First generations – machine language

            (ii) Second generation – assembly language

  1. Give importance of having the following in computer laboratory:-             *NYR*

             (i) Standard furniture in the laboratory

  • To avoid poor posture during machine use this may lead to strain injury and limb fatigue

            (ii) Antiglare screen/monitor

  • To avoid eye strain and fatigue caused by over bright cathode ray tube monitors (CRT)

            (iii) UPS

  • Temporarily supply to the computer to allow the user to save the work (power backup)
  • Stabilizes power (clean unstable power supplied from the main source to clean stable voltage)
  1. 3. (a) Explain the following terms as used in booting:-

            (i) BIOS:- it’s the basic input output system. it’s special firmware program that Post to

                              take place

            (ii) POST:- Power on self test. It checks on existing drives, basic input/output devices and

                                communicates in case  of  a problem.

            (b) Differentiate between:-                                                                                      

             (i) Backspace and delete keys on the keyboard

  • Backspace and delete keys on the keyboard – erases character from the right while delete keys key erases from the left of the cursor.

            (ii) Insert and type over mode

  • Insert and type over mode- in the insert mode when the text is inserted between words or character it pushes the existing text away without replacing it while in the type over mode when text is type between words or characters the new text automatically replaces the existing text by de letting it.
  1. Explain the functions of the following central processing unit components

            (i) ALU

  • To carry out all the arithmetic and logical operations (i.e mathematic computations and comparison of values)

            (ii) Control unit

  • Coordinating all processing activities in the CPU as well as input,storage and output operations.

            (iii) Primary memory

  • Provides storage location for data and instructions accessed by the control unit
  1. (a) Differentiate between static RAM and Dynamic RAM
  • Static RAM is a very fast memory and holds its contents as long as there is power
  • Dynamic RAM holds the contents for a short while even if when the power is on.

            (b) Distinguish between compilers and interpreters                      

  • Compilers – translates the entire source program into object code.
  • Interpreters- translates the source code line by line
  1. (a) List two softcopy output devices             Speakers
  • Monitors

(b) Distinguish between impact and non-impact printers citing one example in each    *NYR*

  • Impact printers – these printers print using striking mechanism i.e they strike the paper

       in order to form an imprint on it. e.g dot matrix, daisy wheel, drum, chain and golf ball

  • Non impact printer :- they print using ink, thermal or laser mechanisms e.g laser, thermal,,ink jet, electrstatic
  1. State two merits of using the following input devices:

            (i) Speech recognition

  • NO keyboard is necessary
  • Useful in instruction where hand/eyes are too busy handling documents
  • Can be used in remote locations via the phone.

             (ii) Touch screen

  • Faster in data entr.
  • Can be used with non-computer literates.
  • It’s applicable to people with disabilities.
  1. Differentiate between freeware and open source as end-user –license softwares.

Freeware- software whose source code hidden from the users. Modifications only made by the manufacturer

  • Open source software whose source code is free made to the users. The users are encouraged to use ,modify and distribute the product.
  1. (a) List four types of system software

                 Operating Systems

  • Utility Software
  • Networking Software.

            (b) Explain the following functions of the operating system:-                                           *NYR*

            (i) Job scheduling:- the OS prepares, schedules, controls and monitors task submitted for

execution, to unsure the most efficient processing.

            (ii) Interrupt handling:- the processor stops executing the current process to attend to a break    from the normal sequential processing of instruction in program.

  1. Explain the following disk management tools:-

            (i) Disk formatting

  • It prepares a new disk for use by imprinting empty sectors and tracks on the surface of the disk so that the OS can recognize and make it accessible.

            (ii) Disk defragmentation

  • Arranging scattered files or folders on folders on a storage media for easy access of files and

      folders.

  1. Differentiate between the following terms as applied in operating system:-             *NYR*

            (i) Multi-user – OS allow more than one user to interactively use a computer.

            (ii) Multi-tasking- when the OS allows the CPU to executes more than  one

                                             application program at the same time

  1. Explain the following terms as applied in word processor             *NYR*

            (i) Text wrap:- this feature allows a text to surround an object inserted

            (ii) Word wrap:- the cursor move automatically to the next line after reaching the end

                                     of the line.

  1. (a) Distinguish between first line and hanging indentation                         *NYR*
  • First line indent – the first line is indent while other are left along the margin
  • Hanging indent- the whole paragraph is indent except the first line

(b) differentiate between auto complete and auto correct features.

  • Auto complete feature displays a word when the user types the first few characters of the word
  • While autocorrect feature automatically detects wrongly spelt or capitalized words and replaces them with the correct word
  1. (a) Differentiate between the following combinations of terms:-             *NYR*

            (i) Filtering and sorting:-

  • Filtering:- This is displaying entities that meet a certain ser criteria
  • Sorting:- This is arranging data in predefined order i.e ascending or descending

            (ii) Relative and absolute cell referencing

  • Relative reference – cell references keeps on changing  automatically depending on their position in the worksheet. e.g when formula= B2 + C2 in cell D2  is copied to D3 it automatically changes  to B2 + B3
  • Absolute reference – the copied formula in different cells does not adjust references. Its identified by adding a dollar sign before the parts of cell that do not change.
  1. Identify the elements of a function             *NYR*

            Equal sign (=) function name and arguments

  1. A class teacher of form 3E in Nzambani secondary school requested a programmer to design a ple program that would help do the following:-                         *NYR*

             (a) Enter the names of students and marks obtained in 8 subjects; maths, English, Kiswahili, Biology, Chemistry, Business Studies, History and Computer Studies.

             (b) After entering each subject mark the program should calculate for each student

             (c) Depending on the average mark obtained, the program should assign the grades as

Between 80 and 100 = A

Between 70 and 79 = B

Between 60 and 69 = C

Between 50 and 59 = D

Below 50 = E

            (d) The program should display each students name, total marks and the average grade. Using low chart, show the design of the program

  1. (a) Define the following terms in reference to the internet:-   

            (i) Protocol:- set of rules that govern transmission of data or information over a net work

            (ii) Website:- it’s collection of related web pages where individual or organization

                  documents    are placed for easy access by external world by using their address.

(iii) Search engine:- it’s a program that searches documents for specific keywords and returns a    list of the documents where the keywords were found.

            (iv) Spam mail:- its; a feature in e-mail which inhibits receiving mails from unknown

                    sources.

            (b)List three examples of search engines                                                                           

  • Google
  • Yahoo
  • Hotmail
  • Gmail

            (c) Identify the functions of the following devices in data communication:-                   *NYR*

(i) Modem:- it’s a special digital to analog interface card that changes data from digital to analog so as to be transmitted  on telephone lines and  on the receiving end the data is changed from analog to digital for computer to understand.

             (ii) Network interface card:- it’s a circuit board that fits inside an expansion  slot of a

               workstation and acts as a physical between the computer and the transmission media.

             (iii) Brouter: collection of routers in network.

             (d) Describe bounded and unbounded forms of communication giving two examples

    in each case                                                                                                            *NYR*

Bounded media – it is physical connection of communication devices mainly by use of cables e.g coaxial cables twisted pair , two wire cables and fibre optic cbale.                                                                 

            (e) Outline four advantages of using fibre optic cables                                              

  • Low attention
  • High bandwith
  • Immune to electromagnetic interference
  • Very secure because they are untappable.
  1. (a) Define the following terms as used in data representation             *NYR*

           (i) Amplitude:- the maximum value a wave can attain

             (ii) Frequency:- the number of cycles made by a wave in one second

            (iii) Nibble:- half abyte (4 bits)

            (iv) Byte:- a group of 8 bits

            (b) Perform the following 11111.11112 + 100001.10102 – 1111.001112                                                *NYR*

                                       11111.1111

                                     + 10001.1010

                           Answer 110001.1001

                                                 -1111.0011

                       Answer = 100010.010112

           (c)Using two’s complement subtract 73from 115 and convert the answer to decimal notation*NYR*

            115 – 73 = 115 + (-73)

           Convert 115 to binary = 11100112

Convert 73 to binary = 10010012

Convert 73 to8-bits = 10010012

Convert the 8-bit above to ones complement = 10110110

Convert to two complement by adding 1 to ones complement above = 11001111012

Answer = 1100111012

           (d) Identify the duties of the following ICT specialists                                                        *NYR*

           (i)Software engineer

  • Developing system and application software.
  • Developing user and technical documentation for a new software.
  • Maintain and update the software to meet day to day requirements

           (ii) System analyst

  • Design new and recommend change to existing one.
  • Co-ordinate training for users of a new system.
  • Repair system specifications
  • Co-ordinate the implementation of the new system
  • Prepare instruction manual

            (e) List two types of opportunities available in the field of computer hardware               *NYR*

  • Computer technicians
  • Computer engineers
  1. (a) Describe the following computer files

            (i) Logical and physical files

               Logical files:- It’s viewed in terms of what data items it contains and detail of what

                   processing      operation may be performed.

  Physical files:- its viewed on how data is stored on a storage media.

            (ii) Master and backup files

Master  file – contains relatively  permanent record about particular items or entities and

  backup   files

Backup files- it holds copies of others existing files.

            (b) Explain the following computational errors                                                                             (i) truncation:- it occurs as a result of having a real  numbers that have long fractional

                 part can  not fit in the allocated memory space

            (ii) Overflow:- occurs as a result of having too long answer after  calculation that can not

                  fit in    the    allocated memory space

            (iii) Rounding errors:- Results from raising or lowering a digit in a real number to the

                  required rounded number

            (c) Define data integrity and state three ways of minimizing threats to data integrity

  • Data entry- it’s the accuracy and competences of data entered in a computer or

                  received from an information system

Ways of minimizing data threats are

  • backing up data
  • using devices that capture data directly from the source
  • designing user interfaces that minimizes invalid data reality
  • using error detection and application areas of virtual reality

            (d) Define virtual reality and state three ways of minimizing threats to data integrity         

Virtual reality – a condition in which a person becomes psychologically immersed in artificial environment generated by a computer system.

Areas of application

  • Aircrafts
  • Military training
  • Simulation
  • Design evaluation
  • Education

            (e) Discus how computers are used in reservation systems                                                           

  • Hotels booking – booking of rooms online
  • Airline booking – clients can book for a seat online
  1. (a) Explain the main activity carried out in each of the following system

development stages                                                                                                   

            (i) Problem recognition :– identifying whether a problem exists.

            (ii) Coding: – writing a program using a programming language.

           (iii) Implementation: – file conversion, staff training and changeover strategies

            (b) Explain the following changeover methods:-                                                              *

          (i) Direct:- the old system is discarded and the new system starts immediately.

          (ii) Parallel:- both old and new systems are run parallel to each other for some time

               till the users  have confident with the new system then the old system is phased out.

          (iii) Phased:-the new system is implemented in phases or stages.

         (c) Explain two advantages of modular programming                                                         

  • Easy to debug
  • Easy to develop
  • Its flexible
  • Easy to read and modify

         (d) Explain how the use ICT may affect the society                                                              

  • Environment pollution due to poor dispose of computer parts
  • Cultural effects
  • Affecting user’s health
  • Effects on employment
  • Automated production

         (e) Explain the four main areas of artificial intelligence                                                    

  • Expert systems- soft that stores then knowledge of human experts and then used as consultant in a particular filed.
  • Natural language processor – ability of a computer to understand human language and translate it to instruction upon which the computer can understand.
  • Voice recognition-systems that allow voice input a microphone.
  • Voice synthesis – machine able to create human voice or talk.
  • Computer vision – computers to be able to process and interpret light waves like human being.
  • Robotics – it’s a computer controlled device that emulate beings in carrying o ut tasks.

*KKC*

 

  1. – ROM (read Only Memory) it is used to store  programmed instruction and a data permanently or semi permanently.
  • Data and instruction stored in Rom are those require to remain uncharged for long period of time
  • RAM (Random Access Memory) its content can be read directly regardless of the sequence in which it is stored.
  • Its contents is held temporarily and it content lost is lost once the computer is turned off.

 

Place Value               83(512) 82(64) 81(8) 80(1)
Octal digit 1 1 1 1

 

 

 

 

 

2.a)   Working out

     N10  =(1X83) + (1X82) +(1X81)+ (1X80)

             =512 + 64+8+1

      N10 = 585

     \ 11118 =58510

 

2 2 . 2-1 2-2 2-3
1 1 . 0 1 1
2 1 . 0 0.25 0.25
  1. b) Solution

     Weight 

     Binary

     digit value

      in bare 10

 

 

Integral part                                                               Fraction part

(21X1) + (1X10) =                                                       0.50 X0 =  0.000

2.000+ 1.000                                                               0.25 X 1=  0.250

=3.00010                                                                      0.125X1= + 0.125

                                                                                                                    0.37510

3.00010+ 0.37510 =3.375

Thus 11.0112 = 3.37510

 

  1. i) Cracking refers to the use of guesswork over and over again by a person until he/she finally discovers a weakness in the security policies or codes of a software.
  2. ii) Hacking is breaking codes and password to gain unauthorized entry to computer system data and information files.
  3. b) – Data not to be transferred to other coutities without the owners permission
  • Data and information should be kept secure against loss and exposure.
  • Data and information should be accurate and up to date
  • Data informatuor be collected used and kept for specified lawful purposes

 

  1. – Job scheduling can only handle one task at a time therefore, the operating system has to determine which task will be processed first and makes sure that the one that is currently being processed closely monitored to avoid wasting time in the processor.

–          Job sequence – the operating sys tem keeps a list  of jobs or tasks currently being run and clocks them in   and out of processor.

5.–    Avoid smoking or exposing computer to dust.

  • Avoid carrying food and beverage to computer soon
  • Avoid unnecessary movements because you Mary accidentally knock down peripheral devices.
  • At all times following the current procedure for starting and shutting down the computer to avoid loss of data damage to computer programs.
  • Do not open the metallic covers of computers or peripherals devices without permission and particularly when the computer power is still on.

 

  1. a) Web page is the major page containing data i.e Text pictures clips etc while a website is a collection of web pages.
  2. b) –    Flat file
  • Network
  • Hierarchical
  • Relational
  1. – Computer operator is a person who enters data in a computer and  keeps upto date records of all       information processing activities.

       – Computer technician is a person who troubleshoot computer hardware and software, assemble and   upgrades computer components such as storage device and motherboards.

 

  1. Mail Merge is the process of generating letter or documents by combining a main document.

 

  1. a) advantage
  • Utilizes the powerful like speed, accuracy tot enable the user quickly accomplish tasks.
  • Offers a large storage space on computer storage device to save and retrieve document.
  • The user produces neat work due to lack of pencil pen work.
  • Have better document formatting capabilities.
  • Inbuilt formula that enables the user to quickly manipulate data.
  1. b) Cell referencing identifies a cell or range of cells on the worksheet and show Ms cells where to look for the values or data needed to use in a formula.

 

  1. Graphical based e.g adobe photoshop

     – Coreldraw      

 – Havard graphic                   

 – Layout based.

  1. – Data communications media – Optic fiber
  • Communication devices e.g hub routers
  • Networking software e.g network operating system.

 

12 . – Financial system –payroll, accounting and banking

  • Retail system – stock control, electronic point of sale.
  • Reservation system
  • Education system – computer aided instruction, aided learning.
  • E – learning & computer simulation.

 

13 a) CD’S, CD- ROM, CD RW,CD –R

DVD

LS – 120 SUPER DISK

OPTICAL CARD

OPTICAL TAPE

  1. b) Magnetic Disk, Floppy disks, Zip disks,  Jaz disks

 

  1. a) master file main file that contain permanent records of a particular entry.
  2. b) Sequential organization

          Index –sequential  organization.

SECTION  b (60MARKS)

  1. a i) While – do structure
  2.  ii) Repeat –until
  3. b) i) Assembler – translate assembly source program into object code.

             ii)Complier – translate entire source program into object code

             iii)Interpreter – translates source program line –by tine allowing the CPU to execute one line before  translating the next.

  1. b) 1. Check the loop used

              The psendocode can use two  looping structure

a .If – then – else

  1. Case structure
  2. Confirm that loops used can be able to give out the desired results.
  3. See that the candidate has used appropriate amount and discount.

 

  1. i) employee because it has employee information

     ii)To ensure all records entered  in the related table exists in the primary table.

    iii)Is a unique identity of a record

    iv)Employee number

     v)The data  is not similar

  1. b) 1. Input mark
  2. validation rule

    3.Required

  1. Indexed
  2. c) 1. To enhance security of data
  3. To share file between department
  4. To reduce redundancy
  5. To enable updating and deleting of data.
  6. In faster searching of data.

 

  1. a) i) A – free/hierarchical topology

   B -Ring topology

   C -Mesh topology

 

  1. ii) Point 1 and 2

         Terminator

iii) Mesh topology

  1. iv) – Modifying the topology

     – Troubleshooting is difficult

     – One device breakdown affects the whole system.

  1. v) Identify the device labeled X in topology A – HUB.
  2. b) a. Network protocol
  3. Network Operating System
  4. c) i) Repeaters – A device that receives signals from one send it to another segment.
  5. ii) Network hub – A device that connects computer onto network.

  iii) Fiber optic cables – transmission medium that transmits data by using light.

  1. iv) Network interface (NIC) – A device  inside the system box for linking them onto transmission

         medium.

  1. Feasibility study – is the process of going out of the filed to identify information that is related to an organization.
  2. b) Main memory
  3. Input/output devices
  4. Processor
  5. Secondary storage.

 

  1. c) i) Truncated – Errors that results from having real numbers that have a long fractional part.
  2. ii) Transposition – Errors that result from incorrect reading of source document.

   iii) Transcription – errors that occur during data entry.

  1. d) 1. ASCII(American Standard Code for Information Interchange )
  2. EBCDIC (Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code)
  3. BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
  4. e) Online – data processed immediately it is received

    Real time – the incoming data is  processed as soon as it  occurs.

  1. f) i) Advantages

It is fast in processing commands as compared to GUI and means driven interface.

Disadvantage.

  • It is difficult to the users because they need to memorize command
  • Single tasking and can not support more than one task.
  1. a) i) – Chatting

               – E-mails

               – Video conferencing

 

  1. ii) Links – A text or picture that when chicked causes other web pages to be opened.

             URL – A special internet address made up of organization name and an extension explaining to type   of organization and country.

b)

  A B C
1 Crop Amount Not Viable
2 Maize 150 Not Viable
3 Bean 300 Not Viable
4 Cashew Nuts 850 Moderate
5 Cabbages 1036 Viable
  1. c) i) Triple click

    ii)Hold down ctrl as you drag the mouse pointer.

  1. d) i) A window is a rectangular feature where an application is running and bears close, minimize and restore button while orphan is body without heading.
  2. ii) Cut and copy command.

       Cut – more or transfer text of file from the original location to another without leaving a copy .

       Copy – duplication of text or files i.e a file retails its original location and appears in another location.

  1. e) – To emphasize the beginning letter enlarge on a paragraph.
  2. f) i)Expert system – is a system developed and installed in an office using the intelligence of human being.
  3. ii) – Hospital

    – Education

    – Other scientific department.

 

*MUM*

  1.  State two functions of the SHIFT key as used in a word processor.                                 *

 – Activating from upper case to lower case and vice versa

  – Enable one to type extra characters on the key board like ?, !, & e.t.c.

  1. a) How do registers differ from buffers.             *

They store more than one piece of data and they have a bigger memory capacity

            (b) List four examples of registers.                                                                                      *

  • Program counter
  • Stack pointer
  • Instruction register
  • Index register
  1. Daniel has noticed the following problems in his computer;             *

    (i) It is taking a longer time to start up.

    (ii) It is often hanging

    (iii) Applications are taking long to load.

  (iv)State three possible causes of these problems and how they can be solved.              

  • Virus attacks
  • Processor over heating
  • Small capacity of RAM
  1. List three functions of an anti-virus software.            
  • Detecting viruses in a computer
  • Cleaning computer viruses
  1. Differentiate between a virus and a logic bomb.             *
  • A virus attacks both the hardware and software while a logic bomb attacks hardware at a specific time it has been programmed to.
  1. The cells K3 to K10 of a worksheet contain remarks on students performance such as very good, good, fair and fail depending on the average mark. Write a formula that can be used to count all  students that have the remark “very good”.                                                                       
  • Count if (KII, “Very good”)
  1. The following information shows the income and expenditure for “Beba yote” matatu for

             five    days.

The  income from Monday to Friday was Ksh.4,000, 9,000,15,000 and 20,000 respectively while expenditure  for some period was Ksh.2000,3000, 7000, 5000 and 6000 respectively.

                                                                                                       

           (b)

  1. a) Draw a spreadsheet that would contain the information. Indicate the rows as 1 , 2, 3 and

               4 and        the column as A,B,C                                                                                                     

  A B C D E F
    MON TUE WED THUR FRI
1 Income 4000 9000 15000 20000  
2 Expenditure 2000 3000 7000 5000 6000
3            

 

  1. b) State the expression that would be used to obtain:

                (i) Monday profit.              = B1 – B2                                                                                    (ii) Total income                = Sum (B1 : F1)                                                                    

                (iii) Highest expenditure. = Max (B2 : F2)                                            

  1. Describe the following terms:             

            (a) Software suite :-  A group of programmes that are sold together e.g.

                                               MS office which contains MS word, MS excel, MS access e.t.c.

(b) Shareware:- Is copyrighted software that is distributed free of charge but requires users

to make a  monetary contribution in order to continue using it

(c) Groupware:- Online software that allows several people to collaborate on the same

    project

(d) Integrated software:- A software that combines features of different programs as a whole

  1. (a) Subtract 01112 from 10012              

                        10012

                                    01112

                                      0102

            (b) Using two’s compliment subtract 7 from 40 and give the answer in decimal notation.

  1. Distinguish between uploading and downloading.             *
  • Uploading – sending information from a local computer to a remote computer on the internet
  • Downloading – transferring information from a remote computer on the internet to a local computer
  1. Distinguish between peer-to-peer Networks and client-server networks.             *
  • Peer to peer networks are equal in a network while client server networks contain a computer called a server that serves other computers called clients
  1. List any two techniques used to implement information systems in various organizations.
  • Direct
  • Parallel
  • Pilot
  • Phased
  1. Distinguish between a word and word-length as used in data representation.            
  • Word is a general term that can mean a single character or a group of characters while a word length is a measure of the NO. of bits in a word.
  1. Describe three types of maintenance that can be applied on information systems. *
  • Perfective maintenance
  • Preventive maintenance
  • Adaptive maintenance
  1. (a) Study the flowchart extracts below     *

            (b) State the looping structure demonstrated in                                                                  *

            (c) List any four methods of detecting and correcting programming bugs.                     

(d) Draw a flowchart for a program that can be used to add any positive integers that can be keyed into the computer through the keyboard. The program should count the positive numbers entered and should be terminated when a zero is keyed in.                                                      

  1. a) Study the flowchart extracts below
  2. i) While .. Do
  3. ii) Repeat… Until
  4. b) State the looping structure demonstrated in
  • Debugging utilities
  • Dry running
  • Using test data
  • Using translator programs
  1. c) List any four methods of detecting and correcting programming bugs.
  2. Below are two table structures of files in a database:

                                           TABLE 1                                                             TABLE 2

Field                                       Data type                    Field                           Data type

Employee number                  Text                             Employee number             Number

Employee Name                     Auto number              Data employed             Date/time

D.O.B                                      Date/time                    Department                Test

Address                                   Test                             Salary                         Currency

            (i) Which of the two tables is likely to be the parent table?                                                             

  • table 1

 

(ii) It is advisable to enforce referential integrity when creating a relationship. When

     creating a     relationship, what do you understand by the term referential integrity?

  • Is a feature that ensures that a record in a child table exists in a parent table

(iii) The field “employee No” in Table 2 is likely to be the primary key.

        What is a primary key?                                                                                                 

  • Is a special index that uniquely identifies a record to avoid duplication of data
  1. iv) Which fields in both tables is most appropriate for creating a relationship?
  • Employee number

            (v) What will make the relationship between the tables fail to work?                              

  • Linking fields have different data types

 (b) In databases, the field properties specify finer details related to the fields and the entries      expected. State four field properties.                                                                                    Caption

  • Input mask
  • Field size
  • Required
  • Validation rule
  • Validation text

 (c) State three functions of a database.                                                                              

  • -Storing records
  • Arranging records for easy retrieval
  • Updating and modifying records
  1. 17. (a) Explain three communication services offered through the internet.            
  • Electronic mail
  • Internet radio
  • Voip (vice oner internet protocol)

            (b) Describe the following internet terms.                                                              

            (i) Browsing:- Moving around and between web pages

           (ii) Web portal:- Website that contains several features like searching, e mail,

               advertisements, e.t.c.

           (iii) Home page:-First page displayed when a browser is started

            (iv) Hyperlink :-Text or graph when clicked links one to another web page or links

 (v) Uniform resource locator:- An address of a web page

 

            (c) The following spreadsheet is relating to a farmer.

  A B C
  CROP Amount  
1 Maize 150 Not viable
2 Beans 300  
3 Cashew nuts 850 Moderate
4 Cabbages 1036 Moderate

        

 

 

 

 

 

 

  (i) A function = IF (B2< 200, “Not viable”, IF(B2>300,”moderate”, IF(B2> 1000, “VIABLE”))).

           Give the appropriate result returned in cells C2, C3, C4 and C5.                                      

          (d) List any three functions of the control unit.                                                                   

  • Executing tasks
  • Controlling all devices within the CPU
  • Monitoring activities within the CPU
  1. (a) List any three differences between an interpreter and a compiler.             *

 

Interpreter Compiler
  1. translates source program one statement  at a time
  2. Translates the program each time it is run hence slower than compiling
  1. translates entire source code all at once
  2. translated object code requires more memory space
  3. compiled program can be stored in a storage media and run as required hence executes faster than interpreted programs
   

 

            (b) State four characteristics of Random access memory.                                                 

  • is volatile
  • contents are user defined
  • one can perform both read and write operations
  • has high access speed

            (c) Describe the following data security measures                                                                                            

              (i) Log files:- Special computer files that keep a record of computer users and actions they

                   have     done within that particular computer

(ii) Fire walls:- Is  software or hardware that filters information coming from the internet to your computer system

           (iii) Antispyware :- A soft ware that blocks spy ware programs from accessing your

                  computer       system  to collect information

            (iv) Audit trial:- Careful study of an information system to determine weakness in order

                                       to collect them

 

  1. (a) What is a transmission media?            
  • Channel that transmits data from one point to another. May be physical or non- physical

            (b) List two types of transmission media                                                                            

  • Physical e.g. coaxial cable, fibre optic e.t.c.
  • Non physical e.g. radio waves, infrared e.t.c.

            (c) Distinguish between a Hub and a switch.                                                                      *

  • A hub broadcasts data packets to all computers in a network and the recipient computer

               receives the packet while the others discard it while a switch directs a data packet to its

               intended destination computer 

            (d) With help of a well labeled diagram, describe the fibre optic cable                            *

  • Core – is the light transmission element at the centre of the optical fibre
  • Buffer – used to shield the core and cladding from damage
  • Strengthening material- surrounds the buffer, prevents the fibre cable from being stretched
  • Cladding – Acts as a mirror by reflecting light back.

            (e) What are the functions of the following devices on a network?                                               *

           (i) Repeaters  :-  They amplify or regenerate signals that have been affected by attenuation

           (ii) Network interface card :- Is an interface that links a computer to a communication

                channel

           (iii) Router :- Is a network device that connects different networks to enable communication

          (f) Distinguish between physical topology and logical topology as used in Networking               

  • Physical topology is the physical layout of computers in a network e.g. star, bus e.t.c. while logical topology is the way computers communicate on the network e.g. oken ring,       Ethernet

 

 

 

*KSM*

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

**PAPER TWO

*NYR*

 

The question tested the candidates’ ability to do the following in a database

  • award full marks for a created database with three tables bearing all the fields (3×4=12mks)
  • (b) Award 1mk for each idenitifed primary key fields in each table (1×3=3mks)
  • Award 2mks for each established relationship between the three tables (2×3=6mks)
  • Award 3mks for the records in each tacle (3×3=9mks)
  • Award 1mk for each identified field in the querry i.e customer Name, Product Description, Quantity, Unit price and calculated field total payable by each customer and 1mk for saving with appropriate name.(1×6=6mks)
  • Award 5mks for a clearly generated report (5mks)
  • Award 1mk for the printed customers, products, transaction tables designs, querry and the report

 

 

*MUM*

  1. a) text typed as indicated (26 mks)

 

b)

  • Bolditacing (1 mk)
  • Italics (2 mks)
  • Justification (2 mks)

 

  1. c) i) Columns (6 mks)

 

  1. d) i) Double spacing (2 mks)
  2. ii) Searching and replacing (2 mks)

iii) saving the document as A: NET 4                                                                       (2 mks)

 

  1. e) i) Animated title (2 mks)
  2. ii) Landscape orientation (3 mks)

 

  1. f) Printing NET 1, NET 3 and NETS (3 mks)

 

  1. a) Availability of database with all fields (8 mks)
  2. b) Availability of all records (12 mks)
  3. c) Addition of data field (3 mks)
  4. d) Information entered as indicated (5 mks)
  5. e) Start 2 sorted in descending order (6 mks)
  6. f) Query indicating items delivered by Shah on 15/5/2001 (8 mks)
  7. g) Tabular report (4 mks)
  8. h) Print outs: start 1, start 3, query 1 and report 1 (4 mks)

 

*TNW*

 

Index No:____________________     Index No:____________________  
Item Max score score     Max score score
Page Setup       A. – database file created 1  
Font-Arial 1         – File saved as Business 1  
Font size 12 for text 1     B. – Two tables created 1  
Left margin 1″ 1/2         – 4 Correct fields for table 1 4  
Right margin 0.5″ ½

 

        – 5 Correct fields for table 1 5  
Top 0.5″ ½

 

    C. Seller details form    
Bottom 0.6″ ½

 

         – 4 fields @ 1/2 mk 2  
Headings            Vehicle details form    
H1            – At least 4 fields @ 1/2mk 2  
Bold 1          Forms titles    
Centered 1         – Seller details form 1/2  
Font size – 20 1         – Vehicle details form 1/2  
1st Paragraph       D. Table 1    
Two columns 1          – 5 correct records @ 1mk 5  
Word art 1         Table 2    
Words complete 1          – 10 correct records @ 1mk 10  
Word art diagonal 1     E. Query    
Two symbols @ 1/2mk 1          4 correct fields @ 1/2mk 2  
Subscript 1          – Correct criteria 1  
2nd Paragraph            – 6 records @ 1/2mk 3  
Complete text 1          
Drop cap 1     F. – 10 correct values for new   prices @ 1/2mk 5  
In margin 1     Report    
3 lines drop 1     G. – 5 fields @ 1/2 mk 2 1/2mks
3rd paragraph            – Correct total amount 1  
H2            – saved as report 1/2  
Bold and size 14 2     H.  Printing    
Italic 1          – Seller details table 1  
4 bullets @ 1/2 2          – Vehicle details table 1  
Italicized text 1          – Report 1  
4th Paragraph                                 TOTAL    
3 columns 1          
Clip art 2          
Word art 2          
Clip art/Word art psn 1          
5th paragraph            
H3            
Bold and size 14 2          
Italics 1          
Drop cap 1          
3 lines drop 1          
Bold text 1          
Italicized text 1          
             
B. i) Paragraph copied 1          
    ii).Hanging indent 1          
    iii).-  Double space 2          
        – Landscape 2          
C. – Name 1/2          
    – Index 1/2          
D. Word count            
 – Words(376+/- 2) 1          
 – Characters(With spaces)21,660 +/- 2 1          
 – Characters(no spaces)1,800 +/- 2 1          
E.  – Paginated doc x of y 1          
     – Top 1/2          
     – Center 1/2          
F.   Doc saved as Bono2 1          
G.   Printing Bono2 1          
                      TOTAL            

 

WE MUST STRIVE FOR GREAT THINGS IN LIFE

 

one should leave legacy that speaks for years. Paul Hewson was in Nairobi recently. That won’t mean much to you, until I explain that I was referring to Bono, the world – famous lead singer of rock band U2 and campaigner against global poverty. Bono didn’t really make much noise while in Kenya. He attended the ëNation Mediaû  group’s Pan Africa Media Conference, took H2o, talked to a couple of journalists and left.

 

 

 

H

e didn’t do the other things that visiting celebrities of his stature do when in Africa: adopt a cheetah or a baby hippo, start a school for orphans, shoot the breeze pointlessly with Emilio and Tinga, utter banalties about the girl child. Bono reserves his energy for other things.

Popular Media

Bono is not famous just for being a singer. For the past couple of decades he has been one of the most visible humanitarian activists, using his fame to enlist powerful allies from:

  • Government
  • Religious institutions
  • Philanthropic groups
  • Popular media and
  • The business world.

He has personally spearheaded the campaign for debt relief for the world’s poorest countries, and has been a vocal champion for Africa. Not everyone agrees with these efforts. Author Paul Theroux savaged Bono, Bob Geldof and other celebrity humanitarians, saying that creating “the impression that Africa is fatally troubled and can be saved only by outside help – not to mention celebrities and charity concerts – is a destructive and misleading conceit.”

 

I happen to agree with that view and have propagated it in writing for many years. I don’t

think Africa’s salvation will come from outsiders,

 

 

 

 

and it certainly won’t come from endless handouts and a crippling dependency culture.

 

 

On Trivia

 

W

hat about you? How big is your life? Are you allowing your time on earth to be frittered away on trivia, or are you going to make a net positive impact on the planet? Are you doing something, anything bigger than yourself? Are you raising

a child to be a better person than you are? Are running a business or conducting a profession that sets a standard in good practice? Or are you content to be a small person imprisoned in a small life?

 

He has personally spearheaded the campaign for debt relief for the world’s poorest countries, and has been a vocal champion for Africa. Not everyone agrees with these efforts. Author Paul Theroux savaged Bono, Bob Geldof and other celebrity humanitarians, saying that creating “the impression that Africa is fatally troubled and can be saved only by outside help – not to mention celebrities and charity concerts – is a destructive and misleading conceit.”

 

*KKC*

Question One.

  1. A. (A) Complete typed letter 7mks

Single error                                                                                                                        ½ mk

More than 6 errors                                                                                                   5mks

  1. Saving main document

Using correct name                                                                                                          1mk

Using any other name                                                                                             ½ mk

  1. Saving data source list

Using  correct name                                                                                                1mk

Using any other  name                                                                                             ½ mk

  • Changing the Font Size, address and reference to 14 pts

Changing each address                                                                                             ½ mk

Changing reference                                                                                                  ½ mk

  1. iv) Underlying reference                                                                                               ½ mk
  2. v) Merging Data source to the main document
  • Each filed at the right position.                                                    ½ mk
  • Each filed at any other position.    ½ mk

 

  1. vi) Print the letters

Each  (1X3)                                                                                                              3mks

B

  1. a) –Aligning title to the centre ½ mk

underlining title

  1. b) – Adding border to the title   ½ mk
  2. c) – Replacing all remain number with bullets

– Not replacing one                                                                                                                            -½ mk

– Not replacing more than 3 (0mks)

  1. d) i) Inserting the correct footer 2mks Any other footer                                     1mk
  2. ii) Inserting the correct header. 2mks

     Any other header                                                                                                                    1mk

  1. e) – Line spacing of 1.5

-Line spacing other than Single

  1. f) Inserting word Art “computer” and not placing at the behind of text. 2 mks
  2. g) – Replacing “computer” with “PC”     2 mks

– Replacing but not all words “computer”                                                                                          ½ mk

  1. h) Moving whole paragraph to end of document.      2 mks
  2. i) Font style set to Aerial Black. 3mks
  3. j) Saving with correct name other than document N                  ½ mk    Using document N                                                                                                                 0mk
  4. k) Printing the document currently 2mks

Printing off page                                                                                                                        ½ mk

 

Question 2

  1. Saving the workbook with correct name                                                                  1mk
  • Using a different name
  • Using default  name  book  n no mark                                                                ½ mk
  1. All data entered correctly 20 mks
  • Every wrong entry ½ mk
  • More than 6 wrong entries -8mks
  1. Renaming the sheet to “term  one result”
  • Default name sheet, No mark
  1. i) Correct totals and formula             2mks
  2. ii) Correct averages and formula       2mks
  • Manual calculation no mark
  1. Correct use  of IF function to attain 3 conditions                                           (1X3) 3mks
  2. i) Correct formula and ranking
  3. ii) Correct use of the “count IF” function (1X2)2mks
  4. – Sorting list of class  position  in ascending order                                                 2mks

– Sorting list by classes position in descending order                                                           1mk

-No sorting, no mark

  1. h) i) Copying to new worksheet and renaming the new worksheet       2mks

ii)Filtering the “lower group”

  • Display students from “E” class
  • Students with average less than 50                                                               4mks
  • Filter shows a all students from E class
  • Filter shows all students with average less than 50             2mks
  1. i) i) – The chart is
  • A bar graph
  • Show 3 cats
  • Shows names of students
  • Title is TERM ONE COMPUTER RESULTS             3mks
  • Missing a point -½ mk
  1. ii) Legend placed at the bottom of chart. 1mk

iii) Saving chart on a new sheet and renaming the sheet graphical analysis.            (½ X2) 1mk

  • Saving chart as an object on the worksheet.    ½ mk
  1. Printing

i)The lower group from “E” class                                                                                 1mk

ii)The chart                                                                                                                    1mk

iii)Term one results sheet                                                                                             1mk

CBC GRADE 1 SCHEMES OF WORK TERM 3 FREE

Download updated CBC Grade 3 Schemes of work for term 3 below;

GRADE 1 – MUSIC TERM 3
GRADE 1 – MATHEMATICS ACTIVITIES – TERM 3 (2)
GRADE 1 – KISWAHILI ACTIVITIES TERM 3
GRADE 1 – CRE ACTIVITIES SCHEMES TERM 3
GRADE 1 – HYGIENE AND NUTRITION ACTIVITIES – TERM 3
GRADE 1 – ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES SCHEMES – TERM 3 – V1
GRADE 1 – ART – TERM 3
GRADE 1 – MOVEMENT- TERM 3
GRADE 1 – LITERACY ACTIVITIES – TERM 3
GRADE 1 – ENGLISH ACTIVITIES SCHEMES – TERM 3

Kibabii Diploma Teachers Training College Location, Course List, Fees, Requirements, How to Apply

Kibabii Diploma Teachers Training College Location, Course List, Fees, Requirements, How to Apply

PROGRAMMES ON OFFER

# PROGRAMME CODE PROGRAMME NAME INSTITUTION TYPE YEAR 1 – PROGRAMME COST 2022 CUTOFF 2021 CUTOFF Latest CUTOFF
1 1400951 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN KISWAHILI AND CHRISTIAN RELIGIOUS EDUCATION KSH 67,189
2 1400955 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHERS EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS AND GEOGRAPHY KSH 67,189
3 1400C38 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS AND METAL TECHNOLOGY KSH 67,189
4 1400C39 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION KSH 67,189
5 1400C40 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN ENGLISH AND MEDIA TECHNOLOGY KSH 67,189
6 1400C41 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN KISWAHILI AND MEDIA TECHNOLOGY KSH 67,189
7 1400C43 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN BUSINESS STUDIES AND SPORTS SCIENCE KSH 67,189
8 1400C48 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE KSH 67,189
9 1400C49 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS AND BUSINESS STUDIES KSH 67,189
10 1400C69 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION, IRE/KISWAHILI KSH 67,189
11 1400C80 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION, MATHEMATICS/BUSINESS STUDIES KSH 67,189
12 1400D92 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN KISWAHILI AND HISTORY KSH 67,189
13 1400D95 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND MATHEMATICS KSH 67,189
14 1400D96 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND CRE KSH 67,189
15 1400D98 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND BUSINESS STUDIES KSH 67,189
16 1400E18 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS AND SPORTS & RECREATION KSH 67,189
17 1400E19 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN MATHEMATICS AND WELDING & FABRICATION KSH 67,189
18 1400E20 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN ENGLISH AND ISLAMIC RELIGIOUS EDUCATION KSH 67,189
19 1400E21 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN ENGLISH AND MUSIC & DANCE KSH 67,189
20 1400E22 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN ENGLISH AND THEATRE & FILM KSH 67,189
21 1400E24 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN KISWAHILI AND MUSIC & DANCE KSH 67,189
22 1400E25 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN KISWAHILI AND THEATRE & FILM KSH 67,189
23 1400E26 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN HISTORY & CITIZENSHIP AND CHRISTIAN RELIGIOUS EDUCATION KSH 67,189
24 1400E27 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN HISTORY & CITIZENSHIP AND ISLAMIC RELIGIOUS EDUCATION KSH 67,189
25 1400E28 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN HISTORY & CITIZENSHIP AND MUSIC & DANCE KSH 67,189
26 1400E29 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN HISTORY & CITIZENSHIP AND THEATRE & FILM KSH 67,189
27 1400E30 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN HISTORY & CITIZENSHIP AND MEDIA TECHNOLOGY KSH 67,189
28 1400E31 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND ISLAMIC RELIGIOUS EDUCATION KSH 67,189
29 1400E32 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND MUSIC & DANCE KSH 67,189
30 1400E33 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND THEATRE & FILM KSH 67,189
31 1400E34 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND MEDIA TECHNOLOGY KSH 67,189
32 1400E35 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND COMPUTER SCIENCE KSH 67,189
33 1400E36 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND SPORTS & RECREATION KSH 67,189
34 1400E37 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND BUILDING & CONSTRUCTION KSH 67,189
35 1400E38 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND METAL TECHNOLOGY KSH 67,189
36 1400E39 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN GEOGRAPHY AND WELDING & FABRICACATION KSH 67,189
37 1400E40 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN CHRISTIAN RELIGIOUS EDUCATION AND MUSIC & DANCE KSH 67,189
38 1400E41 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN CHRISTIAN RELIGIOUS EDUCATION AND THEATRE & FILM KSH 67,189
39 1400E42 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN CHRISTIAN RELIGIOUS EDUCATION AND MEDIA TECHNOLOGY KSH 67,189
40 1400E43 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN ISLAMIC RELIGIOUS EDUCATION AND MUSIC & DANCE KSH 67,189
41 1400E44 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN ISLAMIC RELIGIOUS EDUCATION AND THEATRE & FILM KSH 67,189
42 1400E45 DIPLOMA IN SECONDARY TEACHER EDUCATION IN ISLAMIC RELIGIOUS EDUCATION AND MEDIA TECHNOLOGY KSH 67,189

PHYSICS SCHEMES OF WORK FORM ONE TERM 1-3

PHYSICS SCHEMES OF WORK

FORM ONE 

TERM I

REFERENCES:

  1. Secondary Physics KLB
  2. Comprehensive Secondary Physics
  3. Principles of Physics
  4. Golden Tips
  5. Teacher’s Book
WK LSN TOPIC SUB-TOPIC OBJECTIVES L/ACTIVITIES L/T AIDS REFERENCE REMARKS
1-4   REPORTING  
5 1-2 Introduction To Physics Physics as a science By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Explain what the study of physics involves

Relate physics to other subjects and to technology

Identify career opportunities related to physics

Discussions of value and meaning of physics

Drawing flow charts of the braches of physics

Listing career opportunities related to physics

Chart on definition of physics

Flow charts on branches of physics

Chart on scientific method

List of career related to physics

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 1-2

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 1-3

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 1-6

 
  3-4 Introduction To Physics Basic laboratory rules By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

State and explain the basic laboratory rules

Discussions

Explanation of rules

Chart on standard laboratory rules

Pictures showing dangers of not observing laboratory rules

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 1-2

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 1-3

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 6-7

 
6 1-2 Measurements Measuring length, area volume and mass By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Define length, area, volume, mass and state their symbols and SI units

Conversions

Measuring

Experiment

Counting

Demonstrations

Meter rule

Burette

Pipette

Measuring cylinder

Weighing balance

Rod

Shadow

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 4-8

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 4-6

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 8,22,14,33

Golden tips physics pages 1-7

Principles of Physics(M.Nelkon) pages 4-9

 
  3-4 Measurements Measuring instruments By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Use measuring instrument accurately

Metre rule, tape measure, beam balance, stop clock, measuring cylinder, pipette and burette

Demonstrations

Reading scales and correcting errors

Meter rule

Pipettes

Burettes

Stop watches

Tape measure

Measuring cylinder, beam balance

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 6-7

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 5-6

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 10,28

Golden tips physics pages 2

Principles of Physics(M.Nelkon) pages 7-9

 
7 1-2 Measurements Measuring density By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Determine and mentally explain the density of substances

Work our density of mixtures

Solve numerical problems involving density

 

Experiment

Working out answers to problems

Measuring cylinder

Mass weighing balance

Density bottle

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 9-12

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 4-6

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 35-48

Golden tips physics pages 7,10

 

 
  3-4 Measurements Measuring Time By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Determine experimentally, the measurement of time

Experiments with pendulum

Timing events

Pendulum

Clock

Watch

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 12-15

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 6

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 46-47

Golden tips physics pages 8

Principles of Physics(M.Nelkon) pages 23

 
8 1-2 Forces Types of forces By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Define force and state its SI units

Describe types of forces

State the effects of force

Discussions

Explaining

Demonstrations

Identifying effects of forces

Charts of force

String

Elastic material

Magnets

Water

Greece

Oil spring balance

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 61-19

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 6-10

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 49-68

Golden tips physics pages 11-12

Principles of Physics(M.Nelkon) pages 64-65

 
  3-4 Forces Surface tension By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Describe experiments to illustrate cohesion, adhesion and surface tension

State the factors affecting surface tension, its consequence and importance

Discussions

Demonstrations

Explaining the effects of surface tensions

Funnel

Water

Wire loop

Tap

Soap/detergent

Comprehensive secondary physicsStudents Book 1 page 19-22

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 6-10

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 63-70

Golden tips physics pages 12

 
9 1-2 Forces Mass and weight By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

State and explain the relationship between mass and weight

Define scalar and vector magnitude

Demonstrations

Discussions

Problems solving on mass and weight

Beam balance

Spring balance

Sponge

Store

Polythene

Comprehensive secondary physics Students Book 1 page 17-22

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 6-10

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 72-75

Golden tips physics pages 7

Principles of Physics(M.Nelkon) pages 40

 
  3-4 Forces Measuring Force By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Measure weight using spring balance

Solve numerical problems on numerical forces

Discussions

Experiments

Spring balance

Chart on vectors and scalars

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 17-18

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 17-15

 

 
10 1-2 Forces Pressure and force By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Define pressure and state its SI units

Determine pressure exerted by solids

Discussions

Demonstrations

Problem solving

Block of wood

Spring balance

Meter rule

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 6-10

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 6-10

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 82-85

Golden tips physics pages 44

Principles of Physics(M.Nelkon) pages 119-121

 
  3-4 Pressure Pressure in liquids By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Investigate experimentally the factors that affect pressure in liquids (Fluids)

Derive the formula for calculating pressure in fluids

State the principle of transmission of pressure in fluids

Demonstrations

Working out problems

Discussions

Experiments

Communication tubes

Tin with holes at different heights

Waters

Comprehensive secondary physics Students Book 1 page 27-30

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 12-15

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 49-68

Golden tips physics pages 44-45

Principles of Physics(M.Nelkom) pages 121-124

 
11 1-2 Pressure Pressure in gases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Explain atmospheric pressure and its effects

State and explain how pressure is transmitted in fluids

Demonstrations

Explanation of pressure transmission in fluids

discussions

Water/oil

Syringe

Comprehensive secondary physics Students Book 1 page 25-26,30-32

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 12-15

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 115-116,93-100

Golden tips physics pages 45-46

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 124

 
  3-4 Pressure Ganges and siphons By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Describe the working of siphon and pressure gauge

Discussions

Explanations

Questions and answers

Barometer

Bourdon gauge

Syringes

Comprehensive secondary physics Students Book 1 page 31-34

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 13-15

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 113,117

Golden tips physics pages 44-45

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 133

 
12 1-2 Pressure Application of pressure in liquids and gases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Explain the working of a hydraulic, braking system of vehicle

Explain the working of mercury and forties barometer, bicycle pump and pressure gauges

Explaining the application of pressure in liquids and gases

Class discussion on the principles of pressure in liquids

Experiments

Chart showing the working of a hydraulic braking system

Model of hydraulic brake system

Barometer

Bicycle pump

Comprehensive secondary physics Students Book 1 page 30-39

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 13-15

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 96-112

Golden tips physics pages 46-47

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 124-132

 
  3-4 Pressure Revision on question on the topic pressure By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Answer questions on pressure

Questions and answers Questions in students book 1 Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 39-41

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 13-15

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 119-123

Golden tips physics pages 54-55

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 138-140

 
13   TOPICAL REVISION  
14   END OF TERM EXAMS  
15   REPORTS MAKING AND CLOSURE  

 

 

 

 

PHYSICS SCHEMES OF WORK

FORM ONE 2012

TERM II

 

 

 

 

 

REFERENCES:

  1. Secondary Physics KLB
  2. Comprehensive Secondary Physics
  3. Principles of Physics
  4. Golden Tips
  5. Teacher’s Book

 

 

WK LSN TOPIC SUB-TOPIC OBJECTIVES L/ACTIVITIES L/T AIDS REFERENCE REMARKS
1 1-4 REPORTING AND REVISION OF LAST TERM’S EXAMS  
2 1-2 Particulate Nature Of Matter States of matter By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able

to show that matter is made of up tiny particles

 

 

Demonstration

Discussions of kinetic theory

Beaker

Crystals

Solutes

Solvent

Comprehensive secondary physics Students Book 1 page 42

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 15-18

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 124-128

Golden tips physics pages 68

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 142

 
  3-4 Particulate Nature Of Matter The Brownian motion By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Give evidence that matter is made up of tiny particles

Demonstrate the Brownian motion in liquids & gases

Explain the arrangement of particles in matter

Explain the state on matter in terms of particle movement

Experiments

Observations

Discussions

Chalk dust

Transparent lid

Pollen grains

Lens

Beaker

Smoke cell

Source of light

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 43-48

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 15-18

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 127-130

Golden tips physics pages 68

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 148-150

 
3 1-2 Particulate Nature Of Matter

 

 

Diffusion in liquid, gases and solids By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Explain diffusion in gases/liquids and solids

Experiments

Discussions

Promise gas

Jars

Potassium permanganate

Solvent

Hydrochloric acid

Ammonia

Glass tube cotton wool

Comprehensive secondary physics Students Book 1 page 46-49

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 15-18

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 132-136

Golden tips physics pages 69

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 146-147

 
  3-4 Particulate Nature Of Matter

 

 

Revision on Particulate nature of matter By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Answer  questions in students Book 1

Discussion

Demonstrations

Asking questions

Answering questions

  Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 136-138

Golden tips physics pages 69-70

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 164

Past Papers

 
 

 

1-2 Thermal Expansion Expansion of solids By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Define temperature

Describe the functionally of various thermometers

Explain the expansion and contraction in solids

Explain forces due to expansion and contraction

Experiments

Demonstration

Experiments

 

Meter rule

Metal rods

Materials that conduct or do not conduct heat

Ball and ring apparatus

Bar gauge

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 50-52

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 18-21

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 139-144

Golden tips physics pages 70-72

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 168,175-176

 
  3-4 Thermal Expansion

 

 

 

Applications of expansion in solids By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Explain the application of expansion and contraction

 

Demonstrations

Discussions

Experiments

 

Charts on the application of expansion

Rivets

Bimetallic strips

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 52-54

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 18-21

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 145,151-153

Golden tips physics pages 73

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 177-179

 
4 1-2 Thermal Expansion

 

 

 

Expansion and contraction of liquid and gases By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Explain the expansion of liquid

Describe the anomalous expansion of water and its effect

 

Discussions

Experiments

Demonstrations

Water

Spirit

Alcohol

thermometer

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 54-56

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 18-21

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 149-155

Golden tips physics pages 72-73

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 182

 
  3-4 Thermal Expansion

 

 

Thermometers By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Explain the functioning of various thermometers

Describe the functioning of various thermometers

Demonstrations

Discussions

 

Liquid in glass thermometers

Clinical thermometers

Maximum and minimum thermometers

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 56-59

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 18-21

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 155-161

Golden tips physics pages 70-72

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 168-173

 
5 1-2 Thermal Expansion Molecules and heat By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Explain the effect of heat on the molecules of solid, liquid and gases

Discussions

Experiments

Demonstrations

 

 

Solids

Liquids

Air

Source of heat

Containers

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 60-61

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 18-21

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 139-162

 
  3-4 Thermal Expansion Revision on thermal expansion By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Answer questions involving thermal expansions

Questions

answers

Set questions Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 61-62

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 21

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 161-162

Golden tips physics pages 85-86

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 185

 
6 1-2 Heat Transfer Heat and temperature By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

define heat

State the difference between heat and temperature

Definitions

Discussions

Experiments

Materials that conduct heat and materials that do not conduct heat Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 63

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 22-24

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 163

Golden tips physics pages 774

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 168

 
  3-4 Heat Transfer Conduction of heat By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

State and explain modes of heat transfer

Explain factors affecting conduction

 

 

Metal rods

Source of heat

Test tube

Water

Ice in gauge

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 63-67

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 22-24

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 163-186

Golden tips physics pages 74-77

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 234-242

 
7 1-2 Heat Transfer Convection By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Demonstrate convection in liquids

Explain the working of hot water systems, car engine, cooling system and land sea breeze

Explain the molecular application of convection in fluids

Experiments

Discussion

Water

Potassium permanganate

Source of heat

Smoke cell apparatus

Chart on hot water system

Car engine

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 67-69

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 23

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 177-188

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 238-2433

 
  3-4 Heat Transfer Radiation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Compare absorption and emission of radiant heat

Explain the working of solar concentrators, heat taps and solar heaters

Explain the working of a thermos flask

 

 

Experiments

Making comparisons

Discussions

Explanations

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 70-74

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 18-24

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 187-195

Golden tips physics pages 75

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 246

 
8 1-2   REVISION By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Answer questions on heat transfer

Questions

Answers

Set questions    
  3-4 Recti-Linear Propagation And Reflection Of Light On Plane Surfaces Propagation of light By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Define opaque, translucent and transparent objects

Describe the types of beams

Perform and describe experiments to show rectilinear propagation of light

Discussions

Experiments

Descriptions

Explanations

Opaque objects

Glass

Greased paper

Card board

Source of light

Screens

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 76-77

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 25-27

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 199-204

Golden tips physics pages 75

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 251-252

 
9 1-2 Recti-Linear Propagation And Reflection Of Light On Plane Surfaces The pin-hole camera By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Explain the functions and principles involved in working of a pin-hole camera

Experiments

Drawing

Discussion

Pin hole camera

Source of light (candle)

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 77

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 25-27

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 211-219

Golden tips physics pages 99

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 252-255

 
  3-4 Recti-Linear Propagation And Reflection Of Light On Plane Surfaces

 

Shadows By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Describe the formation of shadows

Describe the solar and linear eclipses

Experiments

Discussions

Demonstrations

Explanations

Descriptions

Opaque objects

Chart of the eclipse of earth and moon

Source of light

Screen

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 78-79

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 25-27

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 203-219

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 254-257

 
10 1-2 Recti-Linear Propagation And Reflection Of Light On Plane Surfaces

 

 

Reflection of light on plane surfaces By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Verify experimentally the law of reflection

Experiments

Descriptions

Explanations

Discussions

Plane mirrors

Pins

White sheets of paper

Soft boards

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 80-82

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 25-27

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 222-228

Golden tips physics pages 100

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 260

 
  3-4 Recti-Linear Propagation And Reflection Of Light On Plane Surfaces

 

 

Image formation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

© Education Plus Agencies

Locate images in place mirrors and state their characteristics

Experiments

Descriptions

Discussions

Pins

Boards

Protractor

Mirror

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 83-84

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 25-27

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 228-230

Golden tips physics pages 100-101

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 264

 
11 1-2 Recti-Linear Propagation And Reflection Of Light On Plane Surfaces

 

 

The application of plane mirrors By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Explain the reflection of light on plane surfaces at an angle

Explain the working of a periscope and kaleidoscope

Experiments

Explanations

Descriptions

Discussions

Plane mirrors

Objects such as candles

Pipe

Card board

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 84-86

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 25-27

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 235-240

Golden tips physics pages 101

 

 
  3-4 Recti-Linear Propagation And Reflection Of Light On Plane Surfaces

 

 

 

Revision By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

solve problems involving the propagation and reflection of light on plane surfaces

 

Problem solving

Questions and answers

Discussion

Set questions Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 87-88

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 28-29

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 241-244

Golden tips physics pages 101-102

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 266-267

 
12 TOPICAL REVISION
13 END OF TERM EXAMINATIONS
14 REPORTS MAKING AND CLOSURE

 

 

 

 

PHYSICS SCHEMES OF WORK

FORM ONE 2012

TERM III

 

 

 

 

 

REFERENCES:

  1. Secondary Physics KLB
  2. Comprehensive Secondary Physics
  3. Principles of Physics
  4. Golden Tips
  5. Teacher’s Book

 

 

 

WK LSN TOPIC SUB-TOPIC OBJECTIVES L/ACTIVITIES L/T AIDS REFERENCE REMARKS
1 1-4 REPORTING AND REVISION OF LAST TERM’S EXAMS  
 

2

 

1-2

 

Electrostatics

 

Charging materials by induction and contact

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Explain the charging of materials by induction and contact

Describe origin of charge

State the law of charges

 

Demonstrations

Discussions

Experiments

 

Polythene bags

Thrust

Glass rod

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 89

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 29-32

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 245-250

Golden tips physics pages 133-134

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 264

 
   

3-4

 

Electrostatics

 

Laws of charge

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to:

Describe the electrostatic charge

Explain the electrostatic charge

State types of charge

 

Experiments

Discussion

Observations

 

Rubber

Piece of paper

Glass

Amber

Silk material

Fur

Electroscope

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 89-91

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 29-32

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 245-248

Golden tips physics pages 133

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 509-510

 
 

3

 

1-2

 

Electrostatics

 

The leaf electroscope

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

State the unit of charges and construct leaf electroscope

 

 

Discussions

Constructing an electroscope

Experiment

 

Leaf electroscope

Glass rod

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 91-92

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 29-32

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 251-252

Golden tips physics pages 133

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 511

 
   

3-4

 

Electrostatics

 

Charging an electroscope by contract

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

charge an electroscope by contact

 

 

Demonstration

Discussions

Experiments

 

Electroscope

Glass rod

Ebonite rod

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 94-96

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 29-32

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 249-250

Golden tips physics pages 134

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 512

 
 

4

 

1-2

 

Electrostatics

 

Charging an electroscope by induction

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

charge an electroscope by induction

 

 

Demonstrations

Discussions

Experiments

 

Electroscope

Glass rod

Ebonite rod

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 94-96

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 29-32

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 248-249

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 513-515

 
   

3-4

 

Electrostatics

 

 

Charging an electroscope by separation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

charge an electroscope by separation

 

 

Discussions

Experiments

Descriptions

 

Rods of conductors and no-conductors

Electroscope

Tiles

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 96-97

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 29-32

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 250-251

 
 

5

 

1-2

 

Electrostatics

 

Charging an electroscope by EHT source

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Charge electroscope by an EHT source

 

Descriptions

Experiments

Discussions

 

Rods of conductors and non-conductors

Electroscope

Tiles

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 97

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 29-32

 
   

3-4

 

Electrostatics

 

Revision

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

answer questions on electrostatics

 

 

Questions and answers

 

Chalkboard

Text books

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 259-260

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 527-530

Golden tips physics pages 138-139

 
 

6

 

1-2

 

Cells And Simple Circuits

 

Sources of continuous current

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

state sources of continuous current

 

 

Experiments

Discussions

Demonstration

 

Cells

Acids

Fruits

Solar panels

Petroleum products

 

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 99-100

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 261-265

Golden tips physics pages 140

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 408-409

 
   

3-4

 

Cells And Simple Circuits

 

Connecting an electric circuit

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Draw and set up a simple electric circuit

Identify circuit symbols

 

Identifying circuit symbols

Discussions

Demonstrations

Experiments

 

 

Cells

Wires

Bulbs

Charts on circuit symbols

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 99-101

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 266-273

Golden tips physics pages 140

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 408-409

 
 

7

 

1-2

 

Cells And Simple Circuit

 

Connecting and electric circuit

 

By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to

Define electric current

Explain the working of a cell

Connect cells in series and parallel

Measure the effective e.m.f

 

Measuring

Demonstrations

Discussions

Experiments

 

Cells

Connecting wires

Bulbs

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 100-101

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 241-273

Golden tips physics pages 140-143

 
   

3-4

 

Cells And Simple Circuits

 

The measuring of E.M.F

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to measure e.m.f

 

Experiments

Discussions

Measuring

Demonstrations

 

Ammeter

Voltmeter

Switch

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 101-102

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 264

Golden tips physics pages 143

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 409

 
 

8

 

1-2

 

Cells And Simple Circuit

 

Conductivity of materials

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Investigate the electrical conductivity of materials

 

Calculating

Testing

Conductivity

Experiments

 

Conductors

Non-conductors

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 101-103

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 273-275

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages

 
   

3-4

 

Cells And Simple Circuits

 

Measuring current in a circuit

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to measure current in a circuit

 

Measuring

Experiments

Calculating

 

Voltmeter

Ammeter

Switch

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 101-103

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 266-269

Golden tips physics pages 142

 
 

9

 

1-2

 

Cells And Simple Circuits

 

Primary cells

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Describe the working of  primary cells

Explain the defect s of primary cells

Explain how to care for a primary cell

 

Discussions

Experiments

Explaining the defects of primary cells

 

Primary cells

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 104-106

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 276-280

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 409-414

 
   

3-4

 

Cells And Simple Circuits

 

Measuring e.m.f in a primary cell

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Measure e.m.f in a primary

 

Experiments

Discussions

Demonstrations

Measuring

 

Primary cells

Voltmeter

Switch

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 106

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 276-280

Principles of Physics(M.Nelko) pages 409-414

 
 

10

 

1-2

 

Cells And Simple Circuits

 

Secondary cells

 

By the end of the the lesson the learner should be able to:

Charge a secondary cell

Discharge a secondary cell

Take care of a secondary cell

 

Explanation on charging and maintenance of simple cells

 

Secondary cells

Comprehensive secondary physics

Students Book 1 page 106-109

Teacher’s Book 1 pages 34-37

Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 280-284

Golden tips physics pages 140

 
   

3-4

 

Revision

   

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to

Answer questions on cells

Answer questions on circuits

 

Discussions

Demonstrations

Asking questions

Answering questions

  Secondary Physics students Book 1 (KLB) pages 287-288

Golden tips physics pages 150-151

Principles of Physics(M.Nelkon) pages 422-423

 
11   END OF TERM EXAMS  
12   REPORTS MAKING AND CLOSURE  

 

Business Studies Best Form Three Notes Free

 

  1. DEMAND AND SUPPLY

Meaning of demand

Demand is the quantity of a product that buyers are willing and able to buy at a given price over a given period of time.

 

Factors that determine the demand for a product (determinants of demand)

  1. The price of a product:  if the price is low, more will be demanded, if high less will be demanded.
  2. The buyer’s income: the higher the people’s income the higher the demand for gods and services and vice versa.
  3. Government policy: if the government imposes high taxes on a commodity, it becomes expensive and less of it is demanded. The effects of a subsidy are to lower the price of the product leading to an increase in its demand. The government may also influence the demand of a product by enacting laws that either limits or promotes the consumption of a product.
  4. The population: with many people available more of the goods are demanded and if the people are few, less is bought from the market.
  5. Tastes, fashions and preferences:  if people have a preference for a product they will demand more of it. If their preferences changes to another product, they will reduce the demand of the product they were using before.
  6. The distribution of incomes: where income is well distributed, the demand for goods and services is high as opposed to when the income in the hands of a few people.
  7.  Future expectations of price changes: if the prices are expected to go up in the future, more goods will be demanded in the present and if the price is expected to go down in the future, fewer goods will be demanded in the present.
  8. The weather: certain goods are demanded more during certain weather conditions e.g heavy clothes during cold seasons or umbrellas during rainy seasons.
  9. Price of related products: for goods that are compliments of one another, e.g pen and ink, a fall in the price of one leads to an increase in the demand of the other. In the case of the goods that are substitutes of one another, e.g soda and fruit juice, an increase in the price of one leads to an increase in the demand of the other.
  10. The terms of sale: the better the terms of sale, for example, provision of credit or better discounts, the higher the demand for a given product.

 

Types of demand

 

Derived demand:  a product is said to have derived demand when it is demanded to help in the production of other goods and services for example the demand of building materials arising from the demand of houses.

Joint demand: items are said to have joint demand if the use of one will require the use of another. The goods are complimentarily used together like pen and ink.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Demand schedule and demand curve

Demand schedule

A demand schedule is a table showing the quantities of a commodity that consumers are willing and able to buy at different prices within a given period of time. A demand schedule can be prepared for an individual or for the entire market.

 

Demand curve

A demand curve is the graph showing the quantities demanded against the prices. On the y-axis is recorded price and the x-axis the quantities demanded.

 

Draw a demand curve given the following demand schedule

 

Price of the product in shs Quantity of the goods demanded in kg
10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

40

35

30

25

20

15

10

5

 

 

The graph shows that the demand curve (DD) slopes from the left to the right, indicating that as prices goes down the quantity demanded increases and vice versa.

This tendency of demand to increase as price decrease and to reduce as the price increase is referred to as the law of demand. Therefore a normal demand curve slopes from left to right.

 

 

 

 

Movement along a demand curve and a shift in demand curve

 

Movement along the demand curve

A movement along a demand curve refers to changes in quantity of a product demanded as a result of change in its price only. As the price of the product increases the quantity demanded decreases. It leads to a movement from one point to another on the same demand curve as shown below:

  • (ii)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • In a movement along the demand curve no new demand curve is created. If price increase from P0 to P1 in the diagram above quantity demanded will fall from Q1 to Q2e. movement from a to b.
  • If price fall from P2 to P3, the quantity demanded increase from Q2 to Q3e. movement from a to c.

 

  Shift of the demand curve

 

This is when the demand curve moves either to the right or left. It occurs as results of changes in factors influencing demand other than price of the product concerned. This can be illustrated as below:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In (i) at price OP the quantity demanded is OQ. After the demand curve shift from D0D0 to DD a different quantity OQ1 is demanded although the price remains at OP. thus points L and M are on different demand curves.

 

Similarly when the demand curve shifts from D1D1 to D2D2 as in (ii) a different quantity OQ3 is demand at the same price OP2 as before. Thus the two points R and S are on two different demand curves.

A shift of demand curve to the left (decrease in demand) can be brought about by the following factors:

 

  • A decrease in people’s incomes.
  • A decrease in the price of a substitute product.
  • Lower population in the area.
  • Negative changes in tastes, fashions and preferences towards the product.
  • The introduction of a new but cheaper substitute.
  • Deterioration in the terms of sale e.g. lower discounts

 

A shift of demand curve to the right (increase in demand) can be as a result of:

  • An increase in the people’s incomes.
  • An increase in the price of a substitute product.
  • An increase in population.
  • An improvement in terms of sale e.g. where better discount are given
  • A decrease in the price of a complementary product.
  • An improvement in tastes, preferences towards particular product.

 

Differences between a movement along a demand curve and a shift of a demand curve

 

Movement along a demand curve Shift of a demand curve
(i)             It involves only one demand curve It involves two demand curves
(ii)           It is brought about by changes in the quantity demanded. Brought about a change in other factors that influences demand other the price of the product.
(iii)         It involves a change in the quantity demanded. Involves a change in demand.
(iv)         A different quantity is demanded only at a different price. A different quantity is demanded at the same price as before.
(v)           A movement along the curve can be traced up and down along the same curve. A shift causes to move either to the right or left.

 

SUPPLY

Supply is defined as the quantity that suppliers are willing and are able to take to market at a given price over a given period of time.

 

Factors which influence supply of a product

  • The price of the product: the higher the price, the higher the supply while the lower the price, the lower the supply.
  • The cost of production: an increase in the cost of production leads to a reduction in the supply of goods, while a decrease in the cost of production leads to an increase in the supply of goods.
  • The level technology: an improvement in the level of technology leads to a reduction in cost of production in an increase in supply.
  • The government policy; this includes the imposition of taxes, subsidies, quotas and price controls. Taxes increase the cost of production hence supply will decrease. A subsidy lowers the cost of production leading to an increase in the supply. Imposition of quotas places an upper limit on the quantity that may be supplied irrespective of the price. Where the government sets prices, firms will react accordingly. If the price set is high, the supply will be high, if the price set is low, the supply will also be low.
  • Available of inputs: shortage of raw materials leads to low production, hence low supply.
  • Future expectations of price changes: where producers expect the price of goods to increase in the future, they may decide to restrict supply, until that when the prices go up.
  • Natural factors: bad weather like droughts and floods leads to poor harvests, hence low supply of agricultural products. Favorable weather conditions leads to more harvests hence more supply.

 

Supply schedule and supply curve

 

A supply schedule is a table showing the relationship between supply of a commodity and its price. It shows the quantity supplied at various prices. The supply curve is a graphical illustration showing the trend taken by supply as price either increases or decrease.

Draw a supply curve using the figures given in the supply curve below.

 

Price of x 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Supply of x 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The supply curve (SS) slopes from the right to the left showing that as the price increases, the supply also increase. For example, at a price Shs. 8, the supply is 20 units. As the price goes up to Shs. 16, the supply also goes up to 40 units.

 

Movement along the supply curve

This is said to be a movement along a supply curve when the quantity supplied of a commodity changes as a result of a change in its price “all other factors remaining constant”. It leads to a movement from one point to another on the same supply curve as shown below:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In (i) when price changes from OP0 to OP1 the movement is downwards from point X to point Y on the same supply curve S0S0. This leads to the supply of OQ1 instead of OQ0.

In (ii) when the price changes from OP2 to OP3 the movement is upwards from T to point Z on the same supply curve. The quantity supplied changes from OQ2 to OQ3.

 

Shift of a Supply curve

A shift of the supply curve is when the entire curve moves either to the left or right as a result of changes in factors influencing supply other than the price of the commodity involved.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

In (iii) the whole supply curves S2S2 shifts to S3S3 resulting in the reduction of quantity supplied from OQ3 to OQ4 at the same price OP3 as before. Instead a point on curve S2S2

 

 

 

EQUILIBRIUM PRICE AND EQUILIBRIUM QUANTITY

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. SIZE AND LOCATION OF A FIRM
  1. Meaning of firm and industry

A firm is an individual enterprise or business unit under one control an ownership e.g. a business unit carrying the production of a good or service such as production of soap or a legal service firm.

A firm is a single business unit or enterprise under one ownership, management and control e.g. KCC, Brookside etc.

An industry consists of all those firms producing the same type of products in the same line of production. A sop industry consists of all those firms producing soap while an insurance industry consists of all these firms providing insurance services.

An industry refers to a group of firms producing the same products for a given market e.g. the milk industry which includes firms such KCC and Brookside. In some cases where we have a single firm, the firm becomes the industry.

  1. Factors which influence the decision on what goods and services to produce.
  • Profitability

Businesses tend to provide goods and services that would yield maximum profit.

  • Level of competition

In order to survive in a competitive market, firms must come up with products with products that consumers prefer. A firm may therefore develop products that are not currently available or copy rivals ideals and improve on them.

  • Cost of production

A firm would produce commodities for which production costs are low.

  • Demand/ market

A firm will produce commodities that have the highest demand since demand leads to high sales volume.

  • Availability of resources

A firm can only produce commodities for which the necessary resources are available. Such resources include raw materials, labor, equipment, adequate space and appropriate technology.

  • Government policy

A firm should produce goods which are favored by the government policy e.g. low taxation and subsidies. Firms should not produce goods that are illegal as it will be breaking the law.

  1. Determining the size of the firm

The following are some of the ways/factors which the size of a firm may be determined:

  • Level of output/volume of output

A firm’s size may be judged by the level of output. A large firm will produce on large scale, while a small firm will produce on small scale.

  • Number of employs in the firm

A small firm is likely to employ only a few employees, while a large firm will most often employ many workers.

  • Floor area covered by the premises

A firm with large floor area covered by premises may be said to be large.

  • Size of the market controlled by the firm

Large firms control large proportions of the total market of a particular product. Small firms may only control a small size of the market.

  • Capital invested

The larger the capital of the firm in terms of assets the larger the firm and vice versa.

  • Methods of production adopted

A large firm will most often adopt capital intensive methods of technology, where operations will be highly mechanized while small firms use more labour then machinery.

  • Sales of volume

Small firms have low levels of sales with a given period while large firms have huge levels of sales.

  1. Location of the firm

Location is the site or place from which the business operations/firms would be established. The management has to make appropriate decisions concerning the location of the firm since a good location would lead to success while a bad location would lead to failure of the business enterprise.

 

Factors that influence the location of a firm

  1. Raw materials

The availability of raw materials is one of the factors that determine the locations of a firm. Firms should be located near the source of raw material when:

  1. The raw materials are heavy and bulky so as to avoid high transport as cost to the firm.
  2. The raw materials are perishable so as to ensure they get the firm in fresh.
  • The competition for the raw materials is high should be located near their source so as to ensure that it gets all the raw materials it requires at all times.

          Advantages of locating a firm near the source of raw materials

  1. Transport cost of raw materials in minimized
  2. Storage cost of raw materials will be minimized.
  • It is easier for the firm to select the quality of raw materials required.
  1. Easier to get fresh raw materials and undamaged raw materials.
  2. Production process can run uninterrupted because of constant supply of raw materials thus continuous production.
  3. Labour (human resources)

Labour is a basic factor of production. It can be skilled, unskilled or semi-skilled labour. It is important for firms ton be located in an area where there is large supply of labour so as to ensure adequate supply of this important factor. Location of the firms near the source of labour reduces the cost of transporting labour force to factories and also reduces time wasting in transporting labour from far.

  1. The market

Reasons for locating near market

  1. If the finished product is perishable, then the firm should be located near the market so as to ensure that it gets to the market in fresh state.
  2. If the finished product is bulky, the firm should be located near the market so as to avoid high cost of transport to the market.
  • If the final product is fragile, the firm should be located near the market so as to avoid losses that may result from breakages as the product is transported to the market.
  1. If there is high completion, the firm should be located near the market as this will make it easy to get to the customers fast.
  2. Where a product is made as per customers’ specification, the firm should be located near the market.
  3. Transport and communication

A firm should be located in an area that is well served by means of transport. This ensures that both raw materials and finished products can be transported with ease.

A firm should be located in an area that is well served by means of communication. This ensures that the firm is able to communicate with its customers and suppliers, and vice versa.

Poor developed transport and communication facilities may lead to:

  1. High transport cost especially where raw material or the finished products are bulky.
  2. Delays in receiving the raw materials and distributing the finished products.
  • Where communication network is poor, business people will not able to give or get information in time.
  1. Availability of power

Industries require electric power to operate. They should, therefore be located where electricity is readily available.

  1. Security

Industries should be located in areas with adequate security .

  1. Auxiliary services

Firms should be located where auxiliary services such as insurance, banking and warehousing are available.

  1. Water

Many firms require water in one or more processes. Such firms should be located in an area where water is readily available.

  1. Government policy

The government may formulate policies that may have implications on the location of the firms, especially with regard to physical planning. Such planning may be aimed at checking rural-urban migration, environmental degradation or for strategic concerns.

The government may therefore encourage the development of firms in some areas by offering concessions to industrialists such as:

  1. Offering free land
  2. Reduction on taxes
  • Offering subsidies
  1. Improvement of infrastructure
  2. Offering direct financial assistance

 

LOCALISATION AND DELOCALISATION

Localization of firms is a situation where many firm are concentrated in a particular area.

Delocalization of firms describes a situation where location of firms is spread in different regions to minimize the problems of localization.

Advantages of localization

  1. Firms will benefit from already from established skilled labour pool from which they can recruit their employees.
  2. Firms will benefit from already established infrastructure such as transportation and communication.
  • Firms will benefit from auxiliary services firms that may already have been established.
  1. Such areas have social amenities such as hospitals and schools.
  2. Employment is created in such areas.
  3. Joint management of wastes can be carried out by all firms.
  • Firms may benefit from already established markets.
  • Firms may be able to get raw materials easily, as they may use the by-products produced by other industries as their raw materials.

Disadvantages of localization

  1. As many people move to such areas in search of jobs, slums may be created.
  2. Land becomes very expensive in such areas.
  • Congestion and traffic jams are a common problem in such areas.
  1. In case of war such areas can become a target of attacks.
  2. Leads to rural-urban migration leaving the old and the young in the rural areas.
  3. A lot of environmental degradation through pollution by many cars, deforestation, discharges of waste and mining in the area.
  • Social problems such as crime, prostitution and illegal drugs are a common problem in such areas.

Advantages of delocalization

  1. It ensures that all areas are developed.
  2. To ensure that employment opportunities are evenly distributed all over the country.
  • It reduces rural-urban migration since people can get jobs in the rural areas once industries are delocalized.
  1. It promotes the development of infrastructure all over the country.
  2. It leads to the establishment of auxiliary services e.g. banks and insurance firms, in rural areas for the benefit of the residents.
  3. It enhances the development of social amenities such as schools and hospitals in all areas of the country.
  • It lessens losses in case of attack by enemies during war.
  • People in rural areas are provided with goods and services closer to where they are.

Disadvantages of delocalization 

  1. Pollution is spread to the rural areas.
  2. The security in such areas may not be guaranteed.
  • It might be expensive to hire and attract appropriate labour.
  1. Auxiliary services such as banks and postal services may be lacking in such areas.
  2. Incentives offered by the government to industries in order to delocalize add to public expenditure, which is an added burden to tax payers.
  3. Industries may not enjoy the benefits that accrue from concentration of industries e.g. developed infrastructure.

 

 

 

Ways in which the government may motivate industries to delocalize

  1. By giving entrepreneurs free of cheap land to construct their factories.
  2. By giving tax incentives to those who locate their industries in the delocalized area.
  • By giving cheap loans to entrepreneurs wishing to establish industries in areas with few industries.
  1. By providing security in the new industrial areas.
  2. By providing subsidies to those industrialists who are willing to delocalize.
  3. By providing the appropriate infrastructure in the area.
  • By providing social amenities e.g. schools and hospitals in areas where the delocalized industries are to be established.
  • By offering financial assistance to the delocalized industries.

ECONOMIES OF SCALE

Economies of scale are the benefits the firm or industry derives from expanding its scale of production/the advantages of operating on large scale.

There are two types of economies of scale;

  1. Internal economies of scale
  2. External economies of scale

Internal economies of scale

These are advantages that accrue to a single firm as its production increases, independent of what happens in the other firms in the industry.

Internal economies of scale result from an increase in the level of output and cannot be realized unless output increases.

The internal economies of scale may be achieved by a single plant of the firm or they may arise from an increase in the number of plants.

The internal economies of scale include;

  1. Marketing economies (Buying and selling economies)

These are the benefits which a firm derives from large purchases of inputs or factors of production due to the discounts offered in the process e.g. trade and quantity discounts

The firms may also incur less cost per unit in transportation of the goods bought

Selling economies of scale arise from the distribution and sale of the finished product as the scale of production increases, i.e it is likely to incur less cost per unit in areas such as advertising, distribution e.t.c

  1. Financial economies; As a firm grows, its assets also increase. These assets can be used as security to borrow money/loan from financial institutions at low interest rates.

Large firms can also raise more funds through selling and buying of shares and debentures.

  • Risk bearing economies; Large firms can reduce risks involved in the market failure through diversification of products or markets.

Diversification of markets or products can be done so that;

  1. Failure of one product is offset by the success of other products
  2. A failure of a product in one part of the market may be offset by the success of the same product in another part of the market

-Large scale firms are also able to obtain supplies from alternative sources so that failure in one does not significantly affect the activities of the firm.

  1. iv) Managerial economies/staff economies

Large firms are able to hire/employ specialized staff and management. This increases the firms efficiency and productivity i.e.

  1. The staff is able to make viable decisions that can go along way in increasing the firms output.
  2. The firm/management is also able to put in place better organizational structures which allow for departmentalization and subsequent division of labour.Division of labour leads to specialization and hence the overall increase in the firms output.

-the costs of hiring/employing the specialized staff/management are spread over a large number of units of output of variable cost of production.Thus,the cost of labour is minimized when production increases leading to increased profits.

  1. v) Technical economies;

These are benefits that accrue to a firm from the use of specialized labour and machinery. Large firms have access to large capital which they utilize to obtain those machines and hire the specialized labour.The machines use the latest technology and are put to full use, making the firm production more efficient i.e. cost of the machines and labour are spread over many units of output hence less costly but giving higher profits.

 

  1. vi) Research economies;

Large firms can afford to carry out research into better methods of production and marketing.(Research is necessary because of the increased competition in the business world today) This improves the quality of the products and increases the sales and profits made by the firm.

  1. Staff welfare economies;

Large firms can easily provide social amenities to their employees including recreations, housing, education, canteens and wide range of allowances. These amenities work as incentives to boost the morale of the employees to work harder and increase the quality and quantity of output. This leads to higher sales and profits.

  1. Inventory economies

A large sized firm can establish warehouses to stock raw materials and therefore enjoy large stocks of raw materials for use when the raw materials are in short supply.Thus, the firm can avoid production stoppages that can be occasioned by shortages of the raw materials. The suppliers of such material may be sold at a higher price to realize profit.

External economies of scale;

External economies of scale are those benefits which accrue to a firm as a result of growth of the whole industry. They are realized by a firm due to its location near other firms. They include;

  1. Easier access to labour; Where many firms are located in one area a pool of labour of various skills is usually available. Therefore firms relocating to the area find it easy to obtain.
  2. Improved/efficient infrastructure; Usually where many firms are located, infrastructure would be highly developed e.g. roads, power, water and communication facilities. Firms relocating in that area thus enjoy the services of infrastructure already in place.
  3. Firms may be able to dispose off their waste product easily
  4. Ready market may be available from the surrounding firms
  5. Readily available services such as banking, insurance and medical care
  6. Adequate supply of power due to large volume of consumption e.t.c

 

 

Diseconomies of scale

A firm cannot continue to expand indefinitely or without a limit.As a firm grows or industry expands, the benefits the firm can reap or get from such growth or expansion have a limit.

Any further expansion in the scale of production beyond the limit will actually create negative which would increase the cost of production.

The negative effects to a firm due to its size or scale of production are referred to as diseconomies of scale.

Diseconomies of scale are therefore the problems a firm experiences due to expansion.

Sources of diseconomies of scale

Diseconomies of scale may arise from;

  1. Managerial functions which become increasingly difficult to perform as the firm expands. Communication and consultations take more time than before.
  2. Changing consumer tastes which may not be fulfilled immediately because decision-making may take too long.
  3. Increase in the costs of transporting raw materials, components and finished products.
  4. Labour unrest or disputes and lack of commitment from the employees because they are not involved in decision making
  5. Stoppage of production process when disputes arise since all production stages are interdependent and labour specialized.
  6. Lack of adequate finances for further expansion of the firm.

There are two forms of diseconomies of scale fiz internal diseconomies and external diseconomies of scale.

 

Internal diseconomies of scale

These are the problems a firm experiences as a result of large scale production due to its persistant growth. They include;

  1. Managerial diseconomies of scale

These are the losses which may arise due to the failure of management to supervise and control the operations properly. This may be because the firm is large resulting into;

  1. Difficulties in controlling and coordinating the departments leading to laxity among employees.
  2. Difficult in decision making and communication and co-ordination between management and workers. Delays in decision making means lost opportunities.
  3. Impersonal relationship between management and workers, and staff problems not easily established which could lead to low morale, disputes, unrests/skills.
  4. An increase in management tasks leading to increase in number and impact of risks i.e. any error in judgement on the part of management may lead to big losses.

 

  1. Marketing diseconomies of scale

These are losses which may arise due to changes in consumer tastes. These may be as a result of;

  1. A change in tastes leading to fall in demand for the firms products. A large firm may find it difficult to immediately adjust to the changes in the tastes of consumers, hence it will experience fall in its scale.
  2. An increase in the scale of production, which leads to higher demand for factor of production such as labour, raw materials and capital. This will result into higher prices for them. This will push up the prices of the goods and services produced, which will cause a fall in sales.

 

  • High overhead costs

When the output of a firm increases beyond a certain limit, some factors may set in to increase the average costs.e.g the overhead costs incurred in production and marketing activities may increase. This is because firms may intensify their promotional campaign, incur heavy transport expenses and be forced to offer generous discounts in an effort to attract more clients. All these are factors that may increase overheads without any corresponding increase in real benefits to the firm.

  1. Financial diseconomies of scale

These are losses which may arise due to a firm’s inability to acquire adequate finances for its expansion. This will prevent the firm from expanding further thereby limiting its capacity to increase the volume of its output.

External diseconomies of scale

These are demerits that affirm experiences as a result of growth of the entire industry. These include;

-scramble for raw materials

-inavailability of land for expansion

-scramble for available labour

-competition for available market

-easy targets especially in times of war.

Existence of small firms in an economy

As the firm grows in size, its scale of production increases.However, many firms remain small even though they face stiff competition from larger firms. Some of the reasons for existence of small scale firms include;

  1. Size of the market

Large scale production can only be sustained by a high demand for a product. If the demand for a product is low, it may not be advisable for a firm to produce on a large scale, hence it will remain small.

  1. Nature of the product;

The nature of the product sometimes makes it impossible to produce in large quantities e.g. personal services e.g. hairdressing, painting or nursing can only be provided by an individual or a small firm.

  1. Simplicity of organization

Small firms have the considerable advantage of simplicity in organization. They avoid bureaucracy, wastage and managerial complexity associated with large scale organizations.

Where a firm intends to take advantage of simplicity, the proprietor may maintain its small firm.

 

  1. Flexibility of small firms

Small firms are flexible i.e. one can easily switch from one business to another where an owner of a business wishes to maintain flexibility so as to take advantage of any new opportunity, he/she may have to maintain a small firm.

  1. Quick decision making

In a situation where proprietors want to avoid delay in decision-making, they may opt to maintain a small business as this would involve less consultation.

  1. Belief that a small firm is more manageable

Many small businesses have the potential of expansion, yet their owners prefer to have them remain small believing that big businesses are difficult to run.

  1. Rising costs of production

In situations where production costs rise too fast, such that diseconomies of scale set is very early, the firm has to remain small.

  1. Need to retain control

In order to retain control and independence, the owners of the firm may wish to keep it small.

  1. Legal constraints/Government policy

In some situations, the laws may restrict the growth of a firm. In such circumstances the existing firms remain small.

  1. Small capital requirements

As opposed to large scale firms, small firms require little amounts of capital to start and operate.

Implication of production activities on environmental and community health

As production activities take place in a given area, the environment and the health of the community around may be adversely affected by these activities. Some of these effects include;

  1. Air pollution

This is caused by waste which is discharged into the atmosphere leading to contamination of the air. Such waste may be in funs of industrial emissions and toxic chemicals from the firms. These pollutants cause air-borne diseases. Acid rain due to such emission may also affect plants.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. PRODUCT MARKET

The term ‘market’ is usually used to mean the place where buyers and sellers meet to transact business. In Business studies, however, the term ‘market’ is used to refer to the interaction of buyers and sellers where there is an exchange of goods and services for a consideration.

NOTE: The contact between sellers and buyers may be physical or otherwise hence a market is not necessarily a place, but any situation in which buying and selling takes place. A market exists whenever opportunities for exchange of goods and services are available, made known and used regularly.

Definition:

  • Product market; Is a particular market in which specific goods and services are sold and with particular features that distinguish it from the other markets.

-The features are mainly in terms of the number of sellers and buyers and whether the goods sold are homogeneous or heterogeneous

-Product market is also referred to as market structure.

-Markets may be classified according to the number of firms in the industry or the type of products sold in them..

TYPES OF PRODUCT MARKET

The number of firms operating in a particular market will determine the degree of competition that will exist in a given industry. In some markets there are many sellers meaning that the degree of competition is very high, where as in other markets there is no competition because only one firm exists.

When markets are classified according to the degree of competition, there are four main types, these are;

  • Perfect competition
  • Pure monopoly(monopoly)
  • Monopolistic competition
  • Oligopoly

PERFECT COMPETITION

The word ‘perfect’ connotes an ideal situation.

This kind of situation is however very rare in real life; a perfect competition is therefore an hypothetical situation.

This is a market structure in which there are many small buyers and many sellers who produce a homogeneous product. The action of any firm in this market has no effect on the price and output levels in the market since its production is negligible.

Feature of Perfect Competition

  • Large number of buyers and sellers: The buyers and sellers are so many that separate actions of each one of them have no effect on the market. This implies that no single buyer or seller can influence the price of the commodity. This is because a single firms (sellers) supply of the product is so small in relation to the total supply in the industry. Similarly; the demand of one buyer is so small compared to the total demand of one buyer is so small compared to the total demand in the market that he/she cannot influence the price.

Firms (suppliers) in such a market structure are therefore price takers i.e. they accept the prevailing market price for their products.

  • Identical or homogeneous products; Commodities from different producers are identical in all aspects e.g. size; brand and quality such that one cannot distinguish them. Buyers cannot therefore show preference for the products of one firm over those of the other.
  • Perfect knowledge of the market; Each buyer and seller has perfect knowledge about the market and therefore no one would effect business at any price other than the equilibrium price (market price).If one firm raises the price of its commodity above the prevailing market price, the firm will make no sale since consumers are aware of other firms that are offering a lower price i.e. market price. All firms (sellers) are also assumed to know the profits being made by other firms in the industry (in selling the product)
  • Freedom of entry or exit in the industry; The buyers and sellers have the freedom to enter and leave the market at will i.e. firms are free to join the market and start production so long as the prevailing market price for the commodity guarantees profit. However if conditions change the firms are free to leave in order to avoid making loss.

In this market structure, it is assumed that no barrier exists in entering or leaving the industry.

  • Uniformity of buyers and sellers; All buyers are identical in the eyes of the seller. There are therefore, no advantages or disadvantages of selling to particular buyers. Similarly, all the sellers are identical and hence there would be no special benefit derived from buying from a certain supplier.
  • No government interference; The government plays no part in the operations of the industry. The price prevailing in the market is determined strictly by the interplay of demand and supply. There should be no government intervention in form of taxes and subsidies, quotas, price controls and other regulations.
  • No excess supply or demand; The sellers are able to sell all what they supply into the market. This means that there is no excess supply. Similarly, the buyers are able to buy all what they require with the result that there is no difficult in supply.
  • Perfect mobility of factors of production; The assumption here is that producers are able to switch factors of production from producing one commodity to another depending on which commodity is more profitable to sell. Factors of production are also freely movable from one geographical area to another.
  • No transport costs; The assumption here is that all sellers are located in one area, therefore none of them incurs extra transport costs or carriage of goods. The sellers cannot hence charge higher prices to cover the cost of transport. Buyers, on the other hand, would not prefer some sellers to others in an attempt to cut down on transport costs.

NOTE: The market (perfect competition) has normal demand and supply curves. The individual buyers demand curve is however; perfectly elastic since one can buy all what he/she wants at the equilibrium price. Similarly, the individual sellers supply curve is also perfectly elastic because one can sell all what he/she produces at the equilibrium price.

Perfect competition market hold on the following assumptions;

  • There are no transport costs in the industry
  • Buyers and sellers have perfect knowledge of the market
  • Factors of production are perfectly mobile
  • There is no government interference

Examples of perfect competitions are very difficult to get in the real life but some transactions e.g. on the stock exchange market, are very close to this.

Criticism of the concept of perfect competition

In reality, there is no market in which perfect competition exists. This is due to the following factors:

  • Very few firms produce homogenous products. Even if the products were fairly identical, consumers are unlikely to view them as such.
  • In real situations, consumers prefer variety for fuller satisfaction of their wants; hence homogenous products may not be very popular in these circumstances.
  • There is a common tendency towards large-scale operation. This tendency works against the assumption of having many small firms in an industry.
  • Firms are not found in one place to cut down on transport costs as this market structure requires.
  • Governments usually interfere in business activities in a variety of ways in the interest of their citizens. The assumption of non-interference by the state is therefore unrealistic in real world situations.
  • Information does not freely flow in real markets so as to make both sellers and buyers fully knowledgeable of happenings in all parts of a given market.

MONOPOLY

A monopoly is a market structure in which only one firm produces a commodity which has no close substitutes.

Some of the features in this market structure are;

  • One seller or producer; supplying the entire market with a product that has no close substitute consumers therefore have no option but to use the commodity from the monopolist to satisfy their need.
  • Many unorganised buyers; in the market the buyers compete for the commodity supplied by the monopoly firm.
  • The monopoly firm is the industry; because it supplies the entire market, the firms supply curve is also the market supply curve, and the demand curve of the firm is also the market demand curve.
  • Entry into the market is closed; such barriers are either put by the firm or they result from advantages enjoyed by the monopoly firm e.g. protection by the government.
  • Huge promotional and selling costs; are incurred in order to expand the market base and to maintain the existing market. This also helps to keep away potential competitors.
  • The monopoly firm is a price maker or a price giver; the firm determines the price at which it will sell its output in the market. It can therefore increase or reduce the price of its commodity, depending on the profit it desires to make.
  • Price Discrimination is may be possible; This is a situation where the firm charges different prices for same commodity in different markets.

Price discrimination may be facilitated by conditions such as;

  • Consumers being in different markets such that it is difficult for one to buy the product in the market where it is cheaper.
  • The production of the commodity is in the hands of a monopolist.
  • Market separation.

Market separation may be based on the following factors;

  • Geographical; Goods may be sold at different prices in different markets.
  • Income; Seller may charge different prices for his/her products to different categories of consumers depending on their income.
  • Time; a firm may sell the same commodity at a higher price during the peak period and lower the price during the off peak period.

Sources of monopoly power

  • Control of an important input in production; A firm may control a strategic input or the entire raw materials used in the production of a commodity. Such a firm will easily acquire monopoly by not selling the raw materials to potential competitors.
  • Ownership of production rights; Where the right to production or ownership of commodity i.e. patent rights, copyrights and royalties belong to one person or firm, then, that creates a monopoly. Similarly if the government gives licence to produce a commodity to one firm, then this will constitute a monopoly.
  • Internal economies of scale; The existence of internal economies of scale that enable a firm to reduce its production costs to the level that other firms cannot will force these other firms out of business leaving the firm as a monopoly.
  • Size of the market; where the market is rather small and can only be supplied profitably by one firm.
  • Additional costs by other firms; A firm may enjoy monopoly position in a particular area if other firms have to incur additional costs such as transport in order to sell in the area. These additional costs may increase the prices of the commodity to the level that it becomes less attractive hence giving the local firm monopoly status.
  • Where a group of firms combine to act as one; Some firms may voluntarily combine/amalgamate or work together for the purpose of controlling the market of their Examples are cartels
  • Restrictive practices; A firm may engage in restrictive practices in order to force other firms of business and therefore be left as a monopoly. Such practices may include limit pricing i.e. where a firm sells its products at a very low price to drive away competitors.
  • Financial factors; where the initial capital outlay required is very large, thereby preventing other firms from entering the market.
  • Government Policy ;Where the government establishes a firm and gives it monopoly power to produce and sell ‘cheaply’

Advantages of monopoly

  • A monopoly is able to provide better working conditions to employees because of the high profits realised
  • In some monopolies, high standards of services/goods are offered
  • Monopolies always enjoy economies of scale. This may help the consumer in that the goods supplied by a monopoly will bear lower prices.
  • A monopolist may use the extra profit earned to carry out research and thus produce higher quality goods and services.
  • The consumer is protected in that essential services such as water and power supply is not left to private businesses who would exploit the consumers.

Disadvantages of monopoly

  • A monopolist can control output so as to charge high prices
  • Consumers lack freedom of choice in that the product produced by a monopoly has no substitute
  • Low quality products may be availed to consumers due to lack of competition.

 

MONOPOLISTIC COMPETITION

Monopolistic competition is a market structure that falls within the range of imperfect competition i.e. falls between perfect competition and pure monopoly. It is therefore a market structure that combines the aspects of perfect competition and those of a monopoly.

Since it is not possible to have a market that is perfectly competitive or a market that is pure monopoly in real world, all market structures in real world lie between the two and are thus known as imperfect market structures.

In a monopolistic market, there are many sellers of a similar product which is made to look different. This is known as product differentiation. These similar products are made different through packaging, design, colour, branding e.t.c

The following are the assumptions of a monopolistic competition.

  • A large number of sellers; Who operate independently.
  • Differentiated products; Each firm manufactures a product which is differentiated from that of its competitors, yet they are relatively good substitutes of each other. The differences may be real in that different materials are used to make the product or may be imaginary i.e. created through advertising,branding,colour,packaging e.t.c
  • No barriers to entry or exit from industry; There is freedom of entry into the industry for new firms and for existing firms to leave the industry.
  • Firms set their own prices; The prices are set depending on the costs incurred in production and the demand in the market.
  • No firm has control over the factors of production; Each firm acquires the factors at the prevailing market prices.
  • Presence of non-price competitions; Since products are close substitutes of each other, heavy advertising and other methods of product promotion are major characteristics of firms in monopolistic competition.
  • Buyers and sellers have perfect knowledge of the market.

OLIGOPOLY

This is a market structure where there are few firms. The firms are relatively large and command a substantial part of the market. It is a market structure between the monopolistic competition and monopoly.

Types of Oligopoly

Oligopoly may be classified according to the number of firms or the type of products they sell. They include;

  • Duopoly; This refers to an oligopoly market structure which comprises of two firms. Mastermind Tobacco and British American Tobacco (BAT) are examples of duopoly in Kenya.
  • Perfect/Pure oligopoly refers to an oligopolistic market that deals in products which are identical. Examples of pure oligopoly are companies dealing with petroleum products such as oil Libya, Caltex, Total, Shell, National Oil, Kenol and Kobil. These firm sell products which are identical such as kerosene, petrol and diesel.
  • Imperfect/Differentiated Oligopoly; this is an oligopolistic market structure where firm have products which are the same but are made to appear different through methods such as packaging, advertising and branding.

Features of oligopoly

  • Has few large sellers and many buyers.
  • The firms are interdependent among themselves especially in their output and pricing.
  • Non-price competition, firms are in a position to influence the prices. However, they try to avoid price competition for the fear of price war.
  • There is barriers to entry of firms due to reasons such as; requirement of large capital, Ownership of production rights, control over crucial raw materials, Restrictive practices etc
  • High cost of selling through methods of advertisement due to severe competition.
  • Products produced are either homogeneous or differentiated.
  • Uncertain demand curve due to the inter-dependence among the firms. Hence the shifting of the demand curve is not definite.
  • There is price rigidity i.e once a price has been arrived at in an oligopolistic market, it tends to remain stable.

This feature explains why a firm in oligopolistic market faces two sets of demand curves resulting to a Kinked Demand Curve. One curve, for prices above the determined one, which is fairly gentle and the othere curve for prices below the determined one which is fairly steep.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

THE KINKED DEMAND CURVE

 

 

  1. i) The kinked demand curve illustrates the rigidity price behaviour oligopolists.
  2. ii) The curve has two parts with different elasticities: AB is elastic and BC is inelastic.

iii) Sellers cannot increase price from price OPo to OP1 because the Quantity bought will decrease (fall).

  1. iv) The sellers cannot reduce price from OP1 to OP2 because very little amount will

increase in demand.

  1. The sellers will stick to price OPo because it is the most profitable and most popular to both sellers & buyers.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. CHAIN/CHANNELS OF DISTRIBUTION

Introduction

  • Channels of distribution are the paths that goods and or services follow from the producers to the final users.
  • The persons involved in the distribution of goods from the producer to consumer are called middlemen or intermediaries.
  • There are different channels that different products follow. Some of the channels include the following:
  • Producer agent      wholesaler      retailer
  • Producer co – operative society    marketing board      wholesaler     retailer
  • Producer marketing board      wholesaler     retailer
  • Producer wholesaler      retailer
  • Producer wholesaler       consumer
  • Producer retailer      consumer
  • Producer  consumer

Costs incurred by middlemen while distributing goods

  • Buying costs. They incur this cost by paying for them from the producers or other middlemen.
  • Transport cost. Some middlemen do transport goods from the producer to other middlemen or to the final users.
  • Storage costs. Middlemen do keep the goods until their demand arises. This will therefore require them to hire or construct their own warehouses.
  • Advertising or marketing costs. Some middlemen do carry out marketing of goods on behalf of the producers and other middlemen. In the process, they pay for such services.
  • Insurance costs. Middlemen do insure the goods they are trading in to ensure compensation in the event of loss.
  • Operation costs. Middlemen just like other businesses do incur operating costs such as salaries to employees, electricity, maintenance among others.
  • Preparation costs. Some middlemen to prepare goods before they are sold to the consumers. Such activities include packing, assembling and blending. They have to meet such costs on behalf the producer, other middlemen and consumers.

CHANNELS OF DISTRIBUTING VARIOUS PRODUCTS (refer to Inventor book three pages 50 to 53)

ROLES OF MIDDLEMEN

The following are some the roles performed by middlemen in the chain of distribution

  • Bulk accumulation (assembling). They similar goods from different producers in small quantities and then offering the large amount gathered to buyers who may want to buy in large volumes.
  • Reducing transactions. The interactions between the producers and the consumers will be reduced since the middlemen are the ones who will be communicating to the consumers.
  • Bulk breaking. They buy in large quantities and then sell in small quantities as desired by the consumers.
  • Risk taking. They assume all the risks related with the movement of goods from the producers to the consumers. Such risks include theft, damages, loss due to bad debts.
  • Finance provision. Middlemen provide finance to the producers by buying goods in large quantities and paying for them in time.
  • Provision of information. Middlemen gather market information from the consumers then pass to the producers who in turn produce goods in line with the tastes of consumers.
  • Marketing/product promotion. Middlemen are involved in marketing of goods hence stimulating the interest of consumers.
  • Provision of transport. Middlemen do transport goods from the producers up to the where the consumers can access them. Both the producers and consumers are hence relieved of transport costs.
  • Storage
  • Variety provision
  • Availing goods to consumers

FACTORS TO CONSIDER BEFORE SELECTING A DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

Factors that influence the choice of a distribution channel include the following:

  • Product nature. Perishable products should be sold directly to the consumers because delays may result to losses since they go bad fast. In addition, bulky products need direct selling in order to reduce transportation and stock handling costs.
  • Nature of the market. Where the market is concentrated in one area, direct selling is appropriate. A longer channel of distribution is preferred where the market is widely spread.
  • Role of intermediary. The channel chosen should be able to perform the services related to the product being sold e.g. for technical goods, the middleman should be able to offer technical support to the customers.
  • Resources and size of the firm/producer. If the producer is small, then direct selling would be appropriate. Large firms with sufficient financial resources can opt for long channels of distribution.
  • Channels used by competitors. If a firm wants its products to compete with those of the competitors, then is it prudent to use similar channels. A firm that wants to avoid competition should use a different channel of distribution.
  • Government policy. The channel chosen should be able to meet government regulations such as all middlemen distributing pharmaceutical products must be recognized by the relevant government bodies (Pharmacy and Poisons Board).
  • Marketing risks. In the event the firm wants to avoid risks related to distribution, it will opt for middlemen.

 

Questions

  • State four channels for distributing imported goods.
  • Explain five factors that can influence the choice of a channel of distribution.
  • Outline five costs incurred by middlemen in the distribution process.
  • Describe the roles played by middlemen in the distribution chain.
  • Outline the circumstances under which a producer would sell directly to consumers.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1.   NATIONAL INCOME
  • This is the total income received by the providers/owners of the factors of production in a given country over a given time period.

Terms used in national income

  • Gross Domestic Product (GDP). This is the total monetary value of all goods and services produced in a country during a particular year. Such goods and services must have been produced within the country.
  • Net Domestic Product (NDP). This is the GDP less depreciation. Depreciation is the loss in value of the assets such as machines used in the production of goods and services.
  • Gross National Product (GNP). This measures the total monetary value of all the goods and services produced by the people of a country regardless of whether they in or outside the country. It takes into account exports and imports. The difference between exports and imports is called net Factor Income from abroad. GNP therefore is the sum of GDP and net factor income from abroad.
  • Net National Product (NNP). This recognizes the loss in value of the capital used in the production of goods. Capital here refers to capital goods. NNP is the difference between GNP and the depreciation.
  • Per capita income. This is the average income per head per year in a given country. It is also the national income divided by the population of the country.

CIRCULAR FLOW OF INCOME

  • This is the continuous movement of income between the households (providers of factors of production) and the firms (producers of goods and services).
  • The factors of production are received from households.
  • The firms pay the rewards of such factors to the households (expenditure to the firms and income to the households).
  • The households in turn use the income to buy the goods and services produced by the firms (expenditure to households and income to firms).

Assumptions/features of circular flow of income

  • Existence of two sectors only. It is assumed that the economy has only two sectors that is households and firms. The households provide the factors of production while firms are involved in the production of goods and services.
  • Total spending by households. It is assumed that the households spend all their income on the goods and services produced by the firms i.e. no savings.
  • Total spending by the firms. It is assumed that the firms spend the money received from the sale of goods and services to pay for the rewards of production factors.
  • Lack of government intervention. The government does not influence how the firms and households carry out their activities. Such interventions are in the form of taxes, price controls among others.
  • Closed economy. Exports and imports do not exist in such an economy.

Factors affecting the circular flow of income

  • The factors can either lead to increase in income and expenditure (injections) or lead to a reduction in the volume of flow (withdrawals).

 

The factors include the following:

  • This takes place when the households do not spend all their income on the purchase of goods and services. This reduces the income to be received by firms hence savings is a withdrawal from the circular flow of income.
  • Taxation reduces the amount of money available for spending therefore it is a withdrawal/leakage from the circular flow of income.
  • Government expenditure. The government may buy goods from the firms or provide subsidies. This will translate in to an injection into the circular flow of income.
  • When firms put more capital into the production, output will increase hence an increase in income (injection).
  • When goods and services are bought from other countries, money will be spent hence a reduction in the circular flow of income (withdrawal).
  • Through exports, a country is able to receive money from other countries (injections)

Injections

  • Investments
  • Government spending
  • Exports

Withdrawals

  • Savings
  • Taxation
  • Imports

APPROACHES USED IN MEASURING NATIONAL INCOME

  • Expenditure Approach.

National income is arrived at summing expenditure on all final goods and services (that have reached the final stage of production). Such expenditure is divided into:

  • Expenditure on consumer goods ( C)
  • Expenditure on capital goods (I)
  • Expenditure by government (G)
  • Expenditure on net exports (X – M)

Therefore national income = C+I+G+(X – M)

Problems associated with expenditure approach

  • Lack of accurate records particularly in the private sector.
  • Approximation of expenditure of the subsistence sector.
  • Difficulty in differentiating between final expenditure and intermediate expenditure
  • Double counting may exist
  • Fluctuating exchange rates may cause problems in the valuation of imports and exports.
  • Income approach
  • In this method, the national income is arrived at by summing all the money received by those who participate in the production of goods and services.
  • Such incomes are in the form of rewards to the production factors (wages, rent, interest and profits).
  • Public income is also taken into account i.e. it is the income received by the government from its investments (Parastatals, joint ventures).
  • Transfer payments are excluded since they represent a redistribution of incomes from those who have earned them to the recipient’s e.g.
  • National insurance schemes.

Problems related to this method

  • Determination of what proportion of transfer payments constitute in the income of a country.
  • Inaccurate data may exist since business people may not tell the truth about their income in order to evade tax.
  • Price fluctuations may make national income determination difficult.
  • Income from illegal activities is not captured.
  • Valuation of income from subsistence economy may be difficult e.g. housewives.

Assignment: Read and make short notes on Output approach (refer to Inventor book three pages 65 – 66).

USES OF NATIONAL INCOME STATISTICS

  • Indicators of standards of living. If the national income is equitably distributed, then the standards of living will be high.
  • Measuring economic growth. The statistics of one year are compared with previous year to show whether there is improvement or not.
  • Inter country comparison. They are used to compare the economic welfare among countries hence knowing which country is better off and by how much. However, the following challenges may be faced when carrying the comparisons: different in currencies, different goods and services, disparity in income distribution and difference in tastes and preferences.
  • Investment decisions. They assist the government and other investors to know the sectors to

put their money. The statistics provide relevant information concerning the performance of each sector.

  • Basis of equitable distribution of income. The statistics can be used to spread income to the hands of majority of the citizens incase a few individuals control the economy.
  • Planning purposes. The statistics will show the contribution of each sector thus helping the government in allocating the funds to the various sectors.

Factors which influences the level of national income.

  • Quantity and quality of production. If the factors are more in terms of quantity of good quality, the output will be high hence increasing in national income.
  • State of technology. A country with high level of technology will produce goods in large volumes hence high national income.
  • Political stability. Countries which are relatively stable politically experience high production hence high national income level.
  • Accuracy of accounting systems. If the methods used to gather data are accurate, then the overall statistical figures will the accurate hence reliable.
  • Proportion of the subsistence sector. Subsistence sector’s output is not normally included in the statistical figures. If it represents a large proportion, therefore the national income level will be low.
  1. For other factors refer to Inventor book three pages 68 – 69.

Reasons why high per capita income is not an indicator of a better living standard in a country

  • Statistical problems. The collection of the national income data may be inaccurate meaning that the national income figures might be incorrect hence wrong per capita income.
  • Changes in money value. If the currency has been devalued, there can be change in the value of money without necessarily representing any changes in the welfare of the people.
  • Income distribution. The per capita may be high even though the income is in the hands of very few people thus it is not a representative of the majority.
  • Nature of products. If the products are not meant to satisfy immediate wants of the people, then an increase in per capita income may not lead to a higher economic welfare.
  • Peoples’ hard work and attitude. Increased national income may mean less sleep and more worries. People have no time to enjoy what they produce and their welfare may be low despite the rise in national income.
  • Social costs. People may migrate from rural areas to urban areas straining family relationships while an increase in industries may create pollution, congestion and other environmental disruptions.

Questions

  • State four problems encountered in comparing standards of living in different countries using national income statistics
  • Using a diagram, describe the circular flow of income.
  • Explain five factors that may influence the level of national income of a country
  • Outline four limitations of expenditure approach used in measuring national income.
  • Explain five reasons why high per capita income may not translate to better living standards in a country.
  • Describe five factors that affect the circular flow of income.

 

 

 

 

  1. POPULATION AND EMPLOYMENT

Introduction

Population refers to the number of human beings living in a particular region at a particular time.

The size of the population is ascertained through national headcount, which is referred to as a national census. It is an international requirement that each country must hold a national census at least every ten years.

Population issues are major concerns to business people because people are consumers of goods and services as well as providers of factors of production.

Basic concepts in population

  1. Fertility – this is defined as the ability of a woman to give birth to a live child.
  2. Fertility rate – refers to the average number of children born per woman during her child bearing years in a given population.

Factors that determine fertility rate

  • Literacy levels among women.
  • The marriage rate among people in the productive age bracket.
  • Cost of bringing up children.
  • Economic significance of a large family, e.g. children seen as a source of cheap labour e.t.c.
  • Cultural beliefs e.g. where many children were a source of prestige.
  • Availability of medical facilities.
  • Religious factors e.g. where some religions prohibits use of family planning
  1. Birth rate – refers to the number of live births per 1000 people per year. This is also referred to as crude birth rate and may be calculated as follows:

CBR= Number of Births    x 1000    

Total population

Factors that are likely to lead to high birth rates

  • Cultural practices e.g taking children as security during old age.
  • Early marriages prolomnging the woman’s reprodcutive life.
  • Children being seen as a sou=rce of cheap labour.
  • Where people are opposed to family planning methods
  • Ignorance- lack of knowledge to family planning methods
  • Religious beliefs which encourage large families and discourage use of family planning methods.

Factors that may lead to decline in birth rates

  • Delayed marriages dues to such things as staying in school for long period
  • Craving for high standards of living leading to people having few children
  • Where small families are considered fashionable
  • Use of family planning methods
  • Availability of retirement schemes making people to stop children as security in old age.
  1. Mortality/death rate – refer to the number of people who die per thousand people per year. Is also known as natural attrition rate and may be calculated as follows:

MR= Number of death   x 1000    

Total population

  1. Infant mortality rate- refers to the number of child deaths per thousand children below the age one year per annum.
  2. Population growth rate – refers to the rate at which the population of a country is increasing or decreasing. It can be calculated as follows.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. THE LEDGER

This is a special ledger which is used to record cash and cheque transactions.

It contains only the cash in hand and cash at bank (i.e. cash and bank) accounts

  • Nominal ledger

This ledger is used to record business expenses and incomes (gains).It contains all the nominal accounts.

  • Private ledger

This ledger is used in recording private accounts i.e. confidential and valuable fixed assets and the personal accounts of the proprietors such as capital accounts and drawing accounts.

  • The general ledger

The general ledger contains all other accounts that are not kept in any other ledger e.g. buildings, furniture and stock accounts.

-Personal accounts of debtors or creditors who do not arise out of sale or purchase of goods on credit are found in the general ledger e.g. debtors as a result of sale of fixed asset on credit and expense creditors.

  1. C) Private accounts

These are accounts that the business considers to be confidential and are not availed to everybody except the management and the owners.

-These accounts may be personal or impersonal.

-They include capital account, drawings accounts, trading, profit and loss accounts.

Types of ledgers

The following are the main types of ledgers that are used to keep the various accounts

  • The sales ledger (Debtors ledger)

This is the ledger in which accounts of individual debtors are kept.

-It is used to record the value of goods sold on credit and the customers to whom the credit sales are made, hence contains the personal names of the debtors.

-It is called a sales ledger because the accounts of debtors kept here in are as a result of sale of goods on credit. An account is kept for each customer to which is debited the value of credit sale. Payment made by the debtor are credited to the account and debited in the cash book.

  • Purchases ledger(creditors ledger)

The purchases ledger contains accounts of creditors i.e. contains the records of the value of goods bought on credit and the suppliers of such goods.

It is a record of the debts payable by the business due to credit purchases.

An account is kept for each creditor to the credit side of which is posted the value of.

  1. b) Impersonal accounts

This category of ledger accounts includes all other accounts that are not personal in nature e.g. buildings, purchases, rent, sales and discounts received.

Impersonal accounts fall into two types

  • Real accounts
  • Nominal accounts
  • Real accounts; These are accounts of tangible assets or property e.g. buildings,land,furniture,fittings,machinery,stock,cash(at bank and in hand)e.t.c

These accounts are also used to draw up the balance sheet.

  • Nominal accounts; These are accounts of items that relate to gains and losses and whose balances at the end of the accounting period.

-All expenses, revenues, sales and purchases are hence nominal accounts.

-The main business expenses include purchases,sales,returns,insurance,stationary,repairs,depreciation,heating,discount allowed, lighting interests,printing,wages,rent,rates and advertising.     

The value of losses is included in the same side as the expenses when drawing up the final accounts though it is not an expense.   

-The income (revenues) include sales,returns,claims out, interest receivable, dividends receivable and commission receivable. Profit is usually categorised together with these incomes when drawing up the final accounts.

Classification of ledger accounts

Many businesses handle few transactions, hence they have few records to keep. Their accounts can thus be kept in a single ledger referred to as the general ledger

As a business grows the volume of transactions increases. This single ledger, therefore, becomes very bulky with accounts and it becomes difficult to make reference to it.

In order to simplify the recording of transactions and facilitate reference to the accounts, ledger accounts are usually classified and each category kept in a special ledger.

NOTE (i) Since many transactions are cash transactions which are normally recorded in the bank and cash accounts a need arises to remove them from the main/general ledger to a separate ledger called the cash book.

(ii)  The number of ledgers kept depends on the size of the business.

Classes of accounts

All accounts can be classified into either personal or impersonal accounts.

  • Personal accounts

-These are account of persons

-They relate to personal, companies or associations.

-They are mainly accounts of debtors and creditors.

 

NOTE: capital account is the proprietors personal account, showing the net worth of the business hence it is a personal account.

-The account balances of these accounts are used to draw up the balance sheet.

-In the ledger, the trial balance total is not affected.

Purpose of a trial balance

The purpose of a trial balance include;

  • Checking the accuracy in the ledger accounts as to whether;

i-The rule of double entry has been adhered to or observed/ complied with.

ii-There are arithmetical errors in the ledger accounts

  • Gives a summary of the ledger i.e. summary of the transactions which have taken place during a given period
  • Provide information (account balances) for preparing final accounts such as the trading account, profit and loss account and the balance sheet.
  • Test whether the ledger account balances have been posted to the right side of the trial balance.

Limitations of a trial balance

Even when the trial balance totals are equal, it does not mean that there are no errors made in the ledgers. This is because there are some errors that do not affect the trial balance.

A trial balance only assures the book keeper that the total of debit entries is equal to total credit entries. The errors that do not affect the trial balances are;

  • Error of total omission; This occurs when a transaction takes place and nothing about it is recorded in the books of accounts i.e. it is completely omitted such that neither a credit nor a debit entry is made in the ledgers.
  • Error of original entry; this occurs where both the debit and credit entries are made using similar but erroneous figures. As the wrong amount is recorded in the two accounts.
  • Error of commission; This occurs where double entry is completed but in the wrong persons accounts especially due to a confusion in names e.g. a debit entry of shs.2000 was made in Otieno’s account instead of Atieno’s account.
  • Compensating errors; These are errors whose effects cancel out e.g. over debiting debtors account by sh.300 and under debiting cash account by sh.300.
  • Complete reversal of entries; This occurs where the account to be debited is credited and the account to be credited is debited e.g. the sale of goods to Lydia on credit may be recorded as follows;

 

Dr.sales a/c

Cr.Lydius a/c              instead of

 

 

Dr.Lydius a/c

Cr.sales a/c

 

  • Error of principle; This is where a transaction is recorded in the wrong account of a different class from the correct one e.g. repairs of machinery was debited in the machinery instead of debiting the repairs account.

 

 

TRIAL BALANCE

-A trial balance is a statement prepared at a particular date showing all the debit balances on one column and all the credit balances on another column.

NOTE: A trial balance is not an account but merely a list of assets, expenses and losses on the left and capital liabilities and incomes (including profits) on the right.

-The totals of a trial balance should agree if the double entry has been carried out correctly and there are no arithmetic errors both in the ledger as well as in the trial balance itself.

-If the two sides of a trial balance are not equal, it means there is an error or errors either in the trial balance or in the ledger accounts or in both.

 

Errors that may cause a trial balance not to balance

  • Partial omission; A transaction was recorded on only one account i.e. a debit or a credit entry might have been omitted in one of the affected accounts.
  • Transfering (posting); a wrong balance to a trial balance.
  • Different amounts for the same transaction might have been entered in the accounts(Amount Dr.different from amount cr)
  • Failure to post a balance to the trial balance (omission of a balance from the trial balance.
  • Posting a balance to the wrong side of the trial balance
  • Recording a transaction on the same side of the affected accounts(partial reversal entry)
  • Arithmetic mistakes might have been made when balancing the ledger accounts
  • Arithmetic errors in balancing the trial balance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GRADE FIVE MUSIC ACTIVITIES. SCHEMES OF WORK TERM 3

GRADE FIVE MUSIC ACTIVITIES.

SCHEMES OF WORK TERM 3

 

 

Wk Ls n Strand/ Theme   Sub strand Specific learning outcomes Key inquiry Questions Learning experiences Learning Resources Assessment methods   Ref l
                     
1 1 PERFOR MING Kenyan Folk

Dances : Roles of ornaments/costu mes in a folk dance

By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       Discuss the roles of costumes, ornaments and body adornment in a folk dance.

b.       use costumes, body adornments and ornaments in a folk dance

c.       appreciate the role of participants, costumes, body adornment, ornaments in a folk dance

1.    What is the role of costumes, body adornment and ornaments in a dance?

2.    What is the role of different participants in a dance?

3.    Which materials can be used to make costumes, body adornment or ornaments?

Learners watch a Live/recorded performance of a folk dance and identify; costumes, instruments, body adornments and ornaments.

Learners brainstorm on the roles of costumes, ornaments and body adornment in a folk dance.

In groups learners discuss the roles of different participants in a dance (soloist, chorus/response group, instrumentalist and dancers).

Learners use digital devices to download and watch various

Kenyan folk dances..

·         Locally available

·         materials to make

·         body ornaments

·         Audio/visual

·         recordings of folk

·         dances

·         Resource persons

·         Musical instruments

·

connectivity

a)    Observation checklist

b)    Portfolio

 
2 1   Making a costume/Orname nt By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       make a costume or an ornament using locally available materials

b.       Discuss the procedure of making an ornament/costume

c.       appreciate the role of participants, costumes, body adornment, ornaments in a folk dance

1.    What is the role of costumes, body adornment and ornaments in a dance?

2.    What is the role of different participants in a dance?

3.    Which materials can be used to make costumes, body adornment or ornaments?

In groups learners brainstorm on the procedure and materials for making costumes, ornaments and body adornments.

Learners make a costume, ornaments, and body adornments from locally available materials for a selected dance observing safety measures.

In groups learners use

costumes, ornaments

and body adornments made or borrowed from the community in a folk dance with appropriate

Instrumental accompaniment.

·         Locally available

·         materials to make

·         body ornaments

·         Audio/visual

·         recordings of folk

·         dances

·         Resource persons

·         Musical instruments

·

connectivity

a)    Observation checklist

b)    Portfolio

 

 

            In groups learners identify

and practice a Kenyan folk dance for class presentation

     
3 1 CREATI NG/CO MPOSIN G Rhythm : Interpreting French Rhythm By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       interpret French rhythm names in a rhythmic pattern

b.       Define the term rhythm

c.       appreciate rhythms created by self and others

1. How are rhythmic patterns created? Learners listen to/sing

familiar/simple songs and are guided in identifying the notes (semibreve, minim, crotchet and quaver) using their French rhythm names (taa-aa-aa-aa, taa-aa, taa, and ta-te)

in groups, learners sing familiar songs then clap while

chanting the rhythm of the song using French rhythm names.

·         Song excerpts

·         Percussion

·         instruments

·         Melodic instruments

·         Audio recordings of

·         songs

a)    Observation checklist

b)    Portfolio

 
4 1   Rhythm : French Notes and symbols By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       associate French rhythm names of notes with their symbols

b.       write rhythms of familiar tunes using French rhythm names and their

c.       appreciate rhythms created by self and others

1. How are rhythmic patterns created? Learners practice writing the semibreve, minim, crotchet and a pair of quavers symbols.

clap and chant French rhythm names of musical notes displayed on flash cards.

Learners listen to and imitate rhythmic patterns played using the correct French rhythms names.

Learners listen to and write rhythmic patterns using note symbols.

Individually and in groups, learners use French rhythm names and note symbols (semibreve, minim, crotchet and quavers) to create simple

rhythms.

·         Song excerpts

·         Percussion

·         instruments

·         Melodic instruments

·         Audio recordings of

·         songs

a)    Observation checklist

b)    Portfolio

 
5 1   Rhythm : French Notes and symbols By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       associate French rhythm names of notes with their symbols

b.       write rhythms of familiar tunes using French rhythm names and their corresponding symbols

c.       appreciate rhythms created by self and others

1. How are rhythmic patterns created? Learners practice writing the semibreve, minim, crotchet and a pair of quavers symbols.

Learners clap and chant French rhythm names of musical notes displayed on flash cards.

Learners listen to and imitate rhythmic patterns played using the correct French rhythms

names.

·         Song excerpts

·         Percussion

·         instruments

·         Melodic instruments

·         Audio recordings of

·         songs

a)    Observation checklist

b)    Portfolio

 

 

            Learners listen to and write rhythmic patterns using note symbols.

Individually and in groups, learners use French rhythm names and note symbols (semibreve, minim, crotchet and quavers) to create simple

rhythms.

     
6 1   Rhythm : Creating rhythm using note symbols By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       create simple rhythms using note symbols

b.       aurally recognize strong and weak beats in two and four beat patterns

c.       appreciate rhythms created by self and others

1. How are rhythmic patterns created? Learners sing/listen to a song and are guided to identify songs in two or four beat patterns.

Individually and in groups, learners clap/tap/stamp the beat/ pulse, strong and weak beats of music.

In groups learners tap/use percussion instruments to imitate rhythms of songs in two

and four beat patterns

in groups learners play

rhythmic games e.g. rhythmic dictation

·         Song excerpts

·         Percussion

·         instruments

·         Melodic instruments

·         Audio recordings of

·         songs

a)    Observation checklist

b)    Portfolio

 
7 1   Rhythm : Creating rhythm using note symbols By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       create simple rhythms using note symbols

b.       aurally recognize strong and weak beats in two and four beat patterns

c.       appreciate rhythms created by self and others

1. How are rhythmic patterns created? Learners sing/listen to a song and are guided to identify songs in two or four beat patterns.

Individually and in groups, learners clap/tap/stamp the beat/ pulse, strong and weak beats of music.

Individually and in  groups learners tap/use percussion instruments to imitate rhythms of songs in two

and four beat patterns

in groups learners play rhythmic games e.g. rhythmic dictation

·         Song excerpts

·         Percussion

·         instruments

·         Melodic instruments

·         Audio recordings of

·         songs

a)    Observation checklist

b)    Portfolio

 
8 1   Rhythm : Recognizing strong and weak beat in two and four beat patterns By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       Play rhythmic games

b.       aurally recognize strong and weak beats in two and four beat patterns

c.       appreciate rhythms created by self and others

1. How are rhythmic patterns created? Learners sing/listen to a song and are guided to identify songs in two or four beat patterns.

Individually and in groups, learners clap/tap/stamp the beat/ pulse, strong and weak beats of music.

·         Song excerpts

·         Percussion

·         instruments

·         Melodic instruments

·         Audio recordings of

a)    Observation checklist

b)    Portfolio

 

 

            tap/use percussion instruments to imitate rhythms of songs in two

and four beat patterns

rners play

rhythmic games e.g. rhythmic dictation

·         songs    
9 1   Melody : Singing the sol-fa syllables By the end of the Sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       sing the sol-fa syllables for pitch discrimination

b.       interpret corresponding hand signs of the sol-fa syllables

c.       appreciate melodies created by self and others

1.    How can you perform a melody in different ways?

2.    What makes a melody interesting?

In groups, learners sing familiar songs based on d, r, m, f, s e.g. excerpts of songs such as; Skip to My Lou and Na Maua

Learners interpret hand signs for d, r, m, f, s as demonstrated by the teacher.

Learners orally and aurally identify different pitches (d, r, m, f, s) displayed on flash cards or played on a melodic instrument.

In pairs or in groups, learners

play melody games for pitch discrimination.

·         Sheet music

·         Audio recording

·         Melodic instruments

·         Flash cards

a)    Aural tests

b)    Oral tests

c)    Written tests

d)    Portfolio

 
10 1   Melody : Interpreting hands signs of the sol-fa syllables By the end of the Sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       sing the sol-fa syllables for pitch discrimination

b.       interpret corresponding hand signs of the sol-fa syllables

c.       appreciate melodies created by self and others

1.    How can you perform a melody in different ways?

2.    What makes a melody interesting?

groups, learners sing familiar songs based on d, r, m, f, s e.g. excerpts of songs such as; Skip to My Lou and Na Maua

Learners interpret hand signs for d, r, m, f, s as demonstrated by the teacher.

Identify different pitches (d, r, m, f, s) displayed on flash cards or played on a melodic instrument.

pairs or in groups, learners

play melody games for pitch discrimination.

·         Sheet music

·         Audio recording

·         Melodic instruments

·         Flash cards

a)    Aural tests

b)    Oral tests

c)    Written tests

d)    Portfolio

 
      Melody : Creating short melodies using the sol-fa syllables By the end of the Sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       create short melodies using the sol-fa syllables

b.       play own created melodies on the descant recorder

1.    How can you perform a melody in different ways?

2.    What makes a melody interesting?

  Individually and in group   ·         Sheet music

·         Audio recording

·         Melodic instruments

a)    Aural tests

b)    Oral tests

c)    Written tests

d)    Portfolio

 
learners create short melodies

using the sol-fa syllables d, r, m, f and s and rhythms learnt.

Individually and in group

learners are guided to play the

 

        c.   appreciate melodies created by self and others   melodies created using the descant recorder.

Learners present their

melodies in class for review and feedback from others.

In school and at home learners record own and others’ or present the melodies for sharing and peer review

Learners present their

recordings in class as others review and give feedback

·         Flash cards    
      Melody : Creating short melodies using the sol-fa syllables By the end of the Sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       create short melodies using the sol-fa syllables

b.       play own created melodies on the descant recorder

c.       appreciate melodies created by self and others

1.    How can you perform a melody in different ways?

2.    What makes a melody interesting?

Individually and in groups learners create short melodies using the sol-fa syllables d, r, m, f and s and rhythms learnt.

Individually and in group

learners are guided to play the melodies created using the descant recorder.

Learners present their

melodies in class for review and feedback from others.

In school and at home learners record own and others’ or present the melodies for sharing and peer review

Learners present their recordings in class as others review and give feedback

·         Sheet music

·         Audio recording

·         Melodic instruments

·         Flash cards

a)    Aural tests

b)    Oral tests

c)    Written tests

d)    Portfolio

 
    LISTENI NG, RESPO NDING AND APPREC IATION Elements of Music By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       Name the different elements in music

b.       describe how different elements of music are used in a piece of music

c.       Appreciate the Importance of elements of music

1.    What is critical listening?

2.    What is structure in music?

3.    What elements of music does one pay attention to when listening and analyzing music?

In groups, learners brainstorm on what critical listening to music entails.

Learners listen to a variety of music and are guided to discuss how different elements of music (melody, rhythm, dynamics, tempo, structure) are used using appropriate terminology.

Learners listen to a variety of

music and are guided to identify music in AB structure.

·         Audio-visual excerpts

·         of relevant music

·         Audio-visual

·         Equipment

·         Resource persons

a)    Oral/aural questions

b)    Written tests

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

      Elements of Music By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       Name the different elements in music

b.       describe how different elements of music are used in a piece of music

c.       Appreciate the Importance of elements of music

1.    What is critical listening?

2.    What is structure in music?

3.    What elements of music does one pay attention to when listening and analyzing music?

In groups, learners brainstorm on what critical listening to music entails.

Learners listen to a variety of music and are guided to discuss how different elements of music (melody, rhythm, dynamics, tempo, structure) are used using appropriate terminology.

Learners listen to a variety of music and are guided to identify music in AB structure.

·         Audio-visual excerpts

·         of relevant music

·         Audio-visual

·         Equipment

·         Resource persons

a)    Oral/aural questions

b)    Written tests

 
      Elements

of Music : Music structure- AB structure

By the end of the sub strand, the learner should be able to:

a.       Define the term structure in music

b.       aurally identify music in AB structure

c.       Appreciate music in AB structure.

1.    What is critical listening?

2.    What is structure in music?

3.    What elements of music does one pay attention to when listening and analyzing music?

Learners sing songs in AB structure and are guided in identifying the two different sections.

Learners play simple melodies in AB structure using the descant recorder.

In lass and at home, learners are guided by teacher/parent/guardian to listen to appropriate music from Digital/electronic devices or live performance and write short sentences describing the

music.

·         Audio-visual excerpts

·         of relevant music

·         Audio-visual

·         Equipment

·         Resource persons

a)    Oral/aural questions

b)    Written tests

 

 

 

The Pearl Comprehensive Notes, Guide

The Pearl

John Ernest Steinbeck

The Pearl Author/Context

John Ernest Steinbeck was born on February 27, 1902 in his childhood home of the Salinas Valley in California. In this environment, Steinbeck developed an appreciation for the sights, sounds, and smells of the natural world. The connection between man and nature and the inevitability of man meeting his determined fate are two common themes in his novels.

 

As a child, Steinbeck grew up in a supportive middle-class family. Although his mother, once a schoolteacher, would have preferred her son to make his way in a dignified profession, Steinbeck’s father gave the writer a small allowance from his own salary so that his son could pursue his writing career.

Steinbeck went to Stanford intermittently for five years without ever earning a degree, and during that time, he worked odd jobs, often involving physical labor. He liked these jobs because it brought him into contact with men of courage, strength, and honesty. He admired them for these qualities and their lack of hypocrisy.

At the age of twenty-seven, Steinbeck published his first novel, Cup of Gold, in 1929. From that point came thirteen novels, two collections of short stories, dramatizations of two of his novels, a play in story form, a documentary, and two volumes of reportage, as well as a journal of travel and scientific research. His novels include: To a God Unknown (1932), Tortilla Flat (1935), In Dubious Battle (1936), The Red Pony (1937), The Grapes of Wrath (1939), Of Mice and Men (1940), The Moon Is Down (1942), Cannery Row (1945), The Wayward Bus (1947), The Pearl (1947), East of Eden (1952), Sweet Thursday (1954), and The Winter of Our Discontent (1961).

The Grapes of Wrath won a Pulitzer Prize in 1940, and Steinbeck received the Nobel Prize for Literature in 1962. After Steinbeck won the Nobel Prize, he ceased to write any significant fiction, but he did write journalistic pieces, including America and Americans (1966).

Despite winning the Nobel and Pulitzer Prizes, critics weren’t sure what to make of Steinbeck because his style seemed to change with every novel. Some considered these changes an example of his versatility as a writer, while others viewed it as immaturity and an inability to establish his own style.

“Those who have written about Steinbeck have disagreed far more widely — and deeply — than they have about any other important writer of our time. . . . There is at least one notable characteristic of Steinbeck’s writing on which otherwise conflicting critics agree: he is a man in whom the faculty of pity is strong and close to the surface. . . . It may turn out . . . that the essence of Steinbeck-man and Steinbeck-writer lies in these two quite uncomplicated truths: he earnestly wishes to make people understand one another and he is able, like Blake, to ‘seek love in the pity of others’ woe.'”

Steinbeck died at his home in New York City in December of 1968.

THE PREFACE

The Pearl begins with a short preface in which Steinbeck introduces the story of the great pearl, along with his three main characters-Kino the fisherman, his wife Juana, and their infant son Coyotito. Their story has been told so often, the Preface asserts, that it lives in people’s minds and hearts. The story can be considered a parable.

NOTE: THE INTRODUCTION

Steinbeck inserted the Preface to make sure readers understood that the story had universal importance. Through stylized language and the suggestion of a parable, he indicates that you should look beyond the simple plot in order to find a deeper meaning. Perhaps because he had been criticized for creating shallow or flat characters, this short introduction is his way of announcing that the characters are to be regarded mainly as symbols.

The Pearl Plot Summary

Kino, a young pearl diver in La Paz, enjoys his simple life until the day his son, Coyotito, is stung by a scorpion. The wealthy town doctor will not treat the baby because Kino cannot pay the doctor’s fee, so Kino and his wife, Juana, are left only to hope their child is saved. That day Kino goes diving, and finds a great pearl, the Pearl of the World, and knows he is suddenly a wealthy man. The word travels quickly about the pearl and many in the town begin to plot ways to steal it.

While the townspeople plot against Kino, he dreams of marrying Juana in a church, buying a rifle, and sending Coyotito to school so that he can learn to read. Kino believes that an education will free his son from the poverty and ignorance that have oppressed their people for more than four hundred years.

The doctor comes to treat Coyotito once he learns of Kino’s pearl, and although the baby is healed by Juana’s remedy, the doctor takes advantage of Kino’s ignorance. He convinces Kino that the child is still ill and will die without the care of a doctor. The doctor then manipulates Kino into unwittingly revealing where he has hidden the great pearl. Kino moves the pearl when the doctor leaves. That night, an intruder comes into Kino’s hut and roots around near the spot where Kino had first buried the pearl.

The next day, Kino tries to sell the pearl in town. The pearl buyers have already planned to convince Kino that the great pearl he has found is worth very little because it is too large. This way they can purchase the pearl for a low price. But when the buyers try to cheat Kino, he refuses to sell the pearl and plans to travel to another city to sell at a fair price. His brother, Tom Juan, feels Kino’s plan is foolish because it defies his entire way of life and puts his family in danger. Kino is now on his own, although he doesn’t know it yet.

Juana warns Kino that the pearl is evil and will destroy his family, but he refuses to throw it away because it is his one chance to provide a different life for his family. That night, Juana takes the pearl and tries to throw it into the sea, but Kino stops her and beats her. On his way back to their hut, Kino is attacked and he kills the man in self-defense. Juana goes to gather their things and escape and finds the floor of their hut completely dug up. While she’s inside the hut getting the baby, someone lights it on fire.

Kino, Juana, and Coyotito hide with Kino’s brother for a day before embarking on their journey to a new city under the cover of darkness. While they are resting during the day, Kino discovers that there are trackers following them. He knows that they will steal the pearl and kill his family if they catch them. To escape, Kino and Juana take the baby and run to the mountains where they hide in a cave at nightfall. The trackers camp just below the ridge where they are hiding. Kino sneaks down in the night to kill the trackers, but before he can attack them, Coyotito cries out. The trackers, thinking it’s a coyote, shoot at the dark cave where Juana and Coyotito are hiding. As the shot is fired, Kino springs on the trackers and kills them all. Unfortunately, Coyotito was killed by the first gunshot, and Kino’s journey with the pearl ends in tragedy.

Realizing that the pearl is cursed and has destroyed his family (as Juana forewarned), Kino and Juana return to La Paz and throw the cursed pearl into the sea.

SETTING

The events of The Pearl take place on an estuary (the mouth of a river) somewhere on the coast of Mexico, in the fictitious town of La Paz. If you look at a map, you’ll see a long peninsula descending from the U.S. state of California. The peninsula, called Baja California, is part of Mexico and is separated from the rest of Mexico by the Gulf of California. (Another name for the Gulf of California is the Sea of Cortez, or Cortes.) Steinbeck traveled in this area with his friend Ed Ricketts in 1940 and described his experiences in The Sea of Cortez (1941).

Geographical features mentioned in The Pearl give clues to the setting. In a relatively short time, Kino walks from the estuary through desert scrub to mountains. This would be possible in Baja California.

Steinbeck doesn’t tell you exactly when the events of the novel take place because they came from a legend. Although no date is given, you are told that the witnesses of Kino’s return were the grandfathers of the present villagers. If Steinbeck heard the legend in 1940, that would set the story somewhere around 1900.

In order to understand Steinbeck’s story, it will help you to know that Indians of Mexico had been under the domination of people of Spanish descent for some three hundred years at the time of the legend. A civil-religious hierarchy governed; although church (Roman Catholic) and state were outwardly separated, they worked together in many aspects of Mexican life. You’ll see in the story how the priest and the pearl buyers act as allies in the social hierarchy, with the Indians at the bottom of the ladder. In many cases the Indians could not attend school or own land.

Although Spanish culture was imposed on Indians, the ancient religions and other aspects of the culture of the various tribes survived. Watch for places where you can see that Kino and Juana have merged both traditions-for example, Juana’s combination of Catholic Hail Marys and ancient prayers.

One aspect of Mexican culture that plays a part in the novel is that of mi tierra (my land). The birthplace of an Indian had enormous significance. Many Mexicans, especially Mexican Indians, believed they were meant to stay where they were born, and they developed a special attachment to their birthplace. Knowing this concept might help you understand what a huge step Kino takes when he decides to leave La Paz for the capital.

CHAPTER I

As a new day begins, Kino awakens peacefully next to his sleeping wife. He is content with his world and hears the Song of the Family playing happily in his mind. It is an indication that all is well.

NOTE: THE SONGS AND WHOLENESS

Throughout The Pearl you will read about various “songs” that play in the minds of Steinbeck’s characters. Such songs include the Song of the Family and the Song of Evil. These are ancient songs that have been passed down by generations of Indians. Steinbeck uses them to show the traditional, almost instinctual responses of his characters to their environment. When things are happy, they hear the Song of the Family. When evil threatens, they are alerted by the Song of Evil. Kino’s songs often mark occasions of celebration: he celebrates the morning and the existence of his family; he celebrates life and its events. The songs were individual parts of the Whole. This theme of wholeness is central to Steinbeck’s thinking: everything has its place in the universe, and when something happens to one of the parts, the whole system is affected.

Kino wraps himself in the one blanket that he owns, and watches the dawn break over the Gulf of California. The little Indian village is located somewhere on the peninsula of Baja California, Mexico, on the shore of the Gulf of California. While Juana prepares breakfast of corncake and pulque, Kino watches “with the detachment of God” as some ants try to outsmart each other in the dirt. His song blends with Juana’s ancient song, and together they form a unity (the “Whole”).

 

NOTE: THE ANTS

From the very start, Steinbeck tries to show similarities between the human and animal worlds. The ants, sabotaging and outwitting each other with sand traps, are little different from human beings on the battlefield, in the marketplace, or in other human competitions. Notice that Kino does nothing to alter the outcome of the struggle. A major theme of The Pearl is man’s struggle with nature and with the historical, racial, and class differences that prevent him from fulfilling his goals. By identifying Kino with God, is Steinbeck saying that man’s life and struggles are not subject to divine interference? Try to keep some of these larger issues in mind as you read the novel.

Kino returns to his brush hut, a primitive abode with a crude doorway and mats on a dirt floor. A streak of sun falls on the rope that holds Coyotito’s box. Suddenly, the peace of the morning is shattered when a scorpion crawls down the rope and stings the infant. Kino grabs the insect and grinds it into the dust while Juana takes her child and sucks out the poison. She whispers some ancient magic and mutters a “Hail Mary,” which shows the Roman Catholic influence in her religious beliefs. Coyotito’s screaming summons the neighbors, including Kino’s older brother, Juan Tomas, and his fat wife, Apolonia. Kino watches Juana in action and wonders at her strength, endurance, and patience.

NOTE: THE SCORPION EPISODE

The scorpion attack is part of the human struggle for existence and parallels the attacks by men later on. Steinbeck uses this attack to point out the difficulty of life in general-that no matter how hard people struggle in life, there always seems to be another problem or obstacle in their path.

Juana tells Kino to get the doctor. While this may seem like a reasonable request, it is actually an unusual one for an Indian. The class distinctions between the poor Indians and people of Spanish descent like the doctor were enormous. Kino realizes that since he is an Indian and has no money, the doctor will not come to treat Coyotito. Hearing that, Juana decides they will go to him. The theme of wholeness arises again when the villagers swarm around Juana and Kino: “The thing had become a neighborhood affair.” As mentioned earlier, the Whole is affected when something happens to one of the parts.

NOTE: CLASS DISTINCTION

Hundreds of years ago, Spanish conquerors took over Mexico and established their social, political, and economic dominance over the Indian population. The Spaniards and their descendants, because of their money and military power, became the ruling class. The Indians became the exploited, lower class.

The villagers, amazed by this decision, follow Juana and Kino to the doctor’s house, passing the four beggars who gather in front of the church. Steinbeck uses the beggars to illustrate the doctor’s character: “They knew his ignorance, his cruelty, his avarice, his appetites, his sins. They knew his clumsy abortions and the little brown pennies he gave sparingly for alms.” Through this unspoken knowledge about the doctor, you come to see the class struggle that is part of the lives of the members of Kino’s tribe.

Everyone suspects the doctor will not treat Coyotito. But the parents must try anyway. In his rage, Kino pounds against the doctor’s gate with the iron ring knocker. His thoughts about the doctor are described in the language of oppression: weakness, fear, anger, rage, and terror. The pounding of the music of the enemy mixes with the sound of the iron ring pounding at the doctor’s gate.

The servant who answers the call is an Indian like Kino, yet he will not speak to Kino in his own language. He makes it clear that Kino must wait for an answer outside the bolted gate.

NOTE: ON LANGUAGE

Language is used here as a sign of class distinction. When the Indian servant says, “A little moment,” Steinbeck is implying that he is speaking Spanish-un momentito. The -ito ending gives a noun the meaning of “small” or “tiny.” The baby’s name, Coyotito, means “a little coyote.” When the servant refuses to speak in the Indian language, he is reminding Kino of his lowly place. The incident also shows that people of Spanish descent set Indians against each other.

The doctor’s home, elegantly decadent, represents “the other world” and is contrasted with the primitive Indian huts. The doctor, dressed in a silk dressing gown (robe) that barely covers his fat belly, sips chocolate clumsily from a delicate china cup. He has the trappings of the rich, whereas you have seen that Kino eats corncake in the dirt, near a fire, wrapped in an old blanket. By now, you have probably noticed the tone of a parable, which is designed to teach a simple moral lesson. What message is Steinbeck communicating in this contrast between the doctor and the Indians?

As expected, the doctor, claiming that he is not a veterinarian, refuses to treat Coyotito. A wave of shame engulfs the people who witness Kino’s humiliation. Kino stands at the gate for a long time, then angrily punches it. He stares at his bloody knuckles, a symbol of the struggle between people of Spanish background and Indians. The doctor’s insulting refusal shocks Kino into realizing that something drastic must happen if he is to provide for his son’s future. It’s not that Kino or his family must “change,” but that they must find some way of exerting control over their environment. Do you think that Kino is a victim of fate? Are there changes he could have made to improve his life?

 

 

 

NOTE: NATURE VS. CIVILIZATION

Steinbeck uses nature imagery to contrast the Indians with the “civilized” life of the town. The doctor, who represents those who control the village, lives in a large home of stone and plaster, while Kino and the other Indians live in an impoverished neighborhood of small brush huts with dirt floors. Whereas the doctor drinks chocolate from a silver pot, Kino drinks pulque (a fermented drink made from a flowering plant) from an earthen jug, squatting on the dirt. The doctor sleeps in a plush bed, but Kino and his wife sleep on simple mats thrown on the ground. Yet the doctor’s house is gloomy and dark, whereas Kino’s hut is right on the beautiful Gulf of California. The doctor is frustrated and greedy; Kino is happy and content. The doctor has money; Kino has none. The doctor is agitated; the Indians are in tune with nature. The doctor is “refined”; the Indians have the simple, instinctual ways of animals. (“All the doctor’s race spoke to all of Kino’s race as though they were simple animals.”)

What does this contrast tell you? One idea to think about is that the further one moves away from nature, the more “unnatural” one becomes. And with this move toward a culture based on money, one grows more discontent with life, more restricted and tense. The birds at the Gulf fly free, while the doctor’s bird is caged. Kino is at peace when the novel begins. But he is soon thrown into conflict when he leaves nature in pursuit of money and civilization. This conflict will persist until he returns to his natural habitat.

CHAPTER II

In the opening description of the beach, the narrator leads your eyes inland from the sea. The beach and the water nearby are full of life, each creature living and growing in its own way and in its own place. Despite the vision of the sea teeming with life, the narrator cautions that in the Gulf, vision cannot be trusted. The hazy mirages that occur there have taught Kino’s people for centuries not to trust their vision, for the Gulf has “the vagueness of a dream.”

Kino’s village is located on a broad estuary lined with canoes. He and Juana are proud of his canoe-a gift from his father, who had received it from Kino’s grandfather. It is their only possession of value and symbolizes the ancient Indian civilization that continues to guide Kino. As his source of income, the canoe is a necessity.

That morning, when Kino and Juana come down to the beach, she makes a poultice (medicinal compress) of seaweed for Coyotito’s shoulder. This is probably a better remedy than what the doctor would have offered, yet it lacks the doctor’s authority. Worrying about her son, Juana prays that they will find a pearl in order to pay the doctor to heal Coyotito.

NOTE:

Juana’s natural instincts are strong. She reacts to the situations in her life with compassion and intelligence, as her administering of her poultice demonstrates. But she is aware of her simplicity and doubts the effectiveness of her methods, when compared with those of the doctor. Keep this in mind when you read of the doctor’s actions in the next chapter.

After pushing the canoe into the water, Kino and Juana work together to paddle toward the oyster bed where Kino fishes and searches for pearls. The oyster bed has historical significance. Steinbeck notes that the Spanish conquerors had worked this bed and that the pearls taken from it had greatly aided the king of Spain, financing both his wars and the decoration of his churches.

NOTE: PEARL FORMATION

Pearls are formed through an accident of nature. A grain of sand becomes caught inside the fleshy folds of an oyster and, to protect itself from irritation, the oyster coats the grain with layer after layer of a milky cement. This process forms a pearl. This contrast between the natural definition of a pearl and its value to humans in terms of wealth is one of the many contrasts Steinbeck uses to tell you something significant about reality and appearances. It is also one of the many levels of symbolic meaning that the pearl conveys.

Kino knows that a great pearl will bring him much money, but he does not dare hope for such a pearl because it is not good to want too much. As he descends into the water, he hears the Song of the Pearl That Might Be, and in the canoe above, Juana makes the “magic of prayer.”

Moments after Kino goes underwater, he finds a large oyster in which there is a “ghostly gleam.” It is the Pearl of the World-great and perfect and stunning. Kino’s troubles seem to be over. The money he will receive from the sale of the pearl will eliminate the humiliations of poverty. Yet Kino does not hope for too much since that might drive good luck away. Kino’s people have always felt a need to be tactful with both the Christian God and the old Indian gods so as not to appear greedy. Why do you think they feel this way?

NOTE: SUPERSTITIONS

Juana and Kino do not want to offend the gods by hoping for too much. On one level this is a superstition inherited from their ancestors (Juana’s “magic of prayer”). But on another level, it is consistent with the idea of wholeness, whereby each person plays his part in life and removes from life what is his due. Though illiterate, Juana and Kino understand the principle of balance. If you ask for more than your fair share, you may end up with even less. Notice that the pearl gives off a “ghostly gleam.” Already there is a hint of death.

Kino looks at the pearl and sees that it captures the light as perfectly as the moon. He can see dreams of a better future for his family in the pearl. This passage marks the beginning of Kino’s dreams, or “visions,” where reality becomes confused with the illusion of a better world. His dreams go deep-right through to his soul-and Kino will soon begin to identify his soul with the pearl. Don’t forget the warning about mirages, however, at the beginning of the chapter. Will the pearl prove a lucky find or something quite different?

While Kino holds the pearl in the hand he had smashed against the doctor’s gate, Juana notices that Coyotito’s swelling has gone down. The poison is leaving the infant’s body. Kino screams with delight as he looks at the pearl, and this causes the other divers to race toward his canoe.

By screaming so loudly, Kino attracts attention to his discovery. This sets in motion the reactions of the community, each person adding to the total reaction of the whole. Before he knows it, Kino will become alienated from the people of his own village. He will be the outsider who deviates from the natural system. And in biological systems, the deviant is usually punished, sometimes by death. If you were in Kino’s shoes, would you react as he did?

CHAPTER III

Kino’s village is compared to a “colonial animal,” with a physical body, emotions, and a nervous system that communicates news in a rapid, invisible way. By the time Kino and Juana return to their house, everyone knows that he has found the Pearl of the World. Suddenly, people become interested in Kino. When the priest hears the news, he thinks of certain repairs needed by the church. The doctor, fantasizing about his younger, happier days in Paris, announces that Kino is his client and that he is treating Coyotito for the scorpion sting.

NOTE: THEME OF WHOLENESS

With the comparison of the village to a colonial animal, Steinbeck presents his idea that each person is part of a larger whole. No event happens to an individual in isolation. The procession of villagers to the doctor’s house prepared you for this idea. And it is reinforced by the closeness felt by Mexican Indians to their village. There is a feeling of belonging, perhaps because of village unity and the hierarchy of power. Rarely do people leave their village.

The unscrupulous pearl buyers are delighted by the news. Though they pretend to be independent buyers with private little offices, they all work for the same man. They are the “arms” of his organization, and nothing gives them more pleasure than buying pearls at ridiculously low prices.

A “curiously dark residue” is created when the people think about Kino’s pearl. It taps into their dreams, plans, hopes, fantasies, and desires. And the only person preventing them from fulfilling their dreams is Kino. Because of this, he becomes every man’s enemy, though he doesn’t know it. His discovery has provoked something thoroughly evil in the town, a “black distillate” as poisonous as the scorpion. This comparison of the pearl’s effect with the scorpion’s poison is one of the major biological comparisons in The Pearl. (Another is the description of the village as a colonial animal.) The pearl, once a source of promise and beauty, has now become an evil omen.

NOTE: GREED AND ENVY

The pearl causes a sinister change in town. Kino has become a “have” in a world of “have-nots.” As a result, he is an outsider, an enemy. The pearl has planted the seeds of many dreams in the minds of many people who have been deprived of too much for too long. Their greed and envy create a threat to Kino. In his excitement, Kino is blinded to events around him. But his brother, Juan Tomas, sees the threat and will warn Kino about it.

Later, Kino sits with his family and friends, admiring the pearl. Juan Tomas asks what he will do now that he has become rich. Kino peers into the pearl for an answer, as if looking into a crystal ball. He has a vision of a proper church wedding, where he and Juana will be dressed in fine clothes. And he will purchase a harpoon and a rifle.

Kino wants status and recognition, and it is the rifle that seems to symbolically break down the social order that keeps the Indians under the domination of the Spaniards. While it is acceptable for Kino to imagine having a wedding, fine clothes, and other niceties, a rifle would ordinarily be an impossible purchase for poor Indians. The mere thought of Kino’s owning a rifle tells you that he has crossed the line that separates his original simple life from the passion for wealth that will devour him. The rifle symbolizes Kino’s intention to cease being exploited by people of Spanish descent. In the hands of an Indian, a gun could change the power structure. So could the next part of Kino’s dream-an education for his son-since knowledge will eventually free the Indians from the bonds of ignorance. On an even higher symbolic level, the rifle might be thought of as the final blow of truth that allows innocence and goodness to triumph over evil. This passage about Kino’s visions reminds you that The Pearl is an allegory in which concrete objects often stand for ideas.

At dusk, the villagers whisper that the priest is coming. Like the doctor, the priest lives in town and rarely visits these “children.” Without knowing why, Kino hears the Song of Evil, but faintly, when the priest enters. The Father says Kino is named for a great man of the Church (Eusebio Kino, a Jesuit missionary in present-day Mexico and Arizona from the 1680s to his death in 1711) and that it is in the books. Kino isn’t sure of this and hopes that someday his son will know what is in the books. The priest wants to make certain that the Church gets its share from the sale of the pearl. Do you think Steinbeck is implying that the Church contributes to the exploitation of the Indians?

NOTE: KINO, THE PRIEST, AND RELIGION

The priest’s visit is preceded by the suggestion that Kino might be punished for trying to change things. How are God, the priest, the future, and Kino’s plans related? Kino believes that his future is vulnerable to attack because he has spoken openly of his plans. In fact, Kino feels threatened by this representative of religion. Although the priest appears to be concerned that Kino do the “right” thing, his major interest is the pearl. His stilted biblical language (“thou” and “thee”) rings false. And he has not married Kino in the church or baptized Coyotito because Kino has never had the money to pay for these services. Do you think the priest’s actions are motivated by self-interest? Remember that in the original story Kino wants to use the pearl’s wealth primarily to guarantee his salvation by purchasing in advance the masses necessary to release his soul from Purgatory. Doesn’t such a practice as buying one’s salvation also suggest the corruption of the Church?

After the priest leaves, Kino still hears the shrill music of evil in his ears. A thin dog wanders by, but as Kino looks down, he fails to see the animal. This is another sign that Kino’s eyes are blind to simple, everyday events.

The doctor arrives after dark. Kino is filled with hatred, rage, and fear, but lets the doctor in when the corrupt old man says there might be a delayed reaction to the scorpion sting. In his ignorance, Kino does not know what to do, but he does not want his son to suffer.

To play on the couple’s fears, the doctor puts on a grand show. He gives the baby some poisonous white powder and says he will come back in an hour, for he knows the poison will strike by then. When the doctor leaves, Kino buries the pearl in the corner of the hut. Coyotito becomes very sick again, and in an hour the doctor returns.

NOTE: Before the doctor returns, Steinbeck inserts an important description of the estuary at night. There is the sound of big fish eating little fish, the familiar sound of slaughter-a symbol of the relationship between the Spanish and the Indians, between the rulers and the oppressed.

The doctor has not fooled anyone, even though he gives Coyotito a few drops of ammonia in a cup of water to calm him. The doctor says that because of his knowledge of scorpion poison, Coyotito will now recover. He pretends to be surprised that Kino has found a pearl, but asks questions, hoping that Kino will glance at the place where the pearl is hidden. Kino does this, and the doctor leaves the hut knowing the location of the pearl.

Later that night, Kino and Juana are awakened by an intruder in their hut. Fearing this might happen, Kino had moved the pearl. But he is wounded in the scuffle with the attacker.

For the first time, Juana begs Kino to get rid of the pearl. She feels it is evil and will destroy them. But Kino resists. He is infatuated with dreams of the future and refuses to surrender to outsiders.

NOTE:

The shrewd and conniving doctor is one of the first to prey upon Kino, but he will not be the last. Juana’s instincts about the pearl are correct, and Kino’s stubbornness will launch him on a path of destruction. Within the scope of the parable, what does Kino’s attitude tell you about the quest for money? Whose side do you take in the disagreement between Juana and Kino?

 

 

 

CHAPTER IV

This is the day Kino will sell the pearl. Everyone in La Paz is aware of Kino’s plans and will take part in the ritual. Juana wears her wedding skirt and dresses Coyotito in baptismal clothes. Kino steps out of his hut and heads up the procession, accompanied by his brother, Juan Tomas. Though Juana walks behind her husband, there will be a time when she breaks custom and walks together with him.

Juan Tomas warns Kino to beware of the pearl buyers. They are cheats, he says, and will try to fool him about the price. He reminds Kino of the time some men in the village wanted to obtain more money for their pearls by pooling them and sending an Indian agent to the capital to sell them. Twice they tried it, but on both occasions the agents disappeared. Do you think the agents ran off with the money, or were they perhaps robbed and killed?

The brothers talk about the annual sermon that the priest delivers on this incident. He insists it’s a message from God that each person is meant to maintain his or her position in life, whatever it might be: “Each man and woman is like a soldier sent by God to guard some part of the castle of the Universe.”

NOTE:

When you consider the source of this sermon-the priest-you may conclude that it’s a story he uses to manipulate the Indians. There is a strong political and social component-God wants you to stay in your place-and the Indians are expected to obey. It is very possible that Steinbeck wants you to regard the sermon in the same light as the doctor’s remedies. Do you think Kino and Juan Tomas believe the priest’s message?

The brothers squint their eyes and tighten their lips in preparation for the pearl buyers. The people in the procession know that this is an important day, and they follow Kino’s lead.

In the meantime, the pearl buyers sit at their desks, excited about the much-discussed pearl. One of them, a fat, plodding man, plays disappearing tricks with a coin while waiting. The symbolic disappearance of the coin foreshadows the episode that follows.

When Kino arrives, the villagers wait outside while he shows one of the buyers his pearl. The pearl buyers have already conspired how to handle the buying of the pearl. With a look of sadness and contempt for the poor man who doesn’t know the value of things, one of the buyers tells Kino that the pearl, like fool’s gold, is only a curiosity. He offers Kino a thousand pesos, but Kino knows it is worth fifty thousand.

Kino, growing “tight and hard,” feels the circling of vultures and wolves. He hears the music of the enemy and knows that he is being cheated. As if to confirm his price, the pearl buyer sends for the other buyers, claiming that they know nothing of his offer. The first man refuses to do business because the pearl is a “monstrosity.” The second dealer says it is soft, chalky, and worthless. The third offers five hundred pesos.

Disgusted, Kino withdraws his pearl and says he’ll sell it in the capital. The men, realizing they have not fooled Kino, promptly offer fifteen hundred pesos. They know that they will be punished by their boss if they don’t purchase the pearl. But Kino understands their scheme and decides to leave.

That evening, the villagers discuss Kino’s decision. Some support him; others think he was wrong. Kino, however, is terrified of what he has done. He feels he has “lost one world and [has] not gained another.” What do you think this means? Kino knows more about the world than he did a few days earlier. Though he is vulnerable, he must harden himself to the attacks that await him. His instinctual awareness of this causes him anxiety, as does the idea of leaving the village of his birth.

Juan Tomas sees that Kino is treading on new ground without knowing the way. He says that, in the capital, Kino will be among strangers and will be leaving behind his friends and family. (If you have been looking for the symbolic meaning of the characters, look carefully at Juan Tomas here. Do you see why some readers think he represents the traditional Indian ways?) Only Juana seems to be on Kino’s side, even though the pearl frightens her.

Later on, Kino is restless and goes for a walk. Sensing danger, he feels for his knife. Juana hears a scuffle and puts the baby down to look for a rock in order to come to Kino’s aid. By the time she reaches Kino, his clothes have been torn apart by an attacker looking for the pearl. He is half conscious, his cheek slashed.

Juana cleans the wound, then pleads with Kino to throw the pearl away. Kino can only repeat his dream, as if repetition will make it come true. He asks Juana to believe in him (“I am a man”), then promises they will leave for the capital in the morning.

NOTE:

You might be wondering about the relationship between Kino and Juana at this point. It is clear that Kino has deep love and respect for his wife. She is warm and loving and also strong and secure. Yet within the social structure of their society, the male is the absolute head of the family. Do you think Kino is comfortable as the decision maker? Or would he prefer to share responsibility equally with Juana? He seems obsessed with his dream and, for the moment, won’t let anyone, including Juana, challenge it.

 

 

 

CHAPTER V

Kino awakens in the darkness as Juana quietly leaves the hut with something in her hand. Enraged, Kino follows her to the shore. But when she sees him coming, Juana begins to run. Kino grabs her arm before she can throw the pearl into the water. Then, hissing like a snake, he beats her. When she falls against the rocks, he kicks her viciously in the side. This is the same Kino who had so tenderly loved her two days earlier and had wondered at her strength.

What has changed him? What makes them both do what they are doing? Juana wants to expose the dream-filled destruction she sees Kino driven toward. But she doesn’t fight back, because submission is part of her role as Kino’s wife. When Kino beats her, he is defending his manliness and his dream, for the two have become one.

NOTE: KINO’S DREAM

Kino’s dream has challenged the system. In Chapter IV, Steinbeck showed you the reflexive response of the town, the colonial animal, to the pearl. In the deepening conflict, Kino will lose everything that connects him to this town. The purpose of Chapter V is to show Kino’s isolation. If you keep in mind the metaphor (comparison) of the town as a colonial animal, this separation can mean only one thing-destruction. Kino’s battle with Juana foreshadows the death of his family. He is now like the deviant from a closely interrelated ecological system. He is separated from his natural environment. From now on, he will lack the protection of his kin and the strength of his tradition. He is a free agent, flung into the world to face ruthless predators.

Kino is attacked again on the path to his hut-this time, by more than one assailant. In self-defense, Kino kills one of them, and with this action, Juana realizes that their old way of life is ended. She finds the pearl in the path just before seeing the two men lying there, one of whom is bleeding from the throat. She sponges Kino’s wounds and revives him after dragging the dead man into the bushes. As Kino recovers consciousness, she tells him what has happened, and they realize they must leave the village before daybreak.

By killing a man, Kino has crossed a threshold; there is now no turning back to the old life. Before this, Kino could have sold the pearl and given up his dream of changing the way things are. In his quest for his dream, Kino rebels against both the natural and the social system-and tries to impose his own will. This attempted revolt will bring Kino ever closer to destruction.

Kino instructs Juana to prepare Coyotito and pack some food while he readies the canoe. As he stumbles down to the beach, he is horrified to see that his canoe has been destroyed.

 

 

 

NOTE: THE CANOE

For Kino, as for any fisherman, the destruction of his boat is an immeasurable loss. Not only does it mean the loss of his prized possession and his means to an income, but it also means the loss of a part of his heritage. The psychological impact of the loss of his canoe is as significant for Kino as the dead man in the path was for Juana. The old way of life is over. Filled with rage, Kino now becomes like an animal, living only to protect himself and his family. (But notice that even in his rage, it never occurs to Kino to take another’s boat.) Why does Steinbeck use this animal comparison? Does Kino really have to become like an animal to preserve his dream of a better life as a man? Is Steinbeck necessarily implying that animal traits are lower than human ones?

Juana scurries down the path with the news that their hut is on fire. She and Kino make plans to hide in his brother’s house until the next night, when they will leave for the mountains. Juan Tomas tells him that there is a devil in the pearl, but he agrees to help Kino. He spends the day telling neighbors that Kino has fled the village. From each visit, he returns with something borrowed that will help his brother-a few beans, some salt, and a knife.

That night, before the moon rises, Kino sets forth with his family. Once more, Juan Tomas asks Kino to consider giving up the pearl. But Kino answers that the pearl has become his soul, and that if he gives it up, he will lose his soul.

NOTE: THE PEARL AS KINO’S SOUL

Kino has become so obsessed with the pearl that nothing else matters. Every breath is devoted to making his dream come true, at the risk of placing his family in grave danger. In a material sense, a person dies when his soul leaves his body. If Kino were to throw away his soul, he would die spiritually as well. His soul-that is, the pearl and his dream-is all that holds him to life. Why do you think Kino considers the pearl as his soul? Do you see a religious meaning here? Has Kino substituted a dream of fulfillment on earth for the traditional Christian concept of salvation after death? Some readers think that the dream of the pearl has corrupted Kino’s true soul, driving him to sacrifice his family and reject his past. Others see the pearl as Kino’s only hope for dignity as a man. In this sense, the pearl would be a fitting metaphor for his soul.

CHAPTER VI

The moment has come for Kino and his family to leave their village in search of their dream. This chapter can best be understood when divided into three parts: the flight, the confrontation with the trackers, and the return.

Kino and Juana flee toward Loreto, the city where “the miraculous Virgin has her station.” They make certain, however, not to be seen in the town of La Paz where, two days earlier, they had led a procession to the doctor’s house. There is a strong wind this night as the couple go “out into the world.” (These words may remind you of Adam and Eve leaving the Garden of Eden in the Old Testament Book of Genesis.) Kino is grateful for the wind because it means the blowing sand will cover their tracks.

The flight has stirred something primitive and basic in Kino, as if part of his ancient Indian heritage has reawakened in him. His survival instinct (akin to animal instinct) has been revived, and he is wary of attackers.

Hour after hour the march proceeds until at last they come upon a road with deeply cut wheel tracks. Since the wind has died down, they decide to walk in the tracks as an added safety measure. A wagon cutting through the sand will easily erase their footsteps. Though the evils of the night are all around them, Kino hears the music of the pearl in his head. The screeching owls and laughing coyotes do not trouble him, since he has the knife for protection.

NOTE:

Kino and Juana’s march to Loreto resembles a pilgrimage to a religious shrine. In fact, Steinbeck notes that Loreto is the city where the Virgin Mary “has her station.” Kino’s passion for the pearl approaches an almost religious fervor. You’ve seen earlier that Kino and Juana combine ancient Indian and Catholic prayers, that they refer to God and the gods. Has the religion of the pearl taken over from both these sets of belief? Have all Kino’s gods abandoned him, or is it the other way around?

At dawn, after walking all night, they find a little hiding spot in a clearing near the road. Juana settles in to feed Coyotito while Kino returns to the road to sweep away their footprints. Before long, a cart creeks along the path, wiping out all the tracks. Relieved, Kino returns to Juana and shares some corncakes with her. While eating, Kino spots a little column of ants near his foot; he puts his foot in their way and watches them climb over it. Recall that in Chapter I, Kino did not interfere with the ants, despite his God-like position. Now he makes the ants climb over his foot, a difficult task for an ant. Is Steinbeck commenting on God’s indifference to human struggle? Would God create an obstacle as carelessly as Kino puts his foot in the ants’ path?

It is hot and they are far from the Gulf. Kino shows Juana the poisonous trees and bushes to avoid. In the midst of these warnings, Juana asks if they are being followed. Kino knows that this will happen and that it will prove the pearl’s worth. He looks into the pearl for his former vision of the future but sees only pictures of the past-the dead man, Juana’s beaten face, and the baby’s illness. In an effort to blot out these images, Kino asserts that their son will have a fine education. Yet all he sees is Coyotito’s face, “thick and feverish from medicine.” Alarmed by the vision, Kino hears the music of evil intermingled with that of the pearl.

 

 

NOTE: KINO’S VISIONS

Throughout the novel, Kino has seen visions in the pearl. In keeping with a cinematic technique, Steinbeck has used the pearl as a sort of mirror in which Kino sees visual reflections of his mind. When he is excited about the future, the vision shows his church wedding, fine clothes, and Coyotito going to school. Now that he is a pursued animal, Kino’s visions show only the dark, frightening aspects of life. What role do these visions play on the symbolic level of the story?

Kino falls asleep. Steinbeck then describes the impassive Juana, sitting with the flies buzzing around her facial cuts and bruises, watching Coyotito until his innocent playing makes her smile and respond.

The two of them together make clear the difficulty of their own and their people’s position. The Indians have little choice. If they submit meekly to oppression, they will be allowed to live as we see Juana living. They will be beaten any time they try to change things. But they will also be allowed a measure of innocent contentment as long as they do not peer into the future. (Do you remember how happy Kino was on that first morning? Juana is also happy watching the innocence of the baby.) If they do not submit, they will be crushed.

Kino sits up suddenly and whispers to Juana to be silent. He hears something and feels for his knife. In the distance, he sees two men on foot and one on horseback. They are trackers in search of the pearl, and Kino knows they will persist until the find him. He fears that careless footprints will reveal his whereabouts and that even his sweeping the footprints might give him away. Kino is now a hunted man.

NOTE:

Steinbeck is a master of suspense. One of his strengths as a novelist is the ability to keep the story moving. Even with its many descriptions, The Pearl maintains a rapid pace. As it moves to a conclusion, you can almost feel Kino and Juana running.

As the trackers approach, Kino plans to leap at the one with the rifle, then kill the other two. Juana muffles Coyotito’s noises while the trackers stop at the swept spot. After closely examining the sand, the trackers move on, look back, then continue their journey. Kino knows that they will return, and he panics like a trapped animal. Flight is the only solution. Finally, Juana provokes him into making a decision: they will go to the mountains.

They hurry frantically toward the high place, not bothering to cover their tracks. Time is crucial since the trackers will soon discover the broken twigs and crushed plants. Kino wants Juana to remain in the crevice while he plants false signs that will lead the trackers further up into the mountains. But she refuses to leave him. So they decide to move in zigzags instead of a straight line, leaving a multitude of signs to confuse the trackers.

The flight to the mountains suggests several meanings. One is that Kino’s action is a natural one. “And Kino ran for the high place, as nearly all animals do when they are pursued.” Another level of meaning comes from the image of the “naked granite mountains… standing monolithic against the sky.” The image is a reminder of the implacable forces of both nature and society against which the Indians must struggle to survive. Some readers find a reference to another, older story of a father who takes his son to the mountains. They see the story of Kino and Coyotito as a reversal of the Old Testament story of Abraham and Isaac. (See Note on page 50.)

As the sun falls, they climb higher to a bubbling spring where animals come to drink. Kino knows that the trackers, needing water, will also plan to come here. But that’s a risk he’ll have to take. From this altitude, Kino spots the trackers far down the slope. They appear no bigger than swarming ants.

NOTE: ANT IMAGERY

This is the third time that ants have appeared in The Pearl. Steinbeck uses them to show the parallels between animal and human behavior, and to portray the relative insignificance of individual human beings in the scheme of the universe.

Juana takes a supply of water and heads for a cave up above. Meanwhile, Kino runs up the mountain, then down again, “clawing and tearing at the ferns and wild grape” as he goes. By misleading the trackers into climbing higher, he and Juana will be able to escape down the mountain. His one fear is that Coyotito’s cries will reveal their location. But Juana says this won’t happen.

By dusk, the trackers arrive at the water spring. Kino watches them from the cave entrance and realizes that they intend to set up camp. This is bad news since he and Juana know they won’t be able to keep Coyotito quiet for the entire night. Kino has no choice but to kill the trackers.

Kino touches his son on the head, then feels Juana’s cheek. In preparation for the murder, Kino strips the last remains of civilization-his clothes-from his body. Kino’s naked, brown body now camouflages him. He must move slowly in order not to dislodge a stone. This requires great stamina-the courage of an animal on the prowl. As Kino reaches the trackers’ camp, his heart thunders as he prepares for the attack.

Just as Kino is about to strike, the moon makes him very visible. He hesitates for a moment-a tragic mistake-and the baby cries, drawing the attention of the tracker on duty. In a bitter play on the baby’s name, the trackers discuss whether it is a human cry or that of a coyote with her litter. The man with the rifle, taking no chances, raises the rifle to shoot. Kino springs, but he is a moment too late. The rifle goes off before Kino reaches him.

 

 

NOTE: ABRAHAM AND ISAAC

Some readers see the fate of Coyotito in the mountains as a reminder of the biblical story of Abraham and Isaac-in reverse. In that story, Abraham was instructed by God to take his son to the mountain and sacrifice him. When Abraham showed God that he was willing to make the sacrifice, God substituted a ram for Isaac and rewarded Abraham. “I will indeed bless you, and I will multiply your descendants as the stars of heaven and as the sand which is on the seashore. And your descendants shall possess the gate of their enemies…. “(Genesis 22:15-18) In The Pearl, the son is sacrificed; God has not interceded. And there seems little chance of Kino’s descendants overcoming their enemies. Unlike Abraham, however, Kino is denied the chance to save his people.

In a frenzy of rage, Kino takes on a machinelike quality and kills all three trackersone with his knife, one with a blow to the head with the rifle butt, and one slowly and deliberately with shots from the rifle. After the sounds of the killing fade away, Kino hears mournful sounds. It is Juana-something terrible has happened to Coyotito. His head has been blown away.

Steinbeck ends the chapter with a description of the sad return of Kino and Juana to their native village. Not only do the old people who actually saw them return remember it, but also the younger ones whose fathers and grandfathers told them about it. The event truly involved everyone in the village of La Paz.

It is late afternoon when the couple returns to La Paz (ironically, La Paz is Spanish for peace). Walking side by side, Kino carries the rifle and Juana supports Coyotito’s body in a bundle over her shoulder. Juana is “as remote and as removed as Heaven,” while Kino is “as dangerous as a rising storm.”

NOTE:

You will recall that, earlier in The Pearl, Juana walked behind her husband. Now they walk together, side by side. What do you see in this new sign of equality? Is it an indication that they are now removed from the old system that has oppressed them? Or is it a sign that they are no longer a part of their ancient Indian culture?

Kino and Juana walk through the town as if it weren’t there. Passing the ruins of their burned hut, they proceed to the water, where Kino takes the pearl, looks into it, and sees evil faces peering at him. The pearl has become ugly, “like a malignant growth.” Kino asks if Juana wants to throw it, but she tells him to do it. With that, he flings it into the Gulf, where it splashes in the distance, then drops to the bottom, its music fading away to nothing.

 

 

NOTE: SOME CONCLUSIONS

It is bitter irony that after all Kino suffers to keep the pearl, he throws it back into the ocean, where it is lost forever. How can we understand why Kino does this and what the meanings of this story of the poor fisherman might be?

Does Kino throw the pearl away because he feels guilty, as some readers suggest? If this is so, then Kino must feel that he has been greedy and that his greed has caused the death of Coyotito, all the other deaths, and much pain and suffering. The original version of the legend was clearly a warning about greed. Can you see a parallel warning in Kino’s final gesture?

We know there is rage in Kino at the end, because Steinbeck uses images like “a rising storm,” “a tower of fear,” and “a battle cry” in his description of Kino’s return. Do you think Kino throws the pearl away as a gesture of rage and disgust? Has he learned that Indians are not allowed to dream? Is the gesture a last protest against social oppression?

You might also conclude that Kino’s new understanding stretches even further than the boundaries of his own social system. It was not only the pearl buyers and the doctor and the tracker with the horse who betrayed him. Indians also worked against him. (He had to beg his brother for one day’s refuge!) It is possible that Kino at the end looks with disgust at humans in general, regardless of social position. From this point of view, the novel seems to be a depiction of the universal weakness and selfishness of people.

Still another conclusion is that Kino’s tragedy was not so much a victory of evil over good as it was a natural phenomenon. Throughout the novel, Steinbeck has used biological comparisons to suggest that no event happens to an individual alone. The natural order-of ants, fish, scorpions, and men-is a predatory one, and Kino just happens to get caught in it. Kino’s action might suggest that he is submitting to the inevitability of the natural (and social) order-to his fate.

There is no single answer. The meaning you take from this story of the fisherman and the pearl will depend on how you see Kino and on how you interpret the meaning of the pearl, on your own experiences, and on many other factors. Steinbeck does not point dramatically and conclusively to one interpretation. Some readers have seen this inconclusiveness as a weakness in the novel. Perhaps The Pearl is not conclusive, but it does serve as a kind of record of the conflicts experienced by people-conflicts within themselves and with the systems under which they live.

 

 

 

 

Themes in John Steinbeck’s The Pearl

Price of Wisdom.

Juana understands far sooner than Kino the danger in possessing the pearl. “It will destroy us all,” she cries out to him. “Even our son.” After Kino and Juana’s way of life has been obliterated—their house burned and Kino’s canoe smashed—Juan Tomás attempts to save them from further destruction. “There is a devil in this pearl,” he tells Kino. “You should have sold it and passed on the devil. Perhaps you can still sell it and buy peace for yourself.” Kino refuses, clinging to the pearl although he perceives it differently: “I have it … And I will keep it … now it is my misfortune and my life and I will keep it.” When Kino is caught up in dreams of the future, he beats Juana for attempting to throw the pearl into the Gulf; at the conclusion of the story, it is Kino who returns the pearl to the sea. Juana stands beside him, the bloodied body of their dead son wrapped in her shawl—a terrible price to pay for Kino’s acquiring wisdom.

What, however, is the wisdom of The Pearl, if indeed it is a parable? The question remains unanswered in the story, but a passage from the text suggests an interpretation:

For it is said that humans are never satisfied; that you give them one thing and they want something more. And this is said in disparagement, whereas it is one of the greatest talents the species has and one that has made it superior to animals that are satisfied with what they have.

The lesson inherent in Kino’s possessing “the Pearl of the World” may be found in this characteristic of human nature: the desire for more. One of man’s “greatest talents,” the story suggests, is also a curse that creates dissatisfaction and destroys contentment.

Before finding the pearl, Kino lives a peaceful and secure existence, in harmony with the natural world; he finds happiness and fulfillment in the simple routines of his life—waking up beside Juana, listening to “the little splash of morning waves on the beach,” watching Coyotito sleep in his cradle, and standing on the beach before dawn to watch the sun rise out of the Gulf. The morning before Kino finds the pearl is “a morning like other mornings and yet perfect among mornings.” He lives within “the Song of the Family”; it rises sometimes “to an aching chord that caught the throat, saying this is safety, this is warmth, this is the Whole.”

When the pearl comes into his possession, Kino forfeits his old life for new dreams; he gains nothing and loses almost everything of real value. When he and Juana return to their village with Coyotito’s body, they have been transformed by grief and seem “removed from human experience.” The pearl, once luminous and enchanting, now seems ugly and gray to Kino, “like a malignant growth.” Standing at the water’s edge, he flings it into the sea “with all his might.” Readers find many meanings in The Pearl, as Steinbeck intended, but the primary truth of the story seems to be a warning as much as a lesson—to be aware of the human drive to want more than we have and to appreciate and protect what is truly valuable in our lives before it is lost.

Before the narrative begins, an introductory paragraph identifies the story of Kino and the great pearl as having been told in the town so many times in the past that it has become a part of every man’s heart and mind. In the story are “only good and bad things and black and white things and good and evil things and no in between anywhere.” Thus the story is a morality tale, a parable perhaps from which readers derive personal meaning. In regard to literary themes, The Pearl offers many themes for readers to consider; each theme develops organically from the setting and raises universal questions about human nature and human experience. That said, however, I think the most important one is this:

Greed and Corruption

As the word spreads that Kino has found a huge pearl, the news of his discovery “stirred up something infinitely black and evil in the town”; greed is a “black distillate” comparable to the poison of a scorpion. It infects rich and poor alike. The beggars in the street, the merchants, the pearl buyers, the doctor, and the local priest—all think of the pearl in terms of how they might profit from Kino’s possessing it. Greed drives some people in the town to commit acts of violence against Kino in attempting to steal the pearl. Blood is shed.

Corruption fueled by greed is evident in individual lives and in society at large. The doctor is corrupted by his love of money and fine possessions; in a silk robe, he sits in his beautiful house, sipping chocolate from a china cup, while he refuses to aid Coyotito, who has been stung by a scorpion. The baby is only an Indian, after all, and the doctor, he insists, is not a “veterinary”; moreover, Coyotito’s father, Kino, has nothing of value to give to the doctor in return for his treating the sick child. Later, the doctor uses his knowledge of medicine to make a recovering Coyotito ill in order to “save” him and gain access to Kino’s pearl. In the cold, calculated perversion of his profession, the doctor exhibits his moral corruption as a physician and as a human being.

The doctor’s attitude toward the native Indian population is rooted in centuries of colonial conquest and subjugation. He is “of a race which for nearly four hundred years had beaten and starved and robbed and despised Kino’s race, and frightened it too ….” The consequence of this history is a corrupt society determined to keep Kino’s people imprisoned by poverty and ignorance. From the pearl buyers in La Paz (secret representatives of a single buyer) who conspire to pay the Indians as little as possible for their pearls to the priest whose sermons admonish the Indians to accept their station in life, the institutions in society work in concert to deny freedom and justice to every member of Kino’s race. In doing so, those in power enrich themselves at the expense of the poor and the powerless.

Greed

Before the pearl, Kino was content with his wife, Juana, and their child. He reflected on how lucky he felt to have such a cheerful and cooperative wife. As long as he had his canoe, he felt like he could provide for his family. The only reason he wanted the pearl was so that he could get medical treatment for his son, but after his son heals, Kino begins thinking about other things he might buy. His friends and neighbors can no longer be trusted as even the priest tries to figure out how to get a share of the profit. When Juana sees that the greed surrounding the pearl is destroying them, she tries to get rid of it. However, Kino catches her. ‘Her arm was up to throw when he leaped at her and caught her arm and wrenched the pearl from her. He struck her in the face with his clenched fist and she fell among the boulders, and he kicked her in the side.’ Kino once valued Juana as his most valued asset, but because of his greed, she became the target of his disgust to the point that he beats her.

Obsession.

In Chapter II, Kino dives for pearls in a desperate attempt to find one of value with which to pay the doctor to treat Coyotito for the scorpion sting that could kill him. Instead, Coyotito’s condition improves, the result of Juana’s treating his wound with an “old remedy,” and Kino finds not just a valuable pearl but “the Pearl of the World.” With these two events, Kino’s life changes dramatically. In the magnificence of the huge, perfect pearl, Kino envisions a future unlike any he had ever dared to imagine; looking into the glowing surface of the pearl, he sees “dreams form”—new clothes for his family, his and Juana’s wedding in the church, a harpoon and a rifle for himself, and most of all, an education for Coyotito. Kino’s contentment with the “Song of the Family” is now lost in “the music of the pearl” that sings with “triumph” in him.

Becoming a rich man changes Kino’s life immediately in ways he does not anticipate as “shadowy figures” attempt to steal the pearl. He is attacked, his home is invaded, and he kills a man in self-defense when he is attacked a second time. When Juana tries to throw the pearl back into the sea, believing that it is evil and will destroy them, Kino beats her with animal savagery and then is sickened by what he has done to her. For Kino, possessing the pearl with all its promises has become an obsession; he pursues it until his and Juana’s old life is destroyed and their baby is dead.

Despite the initial death and destruction the pearl brings into his and Juana’s life, Kino will not give it up. Rather than sell it to the corrupt pearl buyers for essentially nothing, he chooses to defy the system and sell it in the capital for a fair price; after his house has been burned and his canoe destroyed, he still refuses to sell the pearl in La Paz. “This pearl has become my soul,” Kino says. “If I give it up I shall lose my soul.” Leaving the old life behind, he takes Juana and Coyotito on a journey to the capital, leaving the trail and fleeing into the mountains when they are tracked by three men who will kill them for the pearl. Kino prevails over the trackers, killing them all, but his obsession with the pearl ends only when he realizes Coyotito has died, the innocent victim of a rifle shot. Returning to the village with Juana by his side, Kino throws the pearl into the sea.

 

Nature of Power.

Power vs. powerlessness is a theme that runs throughout The Pearl. Kino’s race has been subjugated for centuries by European colonialism. The oyster bed where Kino finds the great pearl is the same bed “that had raised the King of Spain to be a great power in Europe in past years, had helped to pay for his wars, and had decorated the churches for his soul’s sake.” Kino’s conquered people have remained powerless for four hundred years, “since first the strangers came with arguments and authority and gunpowder to back up both.” Once established, the subjugation of the Indians has been perpetuated by society’s ensuring that they remain poor and ignorant. Any desire they might have for a better life is suppressed by the church; the priest in La Paz teaches that each person must “remain faithful” to his station in life, assigned by God, in order to protect the universe from “the assaults of Hell.”

Kino is well aware of how powerless he is in life. After finding the pearl, his dreams of the future include buying a rifle, a weapon that gives a man power. More significantly, however, he dreams of an education for his son. If Coyotito could read, “the boy would know what things were in the books and what things were not.” Kino understands that real power lies in knowledge: “My son will read and open the books, and my son will write and know writing. And my son will make numbers, and these things will make us free because he will know—he will know and through him we will know.” The pearl means more than wealth to Kino; it offers an end to being trapped by ignorance. “This is our one chance,” he tells Juana. “Our son must go to school. He must break out of the pot that holds us in.” In defying the pearl buyers and challenging the system they represent, Kino initiates a power struggle that ultimately ends in Coyotito’s death.

Pride is also an important theme.

Kino’s subjugation by society has not destroyed his pride or self-respect. Only for fear of Coyotito’s dying does he ask, hat in hand, for the doctor’s assistance. When he is turned away with an obvious lie by the doctor’s servant, Kino feels so deeply humiliated he is overcome by rage. He stands at the gate to the doctor’s house for “a long time,” puts his “suppliant hat on his head,” and then strikes the gate with “a crushing blow.” He will not consent to being marginalized; his pride will not allow him to endure passively the doctor’s insult.

Kino’s pride is manifested again in his confrontation with the pearl buyers in La Paz. Knowing that he is being cheated, Kino refuses to sell his pearl to them; in declaring that he will sell the pearl in the capital, Kino asserts his independence and refuses to be humiliated again. Later, when Kino’s house is burned and his canoe destroyed, the loss is more than material. To Juan Tomás Kino says, “[a]n insult has been put on me that is deeper than my life.” Kino’s pride, as much as his desire to secure money for Coyotito’s future, demands that he challenge the system that holds him down. He has no choice, for as he tells Juana, “I am a man.”

In ”The Pearl” by John Steinbeck, the theme of the destructive power of greed is explored as the characters navigate their personal desires, destiny, and racism. We will explore the devastating effect of Kino’s sudden change from being poor but happy, to possibly instantly wealthy.

Sin Brings Destruction

John Steinbeck’s The Pearl is a parable that demonstrates the destructive force of greed. The characters in the story begin as poverty-stricken, but happy. By the end of the story, they have been destroyed by their own greed. It begins when Coyotito, Kino and Juana’s son, is stung by a deadly scorpion, but the doctor refuses to treat him because the family is Indian and has no money. Kino dives for pearls to make money to help his son, but by the time he comes upon a large, magnificent pearl, Coyotito’s health improves. Kino begins to think how he can better the lives of himself and his family, but the greedy pearl buyers try to cheat him. The greed that creeps into the entire city turns friends into enemies. Over time, Kino loses everything for the sake of the pearl. Had Kino continued to remain grateful for his blessings rather than always pursuing more, the pearl would have lost its power to destroy him. The sub-themes of destiny and racism against the indigent people by the European colonists is also addressed. The theme is the main point addressed in a literary work.

Destiny

Kino has been taught his entire life that it is wrong to try to better himself beyond the position in which God placed him. As a child, his father taught him that the reason why pearl divers kept being cheated by agents who promised to get the divers more money for their product at the capital is because ‘…each man and woman is like a soldier sent by God to guard some part of the castle of the Universe. And some are in the ramparts and some far deep in the darkness of the walls. But each one must remain faithful to his post and must not go running about, else the castle is in danger from the assaults of Hell.’ Despite his brother reminding him of this story, Kino persists on getting the best price for his pearl. Kino’s attempt to ‘leave his station’ results in complete destruction of Kino’s family.

Further, the pearl itself is destined to be in the ocean. Terrible things continue to happen to Kino’s family until Kino finally realizes that he needs to return the pearl to its home.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The Pearl Topic Tracking: Evil

Topic Tracking: Evil

Chapter 1

Evil 1: Evil is introduced in the form of the scorpion that stings Coyotito. Until that moment, Kino’s home is peaceful, filled with the Song of Family. But when he spots the scorpion dangling above Coyotito’s bed, Kino recognizes the strains of the Song of Evil that recur throughout the story. The Song of Evil comes when anything threatens the family, and Kino does all that he can to destroy the evil and hush the sinister melody of the Song of Evil so that the Song of Family can return.

Evil 2: Kino hears the Song of Evil again when he and Juana stand at the gates of the doctor’s house. Kino knows that the doctor is of the race that has abused Kino’s own people for four hundred years; despite the fact that they need the doctor’s help, Kino knows that the doctor is still the enemy. He will try to cheat them or abuse them as his people have always done to Kino’s own race.

Chapter 3

Evil 3: The buyers are out to take advantage of Kino and his pearl. Their goal is to cheat him and ruin his plans of happiness and peace for his family.

Evil 4: The doctor comes to take advantage of Kino’s ignorance by making Coyotito sick and pretending that his illness is the result of the scorpion sting. Because Kino and Juana are uneducated, they are afraid to doubt the doctor’s word, and he uses it to profit from their newfound wealth. He pretends as if he doesn’t know of Kino’s pearl, yet the only reason he has condescended to treat an Indian baby was to try and seek out where Kino might be hiding it. The pearl brings evil in the form of greed: many seek to take advantage of Kino’s newfound wealth.

Chapter 4

Evil 5: The buyers work together to cheat Kino of his pearl and intend to give him very little money for it. They have planned to convince him that his pearl is worthless and pretend that they’re doing him a favor by taking it off his hands. The buyers are aware of the pearl’s tremendous value, and intend to con the “uneducated native;” he will trust them because they are the “experts.”

Evil 6: Kino believes that his friends will help protect him from the evils that might befall him because of the pearl, but instead of finding protection with his neighbors, he is attacked. His pearl has turned friends into enemies; they are jealous and envy the pearl of the world that Kino has found.

 

Chapter 5

Evil 7: The pearl turns Juana and Kino against one another. The evil power of the pearl is strong enough to inspire violence between them. Juana and Kino are so close to one another that conversation isn’t even needed, and yet the pearl is able to divide them. It has brought injury and danger, and now it pulls Juana and Kino away from each other.

Evil 8: Kino is forced to kill a man to defend himself and the pearl. Then Kino’s hut is burned after someone searching for the pearl has ransacked it. Those who covet the great pearl destroy everything that Kino and Juana have in their attempts to find it. The Pearl is making everyone turn against them, and Kino and Juana know that they are no longer safe in their village, and must escape.

Chapter 6

Evil 9: Kino looks into the pearl expecting to see visions of the dreams he had the night after he found the pearl, but the only things he sees are the horrible things that have happened to his family since he found the pearl. He begins to realize the evil the pearl contains, but still refuses to give it up.

Evil 10: In a dream, Kino has a premonition of danger. He wakes and discovers trackers are following his family. He knows that they will find them and kill them for the pearl. He feels trapped because there is no way for them to escape the trackers.

Evil 11: In the struggle to protect his family and survive, Kino turns into a killing machine. He attacks, swiftly and brutally, killing all three men who were tracking his family in a quest to steal his great pearl. Kino has been forced to do terrible things to survive and to protect the pearl from being stolen. The pearl’s value has made it evil.

The Pearl Topic Tracking: Family

Chapter 1

Family 1: Kino hears the Song of Family in each routine of his life. Although their life is simple, the rhythm of their habits and the sounds of each part of their lives make up a song that is important to Kino. It fills his ears and he is content with the safe and sturdy song. Kino will protect this song and the family it represents because it is all he has and he loves it.

Chapter 2

Family 2: Kino inherited his canoe, his only thing of value, from his father and grandfather, and it makes him proud. It is his legacy and he takes great care of it because it is the tool he uses to provide for his family. The canoe is the only inheritance he has beyond the songs of his people, and Kino loves his canoe.

Chapter 3

Family 3: Kino cannot take a chance that the doctor is lying to him about Coyotito’s health because he doesn’t want his child to suffer. The doctor takes advantage of a parent’s concern for his child to turn a profit. He knows that Kino will trust enough in the doctor’s knowledge to allow him to treat Coyotito because Kino is unsure that the baby is healed.

Chapter 4

Family 4: Kino won’t give up the pearl even though it’s brought nothing but pain because he sees its value as a chance to provide for his son’s education, allowing him to escape their simple life. Kino does not want those with a formal education to take advantage of Coyotito, like they do to other uneducated natives. He wants more for his son and his family than their simple life, and the pearl is the key to those aspirations.

Chapter 5

Family 5: The pearl that Kino expected to protect his family is now tearing it apart. Juana warns Kino that the pearl will destroy their family, but Kino refuses to believe it because he thinks that the wealth the pearl offers is the best way to protect his family. He thinks that by keeping the pearl, he is doing what is best for his family, but the pearl is only pushing him and Juana apart. If it is dividing them, it cannot protect the family from harm. It only makes life more precarious for them.

Family 6: Juan Tomas helps his brother in every way that he can, by diverting the neighbors and gathering supplies for Kino’s journey. Juan knows that the pearl has brought evil onto his brother’s family, and he does all the he can to help them escape from it, but he cannot convince Kino to get rid of the pearl.

Chapter 6

Family 7: As Kino, Juana, and Coyotito are making their escape, Kino believes that his family will triumph because they seem to be getting away. He begins to believe that everything will work out; the pearl promises security and peace, and they will escape the bad luck that has plagued them since he found the pearl. He believes that now his family will prosper.

Family 8: Kino considers giving himself up to the trackers because there is no way that he and his family can get away from them. The thought momentarily defeats him, until Juana reminds him that the trackers will kill her and Coyotito as well, and that prods Kino into action.

Family 9: In the midst of danger, their survival depends on keeping the baby quiet through the night. If he cries, their hiding place is given away, but if he can keep silent, perhaps Kino will be able to disarm the men and secure his family’s escape.

Family 10: Juana was right from the beginning — the pearl did destroy their son. The trackers who were following them kill Coyotito. Kino’s insistence that the pearl would find peace and happiness for his family costs Coyotito his life and leaves a hole in their family that would not have been there had Kino never found the pearl.

The Pearl Topic Tracking: Superstition

Chapter 1

Superstition 1: When Coyotito is in danger of being stung by the scorpion, Juana mutters an ancient magic incantation and then some Hail Marys to protect her son. The ancient, superstitious religion of the peasantry has been mixed with the Catholicism of the Western upper class. Juana appeals to native gods and the Western God, uncertain of which holds the true power. This mingling of a polytheistic religion with Roman Catholicism is common in native countries that are colonized. The natives combine the gods of their own religion with the figures of Catholicism. Elements of their original faith remain, such as incantations like the one Juana mutters.

Chapter 2

Superstition 2: Juana prays that Kino will find a pearl so that they can have Coyotito’s scorpion sting treated by the doctor. She prays in an attempt to force from the gods the luck she and Kino need to take care of Coyotito. Finding a pearl of value is strictly luck. Pearls themselves are accidental, and finding a pearl is considered a gift from the gods or God.

Superstition 3: When Kino finds the large shell, he is reluctant to open it first because he doesn’t want to show the gods or God that he wants the pearl so much. He believes that if he wants it too much, it won’t happen, and so he waits to open the shell.

Chapter 3

Superstition 4: Kino worries that the gods will get revenge against him if he finds success. He knows that the gods hate when men plan for success, and now that Kino is making plans, he fears that something will come and rob him of this opportunity.

Superstition 5: Juana believes that the pearl is cursed because it has brought an intruder into their home. She warns Kino that it will destroy them all, including their son, if they don’t throw it back into the sea, but Kino won’t listen. His desire to use the pearl to educate his son and make a better life for his family is too strong. He ignores Juana’s warning and keeps the pearl.

 

 

 

Chapter 4

Superstition 6: Juana still believes that the pearl is cursed, and she asks Kino to throw it back into the sea again, but he refuses. He insists that it is their only chance and he won’t give it up. Juana, however, knows that the pearl will only bring more evil and disaster to them, and decides she must take matters into her own hands, and get rid of the pearl.

Chapter 5

Superstition 7: Juana decides that if Kino won’t get rid of the cursed pearl, she will. She takes the pearl and tries to throw it back into the sea to protect her family from any more danger, but Kino stops her. Her fear of the pearl is well-founded; Kino beats her for trying to get rid of the pearl, further proving that the pearl is cursed and evil. It has made Kino attack and harm the one person he loves most.

Superstition 8: Juan warns Kino that the pearl is cursed and that he must get rid of it to pass the evil on to someone else. He hopes that Kino can sell it soon so that the evil of the pearl will not destroy his family before Kino can rid himself of it.

Chapter 6

Superstition 9: When Kino looks into the pearl and sees only the tragedies that have befallen his family, he begins to believe that the pearl is cursed, but he still cannot part with it.

Superstition 10: Kino and Juana throw the pearl back into the sea after Coyotito is killed by the trackers. The cursed pearl has brought about the death of their child and forced Kino to kill to survive and protect his family. The great pearl has brought nothing but misery to Kino and his family, and together they throw the cursed object back into the sea. As it sinks, the music of the pearl turns to a whisper and then disappears.

 

The Pearl Major Characters

Kino: Kino is a young pearl diver who feels his obligation to his family very strongly. He knows his place as the provider and works hard to supply for his family’s needs. He finds The Pearl of the World and expects to use it to pay for his son, Coyotito’s, education. He also dreams that with the pearl he can buy his family new clothes and a rifle for himself, but the pearl only brings him trouble. His neighbors turn on him and try to steal the pearl from him and he has to leave his home after killing an attacker. Although it was self-defense, he knows that his family is in danger. He and Juana run away with Coyotito, but trackers follow them. He knows that they are after the pearl and that they will catch his family, so he sneaks into their camp and kills them all. In the shooting that goes on in the camp, a stray bullet kills his son. He and Juana return to La Paz with their dead child and they throw the pearl into the sea.

Juana: Juana is Kino’s strong, quiet wife who takes care of her family. The rhythm of her motions is the Song of Family for Kino. She obeys her husband in most instances, but when she realizes that the pearl is only bringing trouble to her family, she urges him to throw it away. He refuses, and while he sleeps, she takes the pearl to the beach and is about to throw it in, when Kino catches her and beats her for taking the pearl. She accompanies her husband out of La Paz and urges him again to get rid of the cursed pearl, but he won’t until their son, Coyotito, is accidentally shot by a tracker’s rifle. After the tragedy, Kino and Juana walk side by side back to La Paz and throw the pearl into the sea together.

Coyotito: Coyotito is Kino and Juana’s first-born child who is stung by a scorpion and needs medical treatment. Unfortunately, the local doctor will not treat the baby because Kino has no money. When the doctor hears about Kino’s pearl, he comes to treat Coyotito. Kino expects that the pearl will purchase great things for his family, the greatest being an education for his son so that they cannot be cheated by the merchants and the other upper class citizens of La Paz who have taken advantage of Kino’s people for four hundred years. But that great dream is destroyed when Coyotito is killed by a gunshot while Kino is killing the trackers who are following them. Kino killed them to protect his family and the pearl and the dream of the future that the pearl provided, but his dream and his family are destroyed when Coyotito dies. Kino and Juana return to La Paz with Coyotito’s small body and throw the pearl into the sea.

Minor Characters

Juan Tomas: Juan Tomas is Kino’s older brother. Juan gives Kino advice about selling the pearl. He walks beside Kino when they travel to the pearl buyers. Later, he warns his brother that by refusing to sell his pearl to the buyers, Kino is defying their way of life and putting his family in danger. When Kino seeks refuge with Juan Tomas, he is granted it. Juan gathers supplies that Kino and Juana will need on their journey and protects his brother’s family until they depart.

Apolonia: Apolonia is Juan Tomas’ wife. She follows her husband as he escorts Kino into town to sell the pearl, and she raises a formal mourning when Kino’s hut burns and no sign of them is found.

Doctor: The doctor is wealthier than the peasants of La Paz, and he scoffs at natives, like Kino and Juana, who seek his treatment without money. When Kino and Juana brought Coyotito to the doctor to heal the scorpion sting, he refused them. Later, when he heard that Kino had found the Pearl of the World, he came to their hut to treat the baby. He pretended not to know that Kino had found a great pearl, so that when Kino talked about it, he could watch to see if his eyes went to the spot where it was buried in the hut. Sure enough, Kino gave its location away and that night someone came to his hut to dig out the pearl, but Kino had since moved it. Kino stabbed at the intruder, but did not make a fatal swing and the intruder (possibly the doctor) hit him in the head and then escaped.

Trackers: Two trackers and a man with a rifle followed Kino and Juana out of La Paz. Kino saw them coming while Juana hid in the woods. When Kino realized that they were tracking him, he and Juana hurried up to the smooth rocks of the mountains so that they would be harder to follow. When night fell, the trackers were just below the cave in which Kino, Juana, and Coyotito were hiding. Kino sneaked down the sheer face of the mountain and into their camp and killed them all. In the chaos, Coyotito was shot and killed.

The Priest: The priest was the local religious authority, and when he learned of Kino’s pearl, he hoped that he could convince Kino to use his wealth for the good of the church. He made a visit to Kino’s hut that night to talk to Kino about his duty to give part of his wealth to God, who had ultimately created the pearl.

The Buyers: The pearl buyers of the town acted as if they worked for themselves, but they were actually all controlled by one man. The pretense of competition among the pearl buyers made it easier to cheat the Indians out of their pearls. By putting on a show of competing over the best price, the man in charge and the buyers were adept at ripping off the natives. When they told Kino that his great pearl was worth only a thousand pesos, he got angry and left to take the pearl to the capital. That night, Kino’s family was attacked in their home, and he believed that the buyers were responsible for it.

The Pearl Objects/Places

Scorpion: The scorpion introduces the Song of Evil for Kino because it threatens the safety of his family. When the scorpion stings Coyotito before Kino can get to it, it introduces pain and panic.

Song of Family: The Song of Family is the rhythm that Kino hears in the life of his family, and in their routines. It’s the music of their life together and reflects their peaceful interaction with one another, even in silence.

Song of Evil: The Song of Evil is the thundering that he hears whenever something threatens his family. The Song of Evil plays when the scorpion threatens his son and the thieves attack his family.

Song of the Pearl that Might Be: The Song of the Pearl that Might Be is what Kino hears when he is diving for pearls. This is the sound of his own hope that he will find a great pearl that will provide his family with luxury and peace.

The Pearl of the World: Kino found a great and beautiful pearl, The Pearl of the World, and it created its own music in his life. He hoped to use the pearl to buy his family new clothes and a rifle for himself. He also wanted to send Coyotito to school so that he could learn to read and become educated. Coyotito could then know what was in the great books, and could no longer be cheated by wealthy, educated people. Despite the high hopes Kino had for his family after finding the pearl, it brought them only grief. Neighbors began trying to steal it in the night and Kino killed a villager who attacked him for the pearl. To protect his family, Kino is forced to escape the village. Trackers, lusting after the pearl, followed Kino and his family. Kino, knowing the trackers will kill him and his family, attacked. During the fight, Coyotito was shot by the tracker’s rifle. The pearl that once promised peace and prosperity brought Kino and Juana only tragedy. They returned to La Paz and threw it back into the sea.

Kino’s Canoe: Kino’s canoe was the one thing of value he owned until he found the pearl. He inherited the canoe from his father and grandfather and took excellent care of it. Kino used the boat to provide for his family. After he found the pearl, someone put a hole in the bottom of his canoe, forcing Kino and Juana to escape La Paz on foot. Kino was sad at the loss of his boat because it was a part of his heritage.

STYLE AND LANGUAGE USE

The Pearl is a short novel. Its plot is well defined, the action moves forward within a structure of six chapters, it has a core of central characters, and the suspense builds as the story moves along. Readers say the sentences reflect the spoken quality of the New Testament-perhaps an influence of Steinbeck’s early reading of the Bible. The author has chosen his words with precision, a skill he developed in part by working as a journalist.

In the preface to The Pearl you learn that the story will be told in the form of a parable. A parable is a short work, usually fictitious, that illustrates a lesson, often on the subject of good and evil. This is reminiscent of the New Testament, where many of Christ’s lessons are told in parable form. The biblical tone is underscored by Steinbeck’s mention in the preface of the struggle between good and evil.

Also, like the Bible (and traditional folktales), The Pearl contains little dialogue. The characters speak infrequently, but their thoughts and feelings are made clear through Steinbeck’s powerful descriptions. He excelled at selecting the exact word and correct turn of phrase-and his lack of dialogue emphasizes the quiet intensity and simple manner of his characters. Their nonverbal quality helps to reinforce their discomfort in the presence of the sophisticated doctor, priest, and pearl buyers, who are experts at using language.

The Pearl contains many scientific metaphors and similes-figures of speech used to compare one object with another in order to suggest a similarity between them. For example, the Indian village is compared to the habitat of a colonial animal.

POINT OF VIEW

The Pearl is told by a third-person narrator who stands outside the action and knows everything about the characters and their actions. The narrator is said to be omniscient, which means all-knowing. In the introduction and in the final passage of the novel, the narrator speaks of events that happened long ago and have become important through repetition: “And because the story has been told so often, it has taken root in every man’s mind.”

For most of the novel, the narrator abandons the past and takes you directly into the present. This is the advantage of his omniscience: he can move back and forth, from past to present to future, whenever a different focus will help you understand his story. Perhaps the most gripping narrative in the present is the one where Kino attacks and kills the trackers. In this passage, you feel you are part of the action-as if you were standing next to Kino.

The movement from distant narration of the past to close-up narration that seems to recount the present may seem inconsistent. But remember that Steinbeck is trying to tell an old tale in the form of a novel. He needs a narrator who can communicate both the immediate action of the novel’s plot and the universal nature of the tale (or parable).

The third-person narrative is also flexible in its focus on characters. It allows you to change perspectives and to judge the characters for their individual thoughts and actions. The thoughts and actions of characters are not filtered through the intelligence of one person, as in a first-person narration, but are presented reasonably objectively and with the wide-ranging facts available to an omniscient narrator.

FORM AND STRUCTURE

An important novel can usually be interpreted on many levels, and this is certainly the case with The Pearl. The book’s structure is as simple as the legend, or folktale, on which it is based: It begins and ends with Kino as an impoverished fisherman who, in the process of pursuing his dream, is nearly destroyed. Readers often speak of The Pearl as an allegory or a parable.

An allegory is a story meant to teach a spiritual or moral lesson, in which the characters and action symbolize abstract concepts. A parable is a short allegory, which has long been associated with the New Testament. Christ used parables to teach moral lessons (for example, the Good Samaritan and the lesson of the Talents).

Some readers see The Pearl as an allegory of social oppression. In this view, Juan Tomas is a symbol of the ancient Indian wisdom, Kino is a symbol of the Indians’ desire for freedom, and the doctor, priest, and pearl buyers are symbols of the oppressive Spanish culture. The pearl represents Kino’s means of escaping oppression, but the powerful forces of the social system are too strong for even the pearl to overcome. When Kino throws his great treasure back into the sea, the message seems to be that the poor Indian doesn’t have a chance.

Other readers see in The Pearl a strong allegorical message about human greed. Kino becomes the symbol of the poor but happy man who is destroyed when he begins to want the things of the material world. The pearl that was supposed to bring happiness and fulfillment brings only destruction. At the end both Kino’s dream and his son are dead.

In the original story on which Steinbeck based his own, the fisher sees the pearl as a means of saving his soul through the purchase of Roman Catholic masses “sufficient to pop him out of Purgatory like a squeezed watermelon seed.” (Purgatory, in Catholicism, is the temporary place or condition where the repentant sinner is absolved after death, and where mortal sins are punished before the soul can attain salvation.) When the fisher decides to throw the pearl back, he feels like a “free man” despite the insecurity of both his soul and his future.

In the novel, Kino says that the pearl has become his soul. This closely echoes the Gospel According to Matthew in the New Testament, in which the Kingdom of Heaven is compared to a “pearl of great price.” If the pearl is seen as a symbol of salvation, what is the meaning of its loss at the end? Is Kino, like the fisherman of the original story, lucky to return to a state of simple human happiness and poverty? Or is he denied a soul as punishment for his reliance on material things, or for his daring to overreach his lowly status?

In his preface to The Pearl, Steinbeck says: “If the story is a parable, perhaps everyone takes his own meaning from it….” It’s up to you to decide whether the
story is a parable, and what meaning you derive from it. In order to be effective, the true parable or allegory must attempt to resolve a conflict in such a way that a consistent interpretation or conclusion can be drawn. Do you think there is one such consistent meaning? Or, do you think the novel can be interpreted on many levels?

 

. A STEP BEYOND

TESTS AND ANSWERS

TEST 1

_____ 1. The songs in The Pearl represent

  1. unspoken feelings and emotions
    B. domination by the Spanish
    C. the poetry Kino has inherited from his ancestors

_____ 2. Which of the following similes does Steinbeck use to describe the relationship of the townspeople?

  1. Each man’s life is like a station in God’s army.
    B. The pearl is like a curse.
    C. The town is like a colonial animal.

_____ 3. After finding the pearl in the path, Juana didn’t throw it back in the water because

  1. she was afraid of getting hit again
    B. Kino stopped her again
    C. she knew the old way was gone when she saw the dead man
 
Your browser does not support the IFRAME tag.

_____ 4. Before Kino finds the pearl, his life might be described as

  1. filled with want and despair
    B. simple and relatively content
    C. monotonous and uncomfortable

_____ 5. The image of big fish eating little fish is symbolic of the relationship between the

  1. Spanish and the Indians
    B. pearl buyers and their unseen boss
    C. trackers and Kino

_____ 6. Which of the following religious references is not appropriate to The Pearl?

  1. the Abraham and Isaac story
    B. the miracle of the loaves and the fishes
    C. the expulsion from the Garden of Eden

_____ 7. When Kino punches the doctor’s gate, you can tell he

  1. has planned the action of protest from the beginning
    B. has been provoked to this kind of violent expression before
    C. surprises himself with the violence of his reaction

_____ 8. In the story of the two villagers who had gone to the capital to sell pearls, it was certain that they had

  1. fled with the profits
    B. been in the employ of the Spanish
    C. never been seen again that

_____ 9. The doctor’s actions are meant to suggest that

  1. this is the way the Spanish generally treat the Indians
    B. he is incompetent and has no business treating the baby
    C. he is different from the other Spanish

_____ 10. Which of the following is not true about Kino’s canoe?

  1. It was passed down to him from his grandfather.
    B. It had been blessed by the priest.
    C. It was the one thing of value owned by Kino.
  2. Why is Kino’s dream of educating Coyotito such a dangerous one?
  3. What role does Juan Tomas play?
  4. Explain the symbolism of the pearl.

TEST 2

_____ 1. When Kino said, “I am a man,” Juana knew this meant that he

  1. no longer needed her
    B. would leave the old way of life
    C. was half insane and half god

_____ 2. Steinbeck uses which of the following images in his description of the Indian trackers to suggest that they were dehumanized?

  1. excited dogs
    B. crying coyotes
    C. scavenger birds

_____ 3. Kino beats Juana for stealing the pearl because

  1. she has disobeyed him
    B. her actions have threatened his dream
    C. she has overstepped her place as a woman

_____ 4. From his experiences in the world, Kino learns that the

  1. established system is the best way of doing things
    B. potential for evil lies within everyone
    C. priest was right all along

_____ 5. Which of the following images does Steinbeck use to describe Kino and Juana when they return to the village at the end?

  1. scorpions
    B. scuttling crabs
    C. towers of darkness

_____ 6. The priest’s visit to Kino’s hut is unusual because

  1. the priest rarely visited the Indians
    B. Kino was not Roman Catholic
    C. it was Sunday
 
Your browser does not support the IFRAME tag.

_____ 7. Which of the following is central to the theme of appearance vs. reality?

  1. the mirages on the Gulf
    B. the image of the mountains
    C. the deceit of the pearl buyers

_____8. Whenever Kino deals with the Spanish, he feels

  1. disgust and superiority
    B. pity and contempt
    C. fear and anger

_____ 9. Juan Tomas hesitates to help Kino because he

  1. thinks Kino is wrong to challenge the system
    B. is afraid the trouble caused by the pearl will spread to him
    C. believes helping is not part of Indian customs

_____ 10. The extensive use of animal imagery in Chapter VI suggests that Kino

  1. has been dehumanized by the ordeal of the pearl
    B. is now outside of the natural world
    C. is worth less than an animal
  2. Choose one biological comparison from The Pearl and explain its use.
  3. Some readers see The Pearl as an allegory on greed. Support or refute this interpretation, citing examples from the novel.
  4. How does the point of view (narrative) of The Pearl work to make the story seem like a retold tale?

ANSWERS

TEST 1

  1. A
    2. C
    3. C
    4. B
    5. A
    6. B
    7. C
    8. C
    9. A
    10. B
  2. The ruling class, descended from the Spanish, controlled the Indians by keeping them poor and ignorant. If Coyotito were sent to school to learn “what is in the books,” he could challenge the authority of the system. He could also educate the other Indians and make them aware of ways they might fight their oppressors.

One scene that might be useful to review is the doctor’s visit to Kino’s hut in Chapter VI. There, you see firsthand how the doctor manipulates Kino through the Indian’s ignorance. Kino wants to throw the doctor out, but he can’t because he doesn’t know if the doctor is lying about the effects of the scorpion sting. The doctor would not have been able to carry off the capsule scene with an educated person. It is this kind of control over the Indians that educating Coyotito would change, and it is too threatening for the Spanish upper class to allow.

Another scene you might want to review is the scene at the pearl buyers. Kino’s people have been dealing with pearls for centuries and certainly know the look of a valuable pearl. Yet they allow the pearl buyers’ tricks to make them doubt their own judgment. If Coyotito were educated, he would be in a position to fight such financial exploitation.

 
Your browser does not support the IFRAME tag.
  1. Juan Tomas is the voice of the Indians who have survived oppression, the voice of experience. He doesn’t try to stop Kino from making the dream of the pearl come true, but he does try to warn Kino that he has overestimated the powers of friendship and underestimated the dangers against him.

One place to look for details is the trip to the pearl buyers in Chapter IV. On the way, Juan Tomas reviews the situation and warns Kino that he might be cheated. He also tries to put the event in the context of tradition. It is here that Juan Tomas reminds Kino of the priest’s sermon about other men who have sought to bypass the pearl buyers. Later on, when Kino says he will go to the capital, Juan Tomas warns him that he will be leaving family and friends. Here you see the concept of mi tierra, the ancient attachment to the place of birth, spoken by Juan Tomas. He is the spokesman for traditional Indian ways.

  1. The pearl functions as a symbol on many levels. In your answer, you may want to consider the pearl as a symbol of human greed, dreams of the future, and the human soul. The idea of human greed is first developed at the beginning of Chapter III with the description of the pearl’s effect on the people of the town. In discussing dreams of the future, include the list of Kino’s dreams or visions, as related in Chapter III. For Kino the pearl is the key to attaining these dreams. In terms of the human soul, before Kino leaves for the mountains, he tells Juan Tomas, “This pearl has become my soul.” This may mean that the pearl and its visions have taken over Kino’s true soul, driving him to go against hopeless forces and to sacrifice his own family. It may also mean that Kino’s only hope for dignity (his own and his people’s) lies in the pearl, and without it he is less than a man.

Whatever aspect of the pearl’s meaning you discuss, you should account for the significance of Kino’s throwing it back in the water at the end. Also, be sure to include in your answer the contrast between the pearl’s great value, beauty, and promise and its ultimate role as a catalyst of envy, greed, and destruction.

TEST 2

  1. C
    2. A
    3. B
    4. B
    5. C
    6. A
    7. A
    8. C
    9. B
    10. A
  2. There are two main biological comparisons in The Pearl. One compares the effect of the pearl to the scorpion’s poison at the beginning of Chapter III. This comparison suggests that greed and evil are possible within each person and can come to the surface under certain circumstances. The pearl is a catalyst that brings out such characteristics in people. Steinbeck might even be suggesting that the tendency to greed and evil is inborn, a part of human nature.

The other biological comparison equates the town with a “colonial animal.” This metaphor reinforces Steinbeck’s claim that humans, as well as other species, are interconnected. Nothing happens to one person (a part of the village) alone. For example, Kino alone finds the pearl, but the pearl affects everyone in the village. The village itself behaves like a single organism whose single parts (each inhabitant) react to a stimulus and together contribute to the reaction of the whole (the village).

  1. The greed that you witness throughout the novel, along with Kino’s final gesture of renunciation, certainly suggest that the novel can be read as a warning about the burden of money and possessions. The valuable pearl brings Kino and his family to destruction. There are, however, points of conflicting evidence to suggest the beneficial aspects of material wealth. For example, Steinbeck suggests that greed is part of human nature and that it has both good and bad aspects. Greed makes a man look beyond himself to larger possibilities, as well as making him greedy covet the things of others. On the positive side, it is a good sign that human beings are always eager for improvements in their lives. This helps to assure the progress of humanity.

As a second example, Kino is humiliated and powerless in the face of the people of Spanish descent. If Steinbeck were trying to make antimaterialism his major theme, he probably would not have made Kino’s fear and rage seem so justified a response to oppression.

  1. Technically, the story of Kino is told by a third-person, omniscient narrator. This narrator speaks from a distance, especially in the introduction and at the end, to give the feeling of an old, retold tale. In other words, rather than hearing a firsthand story that the narrator has personally experienced, you are hearing a story told to the narrator. As the novel progresses, the point of view sometimes becomes more immediate in order to take the reader into the action (the way a movie camera does when it zooms in close). It seems as if the narrator is relating the events as they are happening. In Chapter VI, for example, you seem to be directly involved in the flight of Kino and Juana. Throughout The Pearl, the narrator moves back and forth between “close-up” action and distant storytelling

THEMES

  1. Explain the theme of class struggle in The Pearl.
  2. Discuss the development of social consciousness in The Pearl.
  3. Develop one theme that might come from a feminist reading of The Pearl.
  4. How is the theme of appearance vs. reality developed in the novel?
  5. Describe the role of religion, in general, and the Catholic Church, in particular.
  6. Discuss The Pearl as an anticapitalist novel.

 

 

 

  • FORM AND STRUCTURE
  1. Discuss how the parable form is used in The Pearl.
  2. Discuss the use of Steinbeck’s preface as a technique in the novel. What is its purpose and effect?
  3. Describe the biblical motifs in The Pearl and explain their effects.
  4. Describe the biological metaphor of the “colonial animal” in The Pearl and explain its purpose.

GLOSSARY – VOCABULARY LIST

ALGAE – Water plants without true roots or stems, such as seaweed.

BOUGAINVILLAEA – Tropical shrub with inconspicuous flowers surrounded by large purple or red leaves.

BULWARK – A wall-like structure, like a breakwater, raised for defense.

CACTI – Plural of cactus, a thorny desert plant.

CATALYST – Something (or someone) that hastens or brings about a change or a result.

CONFESSION – In the Catholic Church the admission of sins to a priest in order to gain forgiveness.

EGGSHELL CHINA – Very delicate porcelain that is so thin it is translucent.

ESCARPMENT – Steep slope formed by erosion or a break in the earth.

ESTUARY – Wide mouth of a river where the sea tide meets the river current.

INCANDESCENCE – Emission by a hot body of radiation that makes it visible.

INDIGENE – Native plant or animal.

LEGERDEMAIN – Deceptive performance that depends on manual dexterity; trickery or deceit.

MANGROVES – Tropical trees and shrubs that tend to grow together in thick masses in swampy areas.

MONOLITHIC – Made from a single piece of stone; suggesting an unyielding quality.

PEARL OF THE WORLD -Ideal pearl; largest and most beautiful pearl in the world.

POULTICE – Moist mass of cloth or vegetable matter (like herbs) applied to a sore or inflammation for medicinal purposes.

PRECIPITATE – To separate the solid part out from a solution or the substance separated out.

PULQUE – Fermented drink made from agave plants, popular in Mexico.

SEED PEARLS – Very small pearls that resemble grain or seeds in size and form.

STATION (OF THE VIRGIN) – Shrine dedicated to the Virgin Mary, to which religious pilgrimages are made.

SUPPLIANT – One who asks earnestly or begs.

WINCHESTER CARBINE – Short-barreled, lever-action rifle usually used for deer and big game, famous for its power and accuracy.

REFERENCE

THE CRITICS

THE SOURCE OF THE PEARL

Steinbeck nurtured the fable he heard in Mexico four years before he consciously began to develop it. The moral-that the finder of the pearl would be “free” only when he was rid of it-probably was the original inspiration because it accorded with Steinbeck’s earlier beliefs that money and possessions are an intolerable burden, though he himself saw no conflict in carrying that burden. As he imagined the characters involved, they grew and changed shape; they became part of Steinbeck’s story as distinct from the legend. In changing, of course, they also shaped the story into something unlike the tale as Steinbeck first heard it.

Richard O’Connor, John Steinbeck, 1970

STEINBECK’S STYLE

However meaningful the parable of the pearl may be in the abstract, Steinbeck’s success in fleshing out this parable to the dimensions of a credible, forceful human adventure ultimately rests on his prose style, which is flexible to the extent that here as in most of his other novels it becomes technique as well as medium. It is capable not only of creating an aura of symbolic suggestion, but also of rendering details in terms of a camera.

Peter Lisca, The Wide World of John Steinbeck, 1958

THE PEARL AS SENTIMENTAL

Steinbeck is trying in The Pearl to create a drama of the growth of conscious responsibility, but Kino’s act of throwing away the pearl doesn’t settle things for him as it did for the legendary fisherboy. The source offered a perfect tale of a man who consciously weighed the odds and chose hard work and poverty over being pestered all the time-a story that would have made a wonderfully tough-minded companion piece to Cannery Row.

Steinbeck, however, decided to give the legend some sentimental twists without realizing all the revisions that his first changes would necessitate. Perhaps such a basically fantastic, sentimental story does not warrant such strong condemnation; but The Pearl has been widely used as an introduction to fiction, and it provides the kind of introduction that is a disservice to its author-who wrote much better, controlled works-and to fiction itself by failing to suggest the tough-minded complexity of the greatest examples of the art.

Warren French, John Steinbeck, 1975

THE PEARL AS AN ALLEGORY

Kino is identified symbolically with low animal orders: he must rise early and he must root in the earth for sustenance; but the simple, pastoral life has the beauty of the stars, the dawn, and the singing, happy birds. Yet provided also is a realistic description of village life on the fringe of La Paz. Finally, we should observe that the allegory too has begun. The first sentence-“Kino has awakened in the near dark”- is a statement of multiple allegorical significance. Kino is what modern sociologists are fond of calling a primitive. As such, he comes from a society that is in its infancy; or, to paraphrase Steinbeck, it is in the dark or near-dark intellectually, politically, theologically, and sociologically. But the third sentence tells us that the roosters have been crowing for some time, and we are to understand that Kino has heard the cock of progress crow. He will begin to question the institutions that have kept him primitive: medicine, the church, the pearl industry, the government. The allegory operates then locally, dealing with at first one person, Kino, and then with his people, the Mexican peasants of Lower California. But the allegory works also universally, and Kino is Everyman. The darkness in which he awakes is one of the spirit. The cock crow is one of warning that the spirit must awake to its own dangers.

Harry Morris, “The Pearl: Realism and Allegory” from Steinbeck: A Collection of Critical Essays, 1972

Transcript of Literary Devices in The Pearl

Literary devices in The Pearl. Simlie Metaphor This is how big the pearl was when Kino opened it. He says is was a very large pearl “It was as large as a sea-gull’s egg.” Page 26. “He was an animal now, for hiding, for attacking, and he lived only to preserve himself and his family.” Page 69. This quote is a metaphor because it is comparing Kino to an animal who protects his family. Personification “The nerves of the town were pulsing and vibrating with the news” Page 27 This quote is personification because it says that the town was pulsing and vibrating but towns cant do that. The author was giving the town a human charcteristic. Symbol The scorpion symbolizes evil because Coyotito was stung in Chapter 1 and scorpions are generally thought of as evil. This starts destruction in the family which leds to Kino’s accidents.

Appointment of Schools’ BOM Members

The Ministry of education has issued a circular on the appointment of new members to the schools’ Boards of Management (BOM). According to the Ministry, the tenure of the current members come to an end in January, 2022.

According to Section 22 of the Basic Education Act, 2013, the tenure of service for the Chairpersons and Members of the County Education Boards is four (4) and three (3) years respectively.

The current County Education Boards (CEBs) and Schools Board of Management (BoMs), appointed in February 2019, will expire in February 2022.

The Ministry now directs that the process of replacing the current members be started immediately.

“The purpose of this letter therefore, is to ask you to start the process of nomination and selection for appointment of new County Education Boards in accordance with Section 20 (1) (a — k) and School Boards of Management in accordance with Section 56 of the Basic Education Act, 2013.” Says Education Cabinet Secretary Prof. George Magoha.

Magoha says names of the respective nominees should be forwarded on or before 30th November, 2021 through the following offices:

  • County Education Boards to the Principal Secretary, State Department for Early Learning and Basic Education;
  • Boards of Management of Primary Schools to the Director, Primary Education; and
  • Boards of Management of Secondary Schools and other institutions excluding Primary Schools referred to in Section 55 of the Basic Education Act, to the Director, Secondary Education.

Read more details here; Functions and Tenure of the newly constituted Schools’ Board Of Management, BOMs.

Jaramogi Oginga Odinga University Kuccps Admission Letters Download Portal Link

Congratulations Freshers  for placement at Jaramogi Oginga Odinga University of Science and Technology (JOOUST):

Download your admission letter from:  https://admissionsportal.jooust.ac.ke

  1. Choose Government Sponsored Students Section and log in
  2. Type your KCSE index number including the year, eg. 00552/Year
  3. Populate your personal details following the steps 1-5
  4. Download your admission letter and other requirements
  5. Immediately apply for Government Scholarship, loan and Bursary at hef.co.ke

Online Application and Registration Guidelines

Self Sponsored Students

To join the university as a self sponsored student, follow the steps below:

  1. Decide the programme that you want to undertake and ensure you meet the programme qualifications stated in “Our Programmes” menu above.
  2. Click on “Apply” at the top of this web page or at the bottom of this section”
  3. Fill in the required information in each step of the application
  4. Finish the application process and submit your application.
  5. Once your application is submitted successfully, you will receive an email from us indicating your application ID.
  6. Pay the indicated application fee depending on the programme (find payment details below)
  7. To keep track of your application status, login with the Application ID and Password used during creation of your account.
Government Sponsored Students

To join the university as a Government (KUCCPS) sponsored student, follow the steps below:

  1. First ensure you have received an invitation to our university from KUCCPS.
  2. Click on login at the top of this page or at the bottom of this section.
  3. Enter the required login details
  4. The first time you login, you are required to accept or reject the programme you have been offered. Accepting the offer gives you the access to other services while rejecting denies you access to any other services.
Requirements & Payment Details
a) Documents Required for Application & Registration

To apply or register for a programme, you are required to attach the following documents:

  1. Passport photo – a clear passport sized photo is required
  2. Scanned National ID – applies to only Kenyan applicants who are above 18 years of age.
  3. Scanned Birth Certificate – applies to only Kenyan applicants who are below 18 years of age.
  4. Scanned Valid Passport – applies to Non-Kenyan applicants
  5. Academic certificates – At least 1 Academic Certificate Depending on the Programme Category you are applying for.

b) Payment Details
Application Fees
Programme Category Fee (Ksh)
Certificate 1000
Diploma 1500
Masters 3000
PHD 3500
Post Graduate Diploma 2500
Undergraduate 2000

CBC Grade 7 Physical Education and Sports Schemes of Work Free Editable Word, PDF Downloads

CBC Grade 7 Physical Education and Sports Schemes of Work Free Editable Word, PDF Downloads

 GRADE 7 SPOTLIGHT PHYSICAL EDUCATION & SPORTS SCHEMES OF WORK

NAME OF THE TEACHER                                                                SCHOOL                                             YEAR                         TERM                        III       

Week LSN strand Sub-strand Specific Learning Outcomes Key Inquiry Question(s) Learning Experiences Learning Resources Assessment Methods Ref
1 1 CAREE OPPORTUNITIES IN SPORTS Games and sports related Careers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) identify careers in games and sports

b) create linkages and visit relevant sports institutions for familiarization

c) appreciate career opportunities in games and sports for income generation and healthy lifestyles

1. Which kind of career opportunities are found in games and sports? The learner is guided to:

• brainstorm careers in

games and sports

• identifying different

institutions offering

games and sports

• collaboratively interact

with institutions offering

specialized games and sports

Picture, video clips, songs, flashcards

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 73-77

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.105-111

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
  2   Games and sports related Careers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) identify careers in games and sports

b) Name sports institutions found in the community

c) appreciate career opportunities in games and sports for income generation and healthy lifestyles

2. Which sports institutions are found in the community? The learner is guided to:

• brainstorm careers in

games and sports

• identifying different

institutions offering

games and sports

 

Picture, video clips, songs, flashcards

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 73-77

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.105-111

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
2 1   Games and sports related Careers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) identify careers in games and sports

b) Name sports institutions found in the community

c) appreciate career opportunities in games and sports for income generation and healthy lifestyles

3. How can linkages be created with sports institutions in the community for regular interactions? The learner is guided to:

• brainstorm careers in

games and sports

• identifying different

institutions offering

games and sports

 

Picture, video clips, songs, flashcards

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 73-77

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.105-111

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
  2   Games and sports related Careers

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) identify careers in games and sports

b) create linkages and visit relevant sports institutions for familiarization

c) appreciate career opportunities in games and sports for income generation and healthy lifestyles

3. How can linkages be created with sports institutions in the community for regular interactions?

 

The learner is guided to:

• identifying different

institutions offering

games and sports

• collaboratively interact

with institutions offering

specialized games and sports

Picture, video clips, songs, flashcards

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 73-77

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.105-111

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
3 1   Use of talent to generate income By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) identify ways of earning income using talents

b) develop personal management skills and financial discipline from

income generated in sports

c) recognize personal abilities

as a source of income generation and success management

1. How can sports talent be used to generate income?2. How can success in sports be contained honorably?

 

The learner is guided to:

• create a list on sources of

income from sports talent

• discuss the different ways

of generating income through talent

 

Picture, video clips, songs, flashcards

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 78-82

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.112-118

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
  2   Use of talent to generate income By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) identify ways of earning income using talents

b) determine appropriate choice of financial services for management of

monetary awards

c) recognize personal abilities as a source of income generation and success management

3. How does one develop personal and financial discipline from sports income?

4. Which financial services can be used for management of monetary awards?

The learner is guided to:

• brainstorm on ways of

developing personal and

financial discipline

• research on how to access financial services, preparing a personal budget, saving and

spending

• research ways of protecting own creativity and share feedback

Picture, video clips, songs, flashcards

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 78-82

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.112-118

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
4 1 SWIMMING Water Orientation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) establish the levels of water

confidence for learning progression

b) demonstrate buoyancy and floating in water

c) observe rules and regulations of

swimming for safety

d) appreciate water games for fun

and enjoyment while ensuring safety

1. In which ways does one gain water confidence

in swimming?

2. Which rules and regulations need to be observed in water and within the pool area?

The learner is guided to:

• safely make entry and exit

into the swimming pool with

ease

• demonstrate buoyancy and

floating in water while

building confidence

 

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 110-116

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.157-165

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
  2   Water Orientation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) establish the levels of water

confidence for learning progression

b) demonstrate buoyancy and floating in water

c) observe rules and regulations of

swimming for safety

d) appreciate water games for fun

and enjoyment while ensuring safety

1. In which ways does one gain water confidence

in swimming?

2. Which rules and regulations need to be observed in water and within the pool area?

The learner is guided to:

• safely make entry and exit

into the swimming pool with

ease

• demonstrate buoyancy and

floating in water while

building confidence

 

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 110-116

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.157-165

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
5 1   Water Orientation

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) creatively float and balance in

water for orientation

b) observe rules and regulations of

swimming for safety

c) appreciate water games for fun

and enjoyment while ensuring safety

1. In which ways does one gain water confidence

in swimming?

2. Which rules and regulations need to be observed in water and within the pool area?

The learner is guided to:

• practise buoyancy and

floating in water

• play water games while

applying basic rules in and

out of the swimming pool

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 110-116

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.157-165

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
  2   Front Crawl

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe the flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing in Front

crawl

b) perform the flutter kick, arm

action and breathing techniques

for skill acquisition

c) appreciate own and others

efforts during swimming while observing safety

1. What is the role of the different components of Front crawl?2. What is the importance of combining the Front crawl techniques in swimming? The learner is guided to:

• Watch a video clip on Front

crawl technique

• discuss the techniques of

flutter kicks, arm action and

breathing in Front crawl

 

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 117-122

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.166-170

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
6 1   Front Crawl

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe the flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing in Front

crawl

b) perform the flutter kick, arm

action and breathing techniques

for skill acquisition

c) appreciate own and others

efforts during swimming while observing safety

1. What is the role of the different components of Front crawl?2. What is the importance of combining the Front crawl techniques in swimming? The learner is guided to:

• Watch a video clip on Front

crawl technique

• discuss the techniques of

flutter kicks, arm action and

breathing in Front crawl

 

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 117-122

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.166-170

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
  2   Front Crawl

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe the flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing in Front crawl

b) creatively combine the leg kick,

arm pulls action and breathing in Front crawl

c) appreciate own and others

efforts during swimming while observing safety

1. What is the role of the different components of Front crawl?2. What is the importance of combining the Front crawl techniques in swimming? The learner is guided to:

• demonstrate flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing in Front

crawl

• collaboratively practise drills in Front crawl

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 117-122

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.166-170

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
7 1   Front Crawl

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe the flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing in Front crawl

b) creatively combine the leg kick,

arm pulls action and breathing in Front crawl

c) appreciate own and others

efforts during swimming while observing safety

1. What is the role of the different components of Front crawl?2. What is the importance of combining the Front crawl techniques in swimming? The learner is guided to:

• demonstrate flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing in Front

crawl

• collaboratively practise drills in Front crawl

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 117-122

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.166-170

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
  2   Back stroke in swimming

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe the body position for

performing Back stroke

b) describe flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing in Back stroke

c) appreciate own and others

efforts during back stroke while

observing safety

What is the role of body position in swimming using Backstroke technique?

 

The learner is guided to:

• watch a video clip on Back

stroke technique and observe

the execution of the skill

• discuss supine body position

and the techniques of flutter

kicks, arm action and

breathing during Back stroke

 

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 122-128

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.171-179

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
8 1   Back stroke in swimming

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) describe the body position for

performing Back stroke

b) describe flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing in Back stroke

c) appreciate own and others

efforts during back stroke while

observing safety

What is the role of body position in swimming using Backstroke technique?

 

The learner is guided to:

• watch a video clip on Back

stroke technique and observe

the execution of the skill

• discuss supine body position

and the techniques of flutter

kicks, arm action and

breathing during Back stroke

 

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 122-128

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.171-179

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
  2   Back stroke in swimming

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

a) perform the flutter kick, arm

action and breathing techniques

for skill acquisition

b) creatively combine the flutter

kick, arm action and breathing

for self-efficacy

c) appreciate own and others

efforts during back stroke while

observing safety

What is the role of body position in swimming using Backstroke technique?

 

The learner is guided to:

• demonstrate flutter kicks, arm

action and breathing while insupine position and share

feedback

• practice drills for breathing,

flutter kicks and arm action in

back stroke

• engage in water games for fun

and enjoyment

Pictures, floatation devices, sinking objects, ping pong balls

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. T.G Pg. 122-128

 

Spotlight Physical Edu. Pb. Pg.171-179

Observation

Discussion

Demonstration

Practical lessons

 

 
9 END TERM ASSESSMENTAND CLOSING

 

Grade 8 Rationalized Term 2 CBC Schemes of Work

Get free Grade 8 Rationalized Term 2 CBC Schemes of Work here:

Grade_8_Rationalised_Creative_Arts_and_Sports_Schemes_of_Work_Term 2 
GRADE_8_TERM_2_MATHEMATICS_SCHEMES_klb 
GRADE_8_TERM_2_KISWAHILI_SCHEMES_klb 
GRADE_8_TERM_2_CRE_SCHEMES 
GRADE_8_TERM_2_AGRI_NUTRITION_SCHEMES 
GRADE_8_TERM_2_INTEGRATED_SCIENCE_SCHEMES_mentor 
GRADE_8_TERM_2_SOCIAL_STUDIES_SCHEMES 
GRADE_8_TERM_2_ENGLISH_SCHEMES 
GRADE_8_TERM_2_PRETECHNICAL_SCHEMES 

Grade 6 Free CBC Schemes of Work

GRADE 6 SPOTLIGHT SOCIAL STUDIES

SCHEME OF WORK TERM 1

SCHOOL GRADE LEARNING AREA TERM YEAR
  GRADE 6 SOCIAL STUDIES 1 2022

 

Week Lesson Strand

/Theme

Sub-strand Specific-Learning outcomes Key Inquiry Question(S) Learning/ Teaching Experience Learning

Resources         

Assessment Methods Reflection
1 1 Natural and the Built Environments Position and size of countries in Eastern Africa; Countries found in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Name the countries found in Eastern Africa.

b)   Draw or trace the map of Eastern Africa.

c)    Appreciate the countries in Eastern Africa.

 

Which countries are found in Eastern Africa? Learners are guided to name the countries found in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to draw or trace the map of Eastern Africa.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to use a compass direction to describe the position of the countries in Eastern Africa.

Atlas

Balloons

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 1-5

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 Natural and the Built Environments Position and size of countries in Eastern Africa; Sizes of the countries of Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify the sizes of different countries in Eastern Africa from an atlas.

b)   Arrange Eastern African countries according to their sizes starting from the smallest to the largest.

c)    Have fun and enjoy playing a game of describing the positons and sizes of countries in Eastern Africa.

 

Which is the largest country in Eastern Africa?

 

Which is the smallest country in Eastern Africa?

Learners are guided to identify the sizes of different countries in Eastern Africa from an atlas.

 

In groups, learners are guided to arrange Eastern Africa countries according to their sizes starting from the smallest to the largest.

 

In groups, learners are guided to playing a game of describing the positons and sizes of countries in Eastern Africa.

Atlas

Balloons

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 5-6

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 Natural and the Built Environments Position and size of countries in Eastern Africa; Locating places using latitudes and longitudes in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   State the difference between latitudes and longitudes.

b)   Draw a map of Eastern Africa. On it, indicate the latitudes and longitudes.

c)    Appreciate the importance of latitudes and longitudes.

What is the difference between latitudes and longitudes? Learners are guided to state the difference between latitudes and longitudes.

 

Learners are guided to draw a map of Eastern Africa. On it, indicate the latitudes and longitudes.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to use an atlas to identify the main longitudes and latitudes on the globe.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 6-9

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
2 1 Natural and the Built Environments Main physical features in Eastern Africa; Formation of the main physical features in Eastern Africa: Volcanic mountains By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Define physical features and describe the formation of volcanic mountains.

b)   Model a volcanic mountain using clay or plasticine.

c)    Have fun and enjoy modelling  volcanic mountain.

How are volcanic mountains formed? In pairs, learners are guided to identify the main physical feature in his/her locality.

 

Learners are guided to draw the formation of volcanic mountains.

 

Learners are guided to watch a video, listen to an audio or visit the library to find out the formation of volcanic mountains.

 

Atlas

Clay

Plasticine

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 9-13

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 Natural and the Built Environments Main physical features in Eastern Africa; Formation of the main physical features in Eastern Africa: Block Mountains By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Describe the formation of block mountains.

b)   Draw the illustrations showing the formation of block mountains.

c)    Appreciate the formation of block mountains.

 

How are block mountains formed? Learners are guided to describe the formation of block mountains.

 

Learners are guided to draw the illustrations showing the formation of block mountains.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to give examples of block mountains in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to watch a video, listen to an audio or visit the library to find out the formation of block mountains.

 

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 13-14

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 Natural and the Built Environments Main physical features in Eastern Africa; Formation of the main physical features in Eastern Africa: Rift Valley By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Describe the formation of the Rift Valley.

b)   Model the rift valley using clay or plasticine.

c)    Appreciate the formation of Rift Valley.

How was Rift Valley formed? Learners are guided to describe the formation of the Rift Valley.

 

Learners are guided to draw the formation of rift valley.

 

Learners are guided to model the rift valley using clay or plasticine.

 

Learners are guided to watch a video, listen to an audio or visit the library to find out the formation of rift valley.

 

Atlas

Clay

Plasticine

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 15-17

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
3 1 Natural and the Built Environments Main physical features in Eastern Africa; Formation of the main physical features in Eastern Africa: Lakes

Plains

By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Describe the formation of lakes and plains.

b)   Model a lava-dammed lake, crater lake and ox-bow lakes.

c)    Appreciate the importance of lakes to the community.

How are lakes formed? Learners are guided to describe the formation of lakes and plains.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to classify Eastern Africa lakes according to the process of formation.

 

In groups, learners are guided to model a lava-dammed lake, crater lake and ox-bow lakes.

 

Atlas

Clay

Plasticine

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 17-20

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 Natural and the Built Environments Main physical features in Eastern Africa; Location of the main physical features in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Name the main physical features in Eastern Africa.

b)   Use an atlas to locate the main physical features in Eastern Africa.

c)    Appreciate the physical features in Eastern Africa.

 

Which are the main physical features in Eastern Africa? Learners are guided to name the main physical features in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to use an atlas to locate the main physical features in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to trace the map of Eastern Africa and locate the physical features.

 

Photographs

Atlas

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 21-23

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 Natural and the Built Environments Climatic Regions in Eastern Africa; Characteristics of the main climatic regions in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify the characteristics of the main climatic regions in Eastern Africa.

b)   Draw a map showing climatic regions in Eastern Africa.

c)    Appreciate the different climatic regions in Eastern Africa.

 

What are the characteristics of climatic regions in Eastern Africa?

 

What weather conditions do you experience in your locality?

In groups, learners are guided to identify the main climatic regions in Eastern Africa form an atlas (mountain, tropical, sub-tropical, equatorial, modified equatorial, desert, semi-desert)

 

In groups, learners are guided to identify the characteristics of the main climatic regions in Eastern Africa.

 

In groups, learners are guided to model a map showing climatic regions in Eastern Africa.

Atlas

Clay

Plasticine

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 24-27

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
4 1 Natural and the Built Environments Climatic Regions in Eastern Africa; Influence of climate on human activities By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Describe how different climate influences human activities.

b)   Explain how the climate around the school influences human activities.

c)    Appreciate how different climates influence human activities.

 

How does climate influence human activities? Learners are guided to describe how different climate influences human activities.

 

In groups, learners are guided to explain how the climate around the school influences human activities.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 27-28

 

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 Natural and the Built Environments Vegetation in Eastern Africa; Main types of vegetation in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Define the meaning of vegetation.

b)   Observe the type of vegetation around the school and draw the vegetation.

c)    Have fun and enjoy the outdoor activity of observing and drawing the type of vegetation around the school.

 

What is vegetation?

 

Which type of vegetation is found around your school?

Learners are guided to define the meaning of vegetation.

 

Learners are guided to observe the type of vegetation around the school and draw the vegetation.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 28-29

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 Natural and the Built Environments Vegetation in Eastern Africa; Locating the main types of vegetation in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify the main types of vegetation in Eastern Africa.

b)   Create a vegetation wheel from a cartoon or manila paper and take turns to spin the wheel.

c)    Appreciate the types of vegetation in Eastern Africa.

 

Which types of vegetation are found in Eastern Africa? Learners are guided to identify the main types of vegetation in Eastern Africa.

 

In groups, learners are guided to create a vegetation wheel from a cartoon or manila paper and take turns to spin the wheel and use an atlas to locate the vegetation zone identified after every spin.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 30-32

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
5 1 Natural and the Built Environments Vegetation in Eastern Africa; Characteristics of the main types of vegetation in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify the characteristics of the main types of vegetation.

b)   Design vegetation cards and play a game of describing the characteristics of the main types of vegetation displayed by card.

c)    Appreciate the characteristics of types of vegetation in Eastern Africa.

 

What are the characteristics of the types of vegetation found in Eastern Africa? Learners are guided to identify the characteristics of the main types of vegetation.

 

In groups, learners are guided to design vegetation cards and play a game of describing the characteristics of the main types of vegetation displayed by card.

 

Atlas

Cards

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 32-34

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 Natural and the Built Environments Vegetation in Eastern Africa; Making of a mountain vegetation model By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Make a mountain vegetation model and colour the vegetation belts.

b)   Identify ways of conserving vegetation.

c)    Have fun and enjoy making a mountain vegetation model.

How to make a mountain vegetation model?

 

How should we conserve vegetation?

In groups, learners are guided to make a mountain vegetation model and colour the vegetation belts.

 

Learners are guided to label different vegetation zones on the model.

 

Learners are guided to identify ways of conserving vegetation.

 

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 34-37

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 Natural and the Built Environments Historic Built Environments in Eastern Africa; Main historic built environments in Eastern Africa: Museums in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify the main historic built environments in Eastern Africa.

b)   Search the internet or atlas for the location of different museums in Eastern Africa.

c)    Appreciate the use of museums in Eastern Africa.

 

Which are the main historic built environments in Eastern Africa?

 

What are the uses of museums?

Learners are guided to identify the main historic built environments in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to search the internet or atlas for the location of different museums in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to state the uses of museums.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 38

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
6 1 Natural and the Built Environments Historic Built Environments in Eastern Africa; Main historic built environments in Eastern Africa: Monuments in Eastern Africa

Historic Buildings

 

By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Define the meaning of monuments and identify monuments in Eastern Africa.

b)   Use an atlas or any other available reference materials to find the location of the historical buildings in Eastern Africa.

c)    Appreciate the reasons why some buildings are historic in Eastern Africa.

 

What is a Monument?

 

Why are some buildings historical?

Learners are guided to define the meaning of monuments and identify monuments in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to use an atlas or any other available reference materials to find the location of the historical buildings in Eastern Africa (Meroe Pyramids Ruins, Great Mosque of Kilwa, Bagamoyo Old Church, Fossils Ghebbi Fortress)

 

Learners are guided to give reasons why each of the building is historical in Eastern Africa (Meroe Pyramids Ruins, Great Mosque of Kilwa, Bagamoyo Old Church, Fossils Ghebbi Fortress)

 

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 39-40

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 Natural and the Built Environments Historic Built Environments in Eastern Africa; Importance of main historic built environments in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Discuss the importance of main historic built environments.

b)   Compose a poem he/she will recite during the opening of the cultural corner.

c)    Appreciate the importance of historic built environments.

What is the importance of main historic built environments? In groups, learners are guided to discuss the importance of main historic built environments.

 

In groups, learners are guided to Create a poem that they will recite during the opening of the cultural corner

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 40-42

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 People, Population and Social Organizations Language groups in Eastern Africa; Classification of communities in their language groups in Eastern Africa

 

By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify major language groups in Eastern Africa.

b)   Classify communities according to their language group in Eastern Africa.

c)    Appreciate the importance of language groups.

 

What is a language group?

 

What are the major language groups in Eastern Africa?

Learners are guided to define a language group.

 

Learners are guided to identify major language groups in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to read the conversation between Mr. Ubuntu and Grade Six learners of Mpole Primary School.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to classify communities according to their language group in Eastern Africa.

 

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 43-46

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
7 1 People, Population and Social Organizations Language groups in Eastern Africa; Reasons for migration and settlement of language groups By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Give reasons for migration and settlement of language groups.

b)   Design posters on reasons why language groups migrated and settled in their present land.

c)    Appreciate the reasons for migration and settlement of language groups.

 

What are the reasons for migration and settlement of language groups? Learners are guided to give reasons for migration and settlement of language groups.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to design posters on reasons why language groups migrated and settled in their present land.

 

Learners are guided to use reference materials such as textbooks, the internet or any other available materials, find out the reasons why the main language groups in Eastern Africa migrated.

 

Atlas

Manilla papers

Rulers

Colours/crayons

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 47-50

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 People, Population and Social Organizations Language groups in Eastern Africa; Movement and settlement of different language groups in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify the movement and settlement of different language groups in Eastern Africa.

b)   Draw a map of Eastern Africa showing the migration routes and settlements of different language groups in Eastern Africa.

c)    Appreciate the movement and settlement of different language groups in Eastern Africa.

 

How did different language groups move and settled in Eastern Africa? Learners are guided to identify the movement and settlement of different language groups in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to draw a map of Eastern Africa showing the migration routes and settlements of different language groups in Eastern Africa.

 

In groups, learners are guided to model the map of Eastern Africa to illustrate the migration routes.

Atlas

Water

Clay

Plasticine

Painting brushes

Manilla papers

Maize seeds

Beans seeds

Water-based colours

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 51-52

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 People, Population and Social Organizations Language groups in Eastern Africa; Effects of migration and settlement of selected language groups in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Outline the effects of migration and settlement of the main language groups in Eastern Africa.

b)   Make a poster using declaration messages of unity.

c)    Appreciate the importance of unity among different communities.

 

What happens when people move and settled in a new place? Learners are guided to outline the effects of migration and settlement of the main language groups in Eastern Africa.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to make a poster using declaration messages of unity.

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 53-55

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
8 1 People, Population and Social Organizations Population distribution in Eastern Africa; Factors that influence population distribution in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify the factors that influence population distribution in Eastern Africa.

b)   Draw the map of Eastern Africa. Use different colours to show areas of high, medium and low population density in Eastern Africa.

c)    Appreciate the factors that influence population distribution in Eastern Africa.

 

Which are the factors that influence population distribution in Eastern Africa? Learners are guided to identify the factors that influence population distribution in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to draw the map of Eastern Africa. Use different colours to show areas of high, medium and low population density in Eastern Africa.

 

Learners are guided to use an atlas to find out population distribution patterns in Eastern Africa.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 55-59

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 People, Population and Social Organizations Language groups in Eastern Africa; Effects of High Population Density in Eastern Africa By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Outline the effects of High Population Density in Eastern Africa.

b)   Recite a poem on the effects of high population density in Eastern Africa.

c)    Have fun reciting a poem on the effects of high population in Eastern Africa.

 

What are the effects of high population density in Eastern Africa? Learners are guided to outline the effects of High Population Density in Eastern Africa.

 

In groups, learners are guided to recite a poem on the effects of high population density in Eastern Africa.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 60-61

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 People, Population and Social Organizations Culture and Social Organization; Age groups and age sets in African Traditional Society By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Define the meaning of age group and age sets.

b)   Role play the traditional dances or festivals that takes place in his/her community when celebrating age sets.

c)    Appreciate the importance of age sets in the community.

 

What is age group?

 

What is age set?

 

What are the roles and responsibilities of age sets?

Learners are guided to define the meaning of age group and age sets.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to role play the traditional dances or festivals that takes place in his/her community when celebrating age sets.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to outline the steps to be followed to be a member of a given age sets

 

Learners are guided to mention the roles and responsibilities of age sets.

 

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 61-63

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
9 1 People, Population and Social Organizations Language groups in Eastern Africa; Functions of  Clan By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Outline the functions of clans.

b)   Read the conversation between Anita and Zari and discuss the functions of a clan in a community from the conversation.

c)    Appreciate the functions of a clan in the community.

 

What is a clan?

 

What are the functions of clans?

Learners are guided to outline the functions of clans.

 

In pairs, learners are guided to read the conversation between Anita and Zari and discuss the functions of a clan in a community from the conversation.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 63-65

Atlas

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  2 People, Population and Social Organizations Language groups in Eastern Africa; Aspects of Traditional Culture that need to be preserved By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Identify aspects of Africa Traditional Culture that need to be preserved.

b)   Sing a song on different aspects of Africa traditional culture in his/her community.

c)    Appreciate the aspects of Africa Traditional Culture that need to be preserved.

 

What are the aspects of African traditional culture that need to be preserved? Learners are guided to identify aspects of Africa Traditional Culture that need to be preserved.

 

Learners are guided to sing a song on different aspects of Africa traditional culture in his/her community.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 65-67

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
  3 People, Population and Social Organizations School and Community By the end of the sub-strand, the learner should be able to:

a)   Mention ways in which the school collaborates with the community.

b)   Compose a song on benefits of collaboration between his/her school and the community.

c)    Appreciate the benefits of collaboration between the school and the community.

 

What are the ways in which the school collaborates with the community?

 

What are the benefits of collaboration between the school and the community?

Learners are guided to mention ways in which the school collaborates with the community.

 

Learners are guided to identify the benefits of collaboration between the school and the community.

 

In groups, learners are guided to compose a song on benefits of collaboration between his/her school and the community.

Atlas

Photographs

Pictures

Video clips

Maps

Charts

Realia

Computing devices

Spotlight; Social Studies Learner’s Book Grade 6 pg. 67-73

 

Oral questions Oral Report Observation

 

 
10                    ASSESSMENT